Standing surface to encourage movement

ABSTRACT

A shaped standing mat or base providing a trampoline-like rebounding surface that is a highly responsive and dynamic support surface for a standing person where that person is able to maintain a proper stance relative to their foot angle, and to engage in mild exercise movement and foot rotation and stretching without undue interruption of mental concentration in a work or other environment.

CROSS REFERENCE TO RELATED APPLICATIONS

This is a continuation of International Application No.PCT/US2016/029618, filed Apr. 27, 2016, which claims the benefit of U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/245,268, filed Oct. 22, 2015, U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/211,856, filed Aug. 30, 2015, U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/182,429, filed Jun. 19, 2015, and U.S.Provisional Application No. 62/153,505, filed Apr. 27, 2015, each ofwhich prior applications is incorporated herein by reference in itsentirety.

BACKGROUND

There is an increasing recognition that standing regularly during workprovides numerous benefits and offsets the negative effects ofover-sitting. However, standing for prolonged periods brings its ownchallenges, in part because many people are not used to standing whileworking. For example, individuals may stand stationary with their feetplanted and moving relatively little for prolonged periods of time.Resilient standing mats may be used to provide cushioning underfoot.Although, such mats provide some comfort for standing workers, they donot encourage movement and are not sufficient to generally allow workersto stand more comfortably in a stationary position for prolonged periods(e.g., more than an hour). Due to these limitations related toanti-fatigue mats, recommendations have been made that a person rotatetheir sitting and standing every 15-30 minutes, which can be distractingand less likely to be followed without constant reminders. Some standingusers have attempted to do some form of exercise while working byplacing exercise devices next to a desk or near the work area, such astreadmills, rebounders, balance boards, foot stretching devices and manyothers that may be utilized near, at, or under a desk or standing desk.However, many exercise devices are too intense, involved, or distractingto utilize during concentrated work time where mental focus isnecessary; and they are not designed for a worker to use during work,but rather during breaks from work.

SUMMARY

The disclosed devices employ a novel approach by encouraging movement byusing a faster responding, more resilient trampoline-like reboundingaction, and a relatively less dampening surface that allows for bettercirculation and blood flow through the feet and body, along with mildexercise type movements that can be performed concurrently duringfocused work.

The disclosed devices serve to make standing while working morecomfortable, minimize the harm caused by excessive sitting, and permitfor mild exercise and movement in order to increase blood flow; and topermit a worker to stand comfortably for a longer period of time.

As disclosed, persons who work standing up most of the day canexperience fatigue and poor circulation after standing on a conventionalanti-fatigue mat for long periods of time. Disclosed are devices thatprovide the benefits of an anti-fatigue mat but with a moretrampoline-like response, as well as the benefits of exercise devices ina single standing mat or platform; while permitting a worker toconcurrently maintain concentration on work tasks without being overlydistracted.

Treadmill or bicycle/spinning desks create significant cognitive loadsthat demand the user's attention to moving and balancing at the cost ofthoughtful, productive, efficient work. Whereas, the springy, reactivesurfaces of the disclosed devices cause the user to make subtlecontinuous micro-movements to maintain their balance without adverselyaffecting their work productivity. These micro-movements don't demandconscious attention to maintain movement, yet still encourage enoughmovement and small muscle contractions to encourage healthy blood-flowto prevent legs and feet from feeling stiff from prolonged staticstanding.

The disclosed devices allow for beneficial and highly dynamic, moretrampoline-like, rebound response and movement that increases thetriggering of the body's mechanism for fat and sugar metabolism and thatincreases circulation and blood flow while standing at work. Thebenefits of the disclosed devices accrue whether one is working at astanding desk, or at other positions where a worker may need to stand;such as a cashier, or other jobs requiring long periods of standing.

It is to be understood that both the foregoing and the followingdescriptions are exemplary and explanatory only and are not intended tolimit the claimed invention or application thereof in any mannerwhatsoever.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

In the drawings:

FIG. 1A is a top view of a board with an alternate shape that may beused for different foot positions.

FIG. 1B is a top view of a board with a different alternate shape thatmay be used for different foot positions.

FIG. 1C is a top view of a board with another alternate shape that maybe used for different foot positions.

FIG. 1D is a top view of a user standing on the board of FIG. 1A.

FIG. 1E is a top view of the user standing on the board of FIG. 1D witha wider stance.

FIG. 1F is a top view of a user with shorter feet standing on the boardof FIG. 1D.

FIG. 2A is a top view of a D shaped mat.

FIG. 2B is top view of an alternate embodiment of a D shaped mat.

FIG. 2C is an upper isometric view of a user standing on the straightedge of a D shaped mat.

FIG. 2D is an upper isometric view of a user standing on the curved edgealong the curved perimeter of a D shaped mat.

FIG. 3A is a side view of a user standing on one end of a standingplatform in the lengthwise direction.

FIG. 3B is a top view of the user standing on one end of the standingplatform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3A with their feet orientedstraight out.

FIG. 3C is an upper isometric view of the user standing on one end ofthe standing platform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3A with theirfeet oriented straight out.

FIG. 3D is a top view of the user standing on one end of the standingplatform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3B with their feet orientedin along the edge of the platform.

FIG. 3E is an upper isometric view of the user standing on one end ofthe standing platform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3C with theirfeet oriented in along the edge of the platform.

FIG. 3F is a side view of the user standing on the opposite end of thestanding platform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3A.

FIG. 3G is a top view of the user standing on the opposite end of thestanding platform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3B with their feetangled out along the edge of the platform.

FIG. 3H is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the oppositeend of the standing platform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3C withtheir feet angled out along the edge of the platform.

FIG. 3I is a side view of the user standing on the opposite end of thestanding platform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3A with their feetoriented straight ahead.

FIG. 3J is a top view of the user standing on the opposite end of thestanding platform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3B with their feetoriented straight ahead.

FIG. 3K is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the oppositeend of the standing platform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3C withtheir feet oriented straight ahead.

FIG. 3L is a side view of the user standing on the middle of thestanding platform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3A with their feetangled out slightly along the edge of the board.

FIG. 3M is a top view of the user standing on the middle of the standingplatform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3B with their feet angledout slightly along the edge of the board.

FIG. 3N is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the middle ofthe standing platform in the lengthwise direction of FIG. 3C with theirfeet angled out slightly along the edge of the board.

FIG. 4A is a top view of a user standing on the wide section of atapered platform.

FIG. 4B is a front view of a user standing on the wide section of thetapered platform of HG. 4A.

FIG. 4C is an upper isometric view of a user standing on the widesection of the tapered platform of FIG. 4A.

FIG. 4D is a top view of a user standing on the narrow section of thetapered platform of HG. 4A.

FIG. 4E is a front view of a user standing on the narrow section of thetapered platform of HG 4A.

FIG. 4F is an upper isometric view of a user standing on the narrowsection of the tapered platform of FIG. 4A.

FIG. 5A is a top view of a user standing on a split standing platformwith their feet aligned forwards.

FIG. 5B is an upper isometric view of a user standing on the splitstanding platform of FIG. 5A with their feet aligned forwards.

FIG. 5C is a top view of a user standing on the split standing platformof FIG. 5A with their feet aligned outwards.

FIG. 5D is an upper isometric view of a user standing on the splitstanding platform of FIG. 5A with their feet aligned outwards.

FIG. 5E is a top view of a user standing on the split standing platformof FIG. 5A with their feet aligned inwards.

FIG. 5F is an upper isometric view of a user standing on the splitstanding platform of FIG. 5A with their feet aligned inwards.

FIG. 5G is a top view of a user standing on the split standing platformof FIG. 5A with their feet offset.

FIG. 5H is an upper isometric view of a user standing on the splitstanding platform of FIG. 5A with their feet offset.

FIG. 5I is a top view of a user standing on a coupling standing platformwhich is separated and with their feet aligned outwards.

FIG. 5J is an upper isometric view of a user standing on the couplingstanding platform of FIG. 5I which is separated and with their feetaligned outwards.

FIG. 5K is a top view of a user standing on the coupling standingplatform of FIG. 5I which is joined and with their feet alignedoutwards.

FIG. 5L is an upper isometric view of a user standing on the couplingstanding platform of HG. 5I which is joined and with their feet alignedoutwards.

FIG. 6A is a front exploded view of a flat inflatable platform and arigid curved arch.

FIG. 6B is a front view of the flat inflatable platform of FIG. 6Aresting on the rigid curved arch of FIG. 6A.

FIG. 6C is a front view of a user standing on the flat inflatableplatform attached to the rigid curved arch of FIG. 6B.

FIG. 6D is a side view of a user standing on a flat inflatable platformattached to a rigid convexly curved arch.

FIG. 6E is a front view of the rigid convexly curved arch of FIG. 6D.

FIG. 6F is an angled view of the rigid convexly curved arch of FIG. 6D.

FIG. 6G is a front view of a flat inflatable platform attached to aconcave rigid curved arch.

FIG. 7A is a front view of a mildly convexly curved standing platform.

FIG. 7B is a front view of a user standing on the mildly convexly curvedstanding platform of FIG. 7A.

FIG. 7C is a front view of a moderately convexly curved standingplatform.

FIG. 7D is a front view of a user standing on the moderately convexlycurved standing platform of FIG. 7C.

FIG. 7E is a front view of a strongly convexly curved standing platform.

FIG. 7F is a front view of a user standing on the strongly convexlycurved standing platform of FIG. 7E.

FIG. 7G is side view of a standing platform with a concave surface.

FIG. 7H is a cross-section view along line H of the standing platform ofFIG. 7G.

FIG. 8A is a side view of a user stretching their legs with their feetpointed down off the front of a standing platform.

FIG. 8B is an upper isometric view of a user stretching their legs withtheir feet pointed down off the front of a standing platform.

FIG. 8C is a side view of a user stretching their legs with their feetpointed up on the back of a standing platform.

FIG. 8D is an upper isometric view of a user stretching their legs withtheir feet pointed up on the back of a standing platform.

FIG. 8E is a side view of a user stretching their legs with their feetpointed down off the front of a standing platform while balancing thestanding platform on its front edge.

FIG. 8F is an upper isometric view of the user on the standing platformshown in FIG. 8E.

FIG. 8G is a side view of a user stretching their legs with their feetpointed up on the back of a standing platform while balancing thestanding platform on its rear edge.

FIG. 8H is an upper isometric view of the user on the standing platformshown in FIG. 8G.

FIG. 8I is a front view of a user straddling a standing platform withtheir feet and rocking the standing platform up onto its rocking regionon the user's right side.

FIG. 8J is a front view of a user straddling a standing platform withtheir feet and rocking the standing platform up onto its rocking regionon the user's left side.

FIG. 9A is a side view of a standing platform with a rocking base withvariable rigidity and flexibility.

FIG. 9B is a front cross-section view along line B of the standingplatform of FIG. 9A.

FIG. 9C is a front view of a user standing on a standing platform with arocking base in the centered position.

FIG. 9D is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the standingplatform of FIG. 9C.

FIG. 9E is a front view of a user standing on a stranding platform witha rocking base with it rocked to the user's left side.

FIG. 9F is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the standingplatform of FIG. 9E.

FIG. 9G is a front view of a user standing on a standing platform with arocking base with it rocked to the user's right side.

FIG. 9H is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the standingplatform of FIG. 9G.

FIG. 9I is a top view of a standing platform with a catenary rigid orsemi-rigid rocking base.

FIG. 9J is a side cross-section view along line J of the standingplatform of FIG. 9I.

FIG. 9K is a front cross-section view along line K of the standingplatform of FIG. 9I.

FIG. 9L is a top view of a standing platform with an elliptical edgerigid or semi-rigid rocking base.

FIG. 9M is a side cross-section view along line M of the standingplatform of FIG. 9L.

FIG. 9N is a bottom view of the standing platform of FIG. 9L.

FIG. 9O is a front cross-section view along line O of the standingplatform of FIG. 9L.

FIG. 9P is a front cross-section view showing further details of theregion within the area P of the standing platform of FIG. 9O.

FIG. 9Q is a top view of a standing platform with a variable ellipseprofile rigid rocking base.

FIG. 9R is a side cross-section view along line R of the standingplatform of FIG. 9Q.

FIG. 9S is a front cross-section view along line S of the standingplatform of FIG. 9Q.

FIG. 9T is a front cross-section view showing further details of theregion within the area T of the standing platform of FIG. 9S.

FIG. 9U is a side view of a standing platform with a curved bottom on atoroidal compliant or non-compliant base.

FIG. 9V is a front cross-section view showing further details along lineV of the standing platform of FIG. 9U.

FIG. 9W is a front cross-section view of a standing platform with acurved bottom on a closed compliant or non-compliant base.

FIG. 9X is a front cross-section view of a standing platform with acurved bottom on a compliant or non-compliant curved base.

FIG. 9Y is an exploded upper isometric view showing further details ofthe standing platform of FIG. 9U.

FIG. 9Z is an upper isometric view of a drop stitch inflatable platformwith a curved bottom edge.

FIG. 9AA is a top view of seam tape with cutouts for use with a dropstitch inflatable platform to create a curved bottom edge.

FIG. 9AB is a side view of the inflatable platform of FIG. 9Z.

FIG. 9AC is a front cross-section view along line AC of the inflatableplatform of FIG. 9AB.

FIG. 9AD is a front cross-section detailed view of the region within thearea AD of the inflatable platform of FIG. 9AC.

FIG. 10A is a side view of a user preparing to slide a standing platformwith their right foot along the back of the board.

FIG. 10B is a side view of a user sliding a standing platform with theirright foot pushing the back of the board.

FIG. 10C is an upper isometric view of the user preparing to slide thestanding platform of FIG. 10A.

FIG. 10D is an upper isometric view of the user sliding the standingplatform of FIG. 10B.

FIG. 10E is a side view showing a user positioning their right foot inthe gap between the bottom of the back end edge of a standing platformand the floor.

FIG. 10F is a side view of a user flipping a standing platform up usingtheir foot underneath the board.

FIG. 10G is an upper isometric view showing a user positioning theirright foot in the gap between the bottom of the back end edge of astanding platform and the floor.

FIG. 10H is an upper isometric view of a user flipping a standingplatform up using their foot underneath the board.

FIG. 11A is a side view of a user placing their left foot on the end ofa standing platform.

FIG. 11B is a front view of the user and the standing platform of FIG.11A.

FIG. 11C is a side view of a user pushing with their left foot on theend of a standing platform, which raises the other end off the floor.

FIG. 11D is a front view of the user pushing the standing platform ofFIG. 11C.

FIG. 11E is a side view of a user slipping their right foot underneaththe raised end of a standing platform while they have their left footpushing down on the other end.

FIG. 11F is a rear upper isometric view of the user slipping their rightfoot underneath the standing platform of FIG. 11E.

FIG. 11G is a side view of a user flipping a standing platform up usingtheir right foot to raise the bottom of the board.

FIG. 11H is a rear upper isometric view showing the user flipping thestanding platform of FIG. 11G.

FIG. 11I is a side view of a user rocking a standing platform bypressing the left side of the platform with their left foot.

FIG. 11J is a front view of a user rocking a standing platform bypressing the left side of the platform with their left foot.

FIG. 11K is a side view of a user sliding their right foot under astanding platform while rocking the platform up with their left foot.

FIG. 11L is a rear upper isometric view of a user sliding their rightfoot under a standing platform while rocking the platform up with theirleft foot.

FIG. 11M is a side view of a user raising a standing platform up byrocking it up with their left foot, while raising the bottom surfacewith their right foot.

FIG. 11N is a front view of a user raising a standing platform up byrocking it up with their left foot, while raising the bottom surfacewith their right foot.

FIG. 11O is a side view of a user with a standing platform heldvertically between the user's legs.

FIG. 11P is a front view of a user with a standing platform heldvertically between the user's legs.

FIG. 12A is a bottom view of a dimpled standing platform.

FIG. 12B is a lower isometric view of a user standing on a dimpledstanding platform.

FIG. 12C is a side view of the user standing on the standing platform ofFIG. 12B.

FIG. 12D is a front cross-section view along line D of the user standingon the standing platform of FIG. 12C.

FIG. 12E is a close up front cross-section view of the region within thearea E of the bottom surface of the standing platform of FIG. 12D.

FIG. 13A is a front view of a standing platform with corner slidingfeet.

FIG. 13B is a lower isometric view of a standing platform with cornersliding feet.

FIG. 13C is a front view of a standing platform with corner sliding feetresting on the floor.

FIG. 13D is a front view of a user standing on a standing platform withcorner sliding feet resting on the floor.

FIG. 14A is a front view of a standing platform with a plurality of lowfriction nubs.

FIG. 14B is a lower isometric view of the standing platform of FIG. 14A.

FIG. 14C is a front view of the standing platform of FIG. 14A resting ona floor.

FIG. 14D is a side view of a user standing on the standing platform ofFIG. 14C resting on a floor.

FIG. 14E is a front cross-section view along line E of the user standingon the standing platform of FIG. 14D.

FIG. 14F is a close up front cross-section view of the region within thearea F of the bottom surface of the standing platform of FIG. 14E withthe user standing on the platform.

FIG. 15A is a front view of a plastic structured standing platform.

FIG. 15B is a lower isometric view of the standing platform of FIG. 15A.

FIG. 15C is a front view of a plastic structured standing platform onthe floor.

FIG. 15D is a side view showing a user standing on a plastic structuredstanding platform on the floor.

FIG. 15E is a front cross-section view along line E of the user standingon the standing platform of FIG. 15D.

FIG. 15F is a front cross-section detailed view of the region within thearea F of the edge of the standing platform of FIG. 15E.

FIG. 15G is a front cross-section detailed view of the region within thearea G of the center of the standing platform of FIG. 15E.

FIG. 15H is a front view of a plastic structured standing platform witha curved bottom edge.

FIG. 15I is a side view of a plastic structured standing platform with acurved bottom edge.

FIG. 15J is a bottom view of a plastic structured standing platform witha curved bottom edge.

FIG. 15K is a lower isometric view of a plastic structured standingplatform with a curved bottom edge.

FIG. 16A is a side view of a user standing on a standing platform with aridged bottom surface.

FIG. 16B is a lower isometric view of the standing platform of FIG. 16A.

FIG. 16C is a front view of the standing platform of FIG. 16A.

FIG. 16D is a cross-section view along line D of the standing platformof FIG. 16C.

FIG. 16E is a bottom view of an inflatable tube standing platform.

FIG. 16F is a lower isometric view of the standing platform of FIG. 16E.

FIG. 16G is a front view of the standing platform of FIG. 16E.

FIG. 16H is a side cross-section view along line H of the standingplatform of FIG. 16G.

FIG. 16I is a front cross-section view along line I of the standingplatform of FIG. 16H.

FIG. 16J is a bottom view of an inflatable transverse tube standingplatform.

FIG. 16K is a lower isometric view of an inflatable transverse tubestanding platform.

FIG. 16L is a side view of an inflatable transverse tube standingplatform.

FIG. 16M is a front cross-section view along line M of the standingplatform of FIG. 16L.

FIG. 17A is an upper isometric view of an inflatable platform that hasvertical cylindrical air chambers.

FIG. 17B is a top view of the inflatable platform of FIG. 17A.

FIG. 17C is a front cross-section view along line C of the platform ofFIG. 17B.

FIG. 17D is a front cross-section detailed view of the region within thearea D of the platform of FIG. 17C.

FIG. 17E is an upper isometric view of an inflatable platform that hasvertical hexagonal air chambers.

FIG. 17F is a top view of an inflatable platform that has verticalhexagonal air chambers.

FIG. 17G is a front cross-section view along line G the platform of FIG.17F.

FIG. 17H is a front cross-section detailed view of the region within thearea H of the platform of FIG. 17G.

FIG. 18A is a bottom view of a ball filled standing platform.

FIG. 18B is a lower isometric view of the ball filled standing platformof FIG. 18A.

FIG. 18C is a front view of the ball filled standing platform of FIG.18A on the floor.

FIG. 18D is a side cross-section view along line D of the standingplatform of FIG. 18C.

FIG. 18E is a front view of a ball filled standing platform on the floorwith a foot applying force to the top of the platform.

FIG. 18F is a side cross-section view along line F of the standingplatform of FIG. 18E.

FIG. 19A is a front view of a user standing on a standing mat that hassupport clips attached to it.

FIG. 19B is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the standingmat of FIG. 19A that has support clips attached to it.

FIG. 19C is an upper isometric view of the standing mat of FIG. 19A thathas low profile support clips attached to it.

FIG. 20A is a front view of a user standing on a standing mat that has aramp edge attached to it.

FIG. 20B is a side cross-section view along line B of the user standingon the standing mat of FIG. 20A.

FIG. 20C is an upper isometric view of a user standing on a standing matthat has a ramp edge attached to it.

FIG. 20D is an exploded upper isometric view showing the ramp edgeremoved from the standing mat.

FIG. 20E is a front view of a user standing on a standing mat that has apartial height ramp edge attached to it.

FIG. 20F is a side cross-section view along line F of the user standingon the standing mat of FIG. 20E.

FIG. 21A is an upper isometric view of a spring filled inflatableplatform.

FIG. 21B is a front view of a spring filled inflatable platform.

FIG. 21C is a side cross-section view along line C of the spring filledinflatable platform of FIG. 21B.

FIG. 21D is a top cross-section view along line D of the spring filledinflatable platform of FIG. 21B.

FIG. 21E is an exploded top angled view of the spring assemblies.

FIG. 22A is a front view of an interlocking foam piece.

FIG. 22B is a side cross-section view along line B of the foam piece ofFIG. 22A.

FIG. 22C is a top view of an interlocking foam piece.

FIG. 22D is an upper isometric view of an interlocking foam piece.

FIG. 22E is a lower isometric view of an interlocking foam piece.

FIG. 22F is a side view of an assembled stack of nine interlocking foampieces.

FIG. 22G is a front cross-section view along line G of the stack of foampieces of FIG. 22F.

FIG. 22H is an exploded top angled view of the assembled stack ofinterlocking foam pieces.

FIG. 22I is an upper isometric view of an assembled stack ofinterlocking foam pieces.

FIG. 22J is an upper isometric view of an assembled stack ofinterlocking foam pieces of two different sizes.

FIG. 22K is a side view of an assembled stack of interlocking foampieces of two different sizes.

FIG. 22L is a front cross-section view along line L of the stack of foampieces of FIG. 22K.

FIG. 22M is an upper isometric view of an assembled stack ofinterlocking foam pieces of three different sizes.

FIG. 22N is an upper isometric view of an assembled stack ofinterlocking foam pieces wrapped with a layer of material.

FIG. 22O is an exploded top angled view of an assembled stack ofinterlocking foam pieces of two different sizes.

FIG. 22P is an exploded top angled view of an assembled stack ofinterlocking foam pieces of three different sizes.

FIG. 23A is a front view of a user standing on a rigid or semi-rigiddiscs and foam(s) platform with a linear compression modulus.

FIG. 23B is an upper isometric view of a user standing on a rigid orsemi-rigid discs and foam(s) platform with a linear compression modulus.

FIG. 23C is a side cross-section view along line C of the user standingon the foam platform of FIG. 23A.

FIG. 23D is an exploded top angled view of a rigid or semi-rigid discsand foam(s) platform with a linear compression modulus.

FIG. 23E is a front cross-section view of a rigid or semi-rigid sheetsand foam(s) platform with a linear compression modulus.

FIG. 23F shows the load path of the sheets and foam(s) platform of FIG.23E.

FIG. 24A is a front view of a spring-loaded standing platform in theloosest setting.

FIG. 24B is a side cross-section view along line B of the standingplatform of FIG. 24A.

FIG. 24C is the side cross-section view of FIG. 24B showing a footstepping on a spring-loaded standing platform when the springs are setat the loosest setting.

FIG. 24D is the side cross-section view of FIG. 24B showing aspring-loaded standing platform set to a medium preload setting.

FIG. 24E is the side cross-section view of FIG. 24D showing a footstepping on a spring-loaded standing platform when the springs are setat a medium preload setting.

FIG. 25A is an upper isometric view of an adjustable firmness foam padwith perimeter strap.

FIG. 25B is a detailed view of the region within the area B of theadjusting buckle on the foam pad of FIG. 25A.

FIG. 25C is a side view of an adjustable firmness foam pad withperimeter strap in a relaxed setting.

FIG. 25D is a top cross-section view along line D of the foam pad ofFIG. 25C.

FIG. 25E is a side view of an adjustable firmness foam pad withperimeter strap in a tight setting.

FIG. 25F is a top cross-section view along line F of the foam pad ofFIG. 25E.

FIG. 26A is an upper isometric view of an adjustable firmness foam padwith longitudinal tensioners.

FIG. 26B is a side view of an adjustable firmness foam pad withlongitudinal tensioners.

FIG. 26C is a top view of an adjustable firmness foam pad withlongitudinal tensioners in a relaxed setting.

FIG. 26D is a top view of an adjustable firmness foam pad withlongitudinal tensioners in a tight setting.

FIG. 26E is a front cross-section view along line E of the foam pad ofFIG. 26C.

FIG. 26F is a front cross-section view along line F the foam pad of FIG.26D.

FIG. 27A is an upper isometric view of an adjustable firmness semi-rigidpad.

FIG. 27B is a side view of an adjustable firmness semi-rigid pad.

FIG. 27C is a front cross-section view along line C of the pad of FIG.27B.

FIG. 27D is a detailed front cross-section view of the region within thearea D of the pad of FIG. 27C.

FIG. 28A is a top view of a drop stitch inflatable mat with a valveinstalled on the top surface.

FIG. 28B is a front cross-section view along line B of the mat of FIG.28A.

FIG. 28C is a top view of a drop stitch inflatable mat with a needle airvalve installed on the side surface.

FIG. 28D is a front cross-section view along line D of the mat of FIG.28C.

FIG. 28E is a close up front cross-section view of the region within thearea E of the mat of FIG. 28D.

FIG. 28F is a close up front cross-section view (corresponding to theview along line E of HG. 28E) of a drop stitch inflatable mat with aprotected needle air valve installed on the side surface.

FIG. 28G is a top view of a foot stepping on an air valve that isinstalled on a top surface of a drop stitch inflatable standingplatform.

FIG. 28H is a side cross-section view (corresponding to the view alongline I of FIG. 28G) of a drop stitch inflatable mat with an air valveinstalled on the top surface.

FIG. 28I is a side cross-section view along line I of the foot steppingon the air valve of the mat of FIG. 28G.

FIG. 28J is a side cross-section view (corresponding to the view alongline I of FIG. 28G) of a drop stitch inflatable mat with an air valvewith a protective bumper installed on the top surface.

FIG. 28K is a side cross-section view (corresponding to the view alongline I of FIG. 28G) of a foot stepping on a valve with a protectivebumper that is installed on the top surface of a drop stitch inflatablemat.

FIG. 29A is a front view of a standing platform with multi densitycores.

FIG. 29B is a front cross-section view along line B of the standingplatform of FIG. 29A with an inner core and an outer layer.

FIG. 29C is a front cross-section view (corresponding to the view alongline B of FIG. 29A) of a standing platform with multiple inner cores andan outer layer.

FIG. 29D is a front cross-section view (corresponding to the view alongline B of FIG. 29A) of a standing platform with a large inner core and athin outer layer.

FIG. 30A is a front view of a user standing on a curved surface standingplatform with a centered stance.

FIG. 30B is an angled view of a user standing on a curved surfacestanding platform with a centered stance.

FIG. 30C is a front view of a user standing on a curved surface standingplatform with one leg lifted in an offset stance.

FIG. 30D is a front view of a user standing on a curved surface standingplatform with one leg depressing the end of the board in an offsetstance.

FIG. 30E is an angled view of a user standing on a curved surfacestanding platform with one leg lifted in an offset stance.

FIG. 30F is an angled view of a user standing on a curved surfacestanding platform with one foot depressing the end of the board in anoffset stance.

FIG. 30G is a front view of a user standing with both feet in the middleof the curved surface standing platform.

FIG. 30H is an angled view of the user with both feet standing in themiddle of the curved surface standing platform of FIG. 30G.

FIG. 31A is a front view of a user standing on a two layer sandwichedcurved surface standing platform with a centered stance.

FIG. 31B is a front view of a user standing on the two layer sandwichedcurved surface standing platform of FIG. 31A. One foot is depressing theend of the board and the other is lifted in a wide centered stance.

FIG. 31C is an angled view of a user standing on the two layersandwiched curved surface standing platform of FIG. 31B. One foot isdepressing the end of the board and the other is lifted in a widecentered stance.

FIG. 31D is a front view of a user standing on a flattened three layersandwiched curved surface standing platform. The user has a widecentered stance and is depressing both ends of the board with theirfeet.

FIG. 31E is an angled view of a user standing on the flattened threelayer sandwiched curved surface standing platform of FIG. 31D. The userhas a wide centered stance and is depressing both ends of the board withtheir feet.

FIG. 32A is a front view of an inverted curved surface standingplatform.

FIG. 32B is an angled view of an inverted curved surface standingplatform.

FIG. 32C is a side view of a standing platform with a curved surfacealong the minor axis.

FIG. 32D is a side view of a user standing on a standing platform with acurved surface along the minor axis.

FIG. 32E is an angled view of the user and the standing platform of FIG.32D.

FIG. 32F is a side view of a user standing and rocking forward on astanding platform with a curved surface along the minor axis.

FIG. 32G is an angled view of the user and the standing platform of FIG.32F.

FIG. 32H is a side view of a user standing and rocking backward on astanding platform with a curved surface along the minor axis.

FIG. 32I is an angled view of the user and the standing platform of FIG.32H.

FIG. 33A is a front view of a user standing on a standing platform andholding exercise bands in a relaxed position.

FIG. 33B is an upper isometric view of a user standing on a standingplatform and holding exercise bands in a relaxed position.

FIG. 33C is a front view of a user standing on a standing platform andholding exercise bands in a tensioned position.

FIG. 33D is an upper isometric view of a user standing on a standingplatform and holding exercise bands in a tensioned position.

FIG. 33E is a front view of a user standing off-center on a standingplatform while holding under-board exercise bands in a relaxed position.

FIG. 33F is a lower isometric view of a user standing off-center on astanding platform while holding under-board exercise bands in a relaxedposition.

FIG. 33G is a front view of a user standing off-center on a standingplatform while holding under-board exercise bands in a tensionedposition.

FIG. 33H is a lower isometric view of a user standing off-center on astanding platform while holding under-board exercise bands in atensioned position.

FIG. 33I is a front view of a user standing on a standing platform whileholding front exercise bands in a relaxed position.

FIG. 33J is a side view of a user standing on a standing platform whileholding front exercise bands in a relaxed position.

FIG. 33K is a front view of a user standing on a standing platform whileholding front exercise bands in a tensioned position.

FIG. 33L is a side view of a user standing on a standing platform whileholding front exercised bands in a tensioned position.

FIG. 34A is an upper isometric view of feet standing on a sloped mat.

FIG. 34B is a side view of the sloped mat of FIG. 34A.

FIG. 34C is a side view of a flat mat.

FIG. 34D is a side cross-section view of a foot standing on the flat matof FIG. 34C.

FIG. 34E is a side view of the sloped mat of FIG. 34A.

FIG. 34F is a side cross-section view of a foot standing on the slopedmat of FIG. 34A.

FIG. 35A is a side cross-section view of a user standing on anadjustable dual chamber sloped tilting standing platform with it in theneutral position.

FIG. 35B is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the standingplatform of FIG. 35A.

FIG. 35C is a side cross-section view of a user standing on anadjustable dual chamber sloped tilting standing platform with it in theforward tilted position.

FIG. 35D is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the standingplatform of FIG. 35C.

FIG. 35E is a side cross-section view of a user standing on anadjustable dual chamber sloped tilting standing platform with it in thebackward tilted position.

FIG. 35F is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the standingplatform of FIG. 35E.

FIG. 36A is a side view of a tilting standing mat set to the flatposition.

FIG. 36B is a side view of a tilting standing mat tilted to an angle of4 degrees.

FIG. 36C is a side view of a tilting standing mat tilted to an angle of8 degrees.

FIG. 37A is a front view of a variable rear hump standing platform.

FIG. 37B is a side cross-section view along line B of the standingplatform of FIG. 37A.

FIG. 37C is an upper isometric view of the standing platform of FIG.37A.

FIG. 37D is a top view of the standing platform of FIG. 37A.

FIG. 38A is a front view of a front hump standing platform.

FIG. 38B is a side cross-section view along line B of the standingplatform of FIG. 38A.

FIG. 38C is an upper isometric view of the standing platform of FIG.38A.

FIG. 38D is a top view of the standing platform of FIG. 38A.

FIG. 39A is a front view of a standing platform with a center bump.

FIG. 39B is a side cross-section view along line B of the standingplatform of FIG. 39A.

FIG. 39C is an upper isometric view of the standing platform of FIG.39A.

FIG. 39D is a top view of the standing platform of FIG. 39A.

FIG. 40A is a front view of a rear hump standing platform.

FIG. 40B is a side cross-section view along line B of the standingplatform of FIG. 40A.

FIG. 40C is an upper isometric view of a rear hump standing platform.

FIG. 40D is an upper isometric view of a rear hump standing platform,with legs showing a user standing on it.

FIG. 40E is a top view of a rear hump standing platform.

FIG. 41A is a side view of legs standing on a rear hump standingplatform with the feet positioned on the front edge spacedshoulder-width apart.

FIG. 41B is an upper isometric view of legs standing on a rear humpstanding platform with the feet positioned on the front edge spacedshoulder-width apart.

FIG. 41C is a side view of legs standing on a rear hump standingplatform with the feet positioned on the front edge with the feet closetogether.

FIG. 41D is an upper isometric view of legs standing on a rear humpstanding platform with the feet positioned on the front edge with thefeet close together.

FIG. 41E is a side view of legs standing on a rear hump standingplatform, with the feet positioned on the rear hump.

FIG. 41F is an upper isometric view of legs standing on a rear humpstanding platform, with the feet positioned on the rear hump.

FIG. 41G is a side view of legs standing on a rear hump standingplatform, with the feet resting on the front edge and on the floor.

FIG. 41H is an upper isometric view of legs standing on a rear humpstanding platform with the feet resting on the front edge and on thefloor.

FIG. 42A is a front view of legs standing on a ring hump platform.

FIG. 42B is a side cross-section view along line B of the legs standingon the platform of FIG. 42A.

FIG. 42C is an upper isometric view of legs standing on a ring humpplatform.

FIG. 42D is an exploded upper isometric view of a ring hump platform.

FIG. 42E is a front view of legs standing on an inverted ring humpplatform in a configuration using a front-to-back roller.

FIG. 42F is a side cross-section view along line F of the legs standingon the platform of FIG. 42E.

FIG. 42G is a front view of legs standing on an inverted ring humpplatform when it is tilted with an adjustable spacer.

FIG. 42H is a side cross-section view along line H of the legs standingon the platform of FIG. 42G.

FIG. 42I is a front view of legs standing on an inverted ring humpplatform in a configuration using a side-to-side roller.

FIG. 42J is a side cross-section view along line J of the legs standingon the platform of FIG. 42I.

FIG. 43A is an upper isometric view of a ring hump platform withattachment holes.

FIG. 43B is an exploded upper isometric view of a ring hump platformwith attachments.

FIG. 43C is an upper isometric view of a ring hump platform withattachments.

FIG. 43D is an upper isometric view of a ring hump platform with D shapepads attached.

FIG. 43E is an upper isometric view of a ring hump platform with V shapepads attached.

FIG. 43F is an upper isometric view of a ring hump platform with domepads attached.

FIG. 44A is an upper isometric view of a standing platform withcorrective foot pads on the top surface.

FIG. 44B is an exploded upper isometric view of a standing platform withcorrective foot pads on the top surface.

FIG. 44C is a front view of a standing platform with corrective footpads on the top surface.

FIG. 44D is a front view of a standing platform with two different sizecorrective foot pads on the top surface.

FIG. 44E is a top view of a standing platform with corrective foot padson the top surface placed in a wide stance.

FIG. 44F is a top view of a standing platform with corrective foot padson the top surface placed in a narrow stance.

FIG. 44G is a top view of a standing platform with corrective foot padson the top surface placed in a rear position.

FIG. 44H is a top view of a standing platform with corrective foot padson the top surface placed in a forward position.

FIG. 44I is an upper isometric view of a toroidal foot pad.

FIG. 44J is an upper isometric view of a horseshoe shaped foot pad.

FIG. 44K is an upper isometric view of a foot pad with massageprotrusions.

FIG. 44L is a top angled view showing a foot pad that vibrates.

FIG. 44M is a top angled view of a foot pad that is heated.

FIG. 45A is a top view of a user standing on a platform with a partialrigid top plate.

FIG. 45B is an upper isometric view of a user standing on a platformwith a partial rigid top plate.

FIG. 45C is an exploded upper isometric view of a user standing on aplatform with a partial rigid top plate.

FIG. 46A is a side view of a bottom dome standing platform.

FIG. 46B is a side cross-section view along line B of the standingplatform of FIG. 46A.

FIG. 46C is a lower isometric view of the standing platform of FIG. 46A.

FIG. 46D is a side view of legs standing balanced on a bottom domestanding platform.

FIG. 46E is a side view of legs standing on a bottom dome standingplatform, with the platform tilted forward.

FIG. 46F is a top view of a damping toroidal foam ring.

FIG. 46G is a front view of a damping toroidal foam ring.

FIG. 46H is an upper isometric view of a damping toroidal foam ring.

FIG. 46I is a side view of a user standing on a bottom dome standingplatform with a damping toroidal foam ring.

FIG. 46J is a side view of a user tilting forward on a bottom domestanding platform with a damping toroidal foam ring.

FIG. 46K is a side cross-section view of the standing platform of FIG.46I.

FIG. 46L is a side cross-section view of the standing platform of FIG.46J.

FIG. 47A is a front view of a faceted bottom dome standing platform.

FIG. 47B is a side cross-section view along line B of the standingplatform of FIG. 47A.

FIG. 47C is a lower isometric view of a faceted bottom dome standingplatform.

FIG. 47D is a side view of legs standing balanced on a faceted bottomdome standing platform.

FIG. 47E is a side view of legs standing on a faceted bottom domestanding platform with the platform tilted forward.

FIG. 48A is an upper isometric view of a standing platform with the endsgradually increasing in thickness.

FIG. 48B is a front view of a standing platform with ends that arethicker than the middle.

FIG. 49A is an upper isometric view of legs standing on a groundedplatform with a conductive top connected to a grounding plug.

FIG. 49B is an upper isometric view of legs standing on a groundedplatform with conductive threads on the top surface connected to agrounding plug.

FIG. 49C is an upper isometric view of legs standing on a groundedplatform with conductive threads going across the top surface connectedto a grounding clamp.

FIG. 49D is a top angled view of a user standing on a grounding bar fora standing platform.

FIG. 49E is an exploded upper isometric view showing how the groundingbar attaches to a standing platform.

FIG. 50A is a front view of a user standing on a standing platform withtheir feet approximately shoulder-width apart.

FIG. 50B is a front view of a user standing on a standing platform withtheir feet positioned in a wide stance such that the feet are wider thanshoulder-width apart.

FIG. 51A is a top view of a standing platform.

FIG. 51B is a top view showing further details of the region within thearea B of the standing platform of FIG. 51A.

FIG. 51C is a front view of the standing platform of FIG. 51A.

FIG. 51D is a front view showing further details of the region withinthe area D of the standing platform of FIG. 51C.

FIG. 51E is a top view of the standing platform of FIG. 51A with an edgeband.

FIG. 51F is a top view showing further details of the region within thearea F of the standing platform of FIG. 51E.

FIG. 51G is a top view of the standing platform of FIG. 51A.

FIG. 51H is a top view showing further details of the region within thearea H of the standing platform of FIG. 51G.

FIG. 51I is a top view of a 99th percentile male user standing with acomfortable stance on a circular standing platform.

FIG. 52A is a front view of a standing platform clamped on one end andheld in a cantilever position.

FIG. 52B is a front view of a standing platform clamped on one end andheld in a cantilever position while deflecting under its own weight ormass.

FIG. 52C is a front view of a standing platform supported at its twoends.

FIG. 52D is a front view of a standing platform supported at its twoends and bending due to a centrally applied load.

FIG. 52E is a cross-section view of a standing platform with a matthickness or height of “H1” and an unloaded impactor.

FIG. 52F is a cross-section view of a standing platform being deformedby a loaded impactor.

FIG. 52G is an angled view of the standing platform of FIG. 52F.

FIG. 53A is a front view of a drop test impactor positioned above astanding platform on the ground with the impactor raised to initial dropheight, Hd.

FIG. 53B is a side view of a drop test impactor positioned above astanding platform on the ground with the impactor raised to initial dropheight, Hd.

FIG. 53C is a front view of a drop test impactor that has been droppedand is impacting a standing platform on the ground.

FIG. 53D is a side view of a drop test impactor that has been droppedand is impacting a standing platform on the ground.

FIG. 53E is a front view of a drop test impactor that has rebounded to aheight of Hr after impacting a standing platform on the ground.

FIG. 53F is a side view of a drop test impactor that has rebounded to aheight of Hr after impacting a standing platform on the ground.

FIG. 54A is a graph showing the stress strain response of a viscoelasticmaterial.

FIG. 55A is a graph showing catenary curves with different “a” values.

FIG. 56A is a top view of a standing platform with massage protrusionson its front edge.

FIG. 56B is a side view of a standing platform with massage protrusionson its front edge.

FIG. 56C is an upper isometric view of a user standing on a standingplatform with massage protrusions on its front edge.

FIG. 56D is a side view of a user standing on a standing platform withmassage protrusions on its front edge.

FIG. 56E is a top view of a standing platform with smaller massageprotrusions on its front edge.

FIG. 56F is a side view of a standing platform with smaller massageprotrusions on its front edge.

FIG. 57A is an upper isometric view of a rigid or semi-rigid standingplatform with an array of slats creating a textured surface.

FIG. 57B is an upper isometric view of the array of slats being used ina slightly different manner than in FIG. 57A.

FIG. 57C is an upper isometric view of an array of slats that areperpendicular to the array of slats in FIG. 57A.

FIG. 57D is an exploded upper isometric view of the array of slats ofFIG. 57A.

FIG. 58A is an upper isometric view of a rigid or semi-rigid standingplatform with an array of squares.

FIG. 58B is a cross-section of the standing platform and array ofsquares with a user stepping in the center.

FIG. 58C is an exploded upper isometric view of the array of squares.

FIG. 58D is an upper isometric view of the array of squares that may beattached to a flexible base.

FIG. 59A shows an upper isometric view of individual heel platformsresting on a standing platform.

FIG. 59B is an upper isometric view showing a pair of offset cupped heelplatforms with the stiletto of the heel off center.

FIG. 59C is an upper isometric view showing another way the platformscan be placed.

FIG. 59D is an exploded upper isometric view that shows that the heelplatforms just rest on the standing platform and, that the heels simplyrest on the heel platforms.

FIG. 59E is a large upper isometric view of only the cupped heelplatform.

FIG. 59F is a cross-section view of the cupped heel platform showfurther detail of the cupped heel platform.

FIG. 60A is an upper isometric view of a standing platform with multipledifferent curves that a user can use to their advantage.

FIG. 60B is a top view of the standing platform of FIG. 60A.

FIG. 60C is a top view of a standing platform with a different set ofcurved edges.

FIG. 60D is a top view of a standing platform with concentrically curvededges and equal radius corners.

FIG. 60E is a top view of a diamond shaped standing platform.

FIG. 60F is a top view of a narrow rectangle shaped standing platform.

FIG. 60G is a top view of a triangular shaped standing platform.

FIG. 60H is a top view of a square shaped standing platform.

FIG. 60I is a top view of a pentagonal shaped standing platform.

FIG. 60J is a tip view of a hexagonal shaped standing platform.

FIG. 60K is a top view of an octagonal shaped standing platform.

FIG. 61A shows an exploded upper isometric view of a flex control systemthat allows the user to control the contour of a standing platform.

FIG. 61B is a front view that shows how the flex system can be used tocreate a concave standing surface.

FIG. 61C is a front view that shows how the flex system can be used tocreate a more concave standing surface.

FIG. 61D is a front view that shows how the flex system can be used tocreate a convex standing surface.

FIG. 62A is a top view of a standing platform with curved endattachments.

FIG. 62B is a front view of a standing platform with curved endattachments.

FIG. 62C is an upper isometric view of a standing platform with curvedend attachments.

FIG. 62D is a front view of a curved end attachment.

FIG. 62E is a top cross-section view along line E of the curved endattachment of FIG. 62D.

FIG. 62F is an exploded upper isometric view of a standing platform withcurved end attachments.

FIG. 62G is a top view of a standing platform with angled endattachments.

FIG. 62H is a front view of a standing platform with angled endattachments.

FIG. 62I is a right view of a standing platform with angled endattachments.

FIG. 62J is a partial front section view along line J of the standingplatform of FIG. 62I.

FIG. 62K is an exploded upper isometric view of a standing platform withangled end attachments.

FIG. 63A is an upper isometric view of a standing platform with buttonend attachments.

FIG. 63B is an exploded upper isometric view of a standing platform withbutton end attachments.

FIG. 63C is a detailed view of the region within the area C of theT-connector attachment point of the standing platform of FIG. 63B.

FIG. 63D is a detailed view of the region within the area D of theT-slot connection point on the end attachment of the standing platformof FIG. 63B.

FIG. 63E is a side view of a standing platform with button endattachments.

FIG. 63F is a front cross-section view along line F of the standingplatform of FIG. 63E.

FIG. 63G is a side view of two feet on the button end attachmentsconnected to a standing platform.

FIG. 63H is a front cross-section view along line H of the standingplatform of FIG. 63G.

FIG. 64A is a front view of a Schrader type core valve.

FIG. 64B is a side cross-section view along line B of the Schrader typecore valve of FIG. 64A.

FIG. 64C is an upper isometric view of a Schrader type core valve.

FIG. 64D is a lower isometric view of a Schrader type core valve.

FIG. 64E is an exploded upper isometric view of a Schrader type corevalve.

FIG. 64F is a front view of a Schrader type core valve with a topsealing gasket.

FIG. 64G is a side cross-section view along line G of the Schrader typecore valve of FIG. 64F.

FIG. 64H is a detail side cross-section view of the region within thearea H of the Schrader type core valve of FIG. 64G.

FIG. 64I is an exploded lower isometric view of a Schrader type corevalve with a top sealing gasket.

FIG. 65A is a side view of a hand pump with attachment hose.

FIG. 65B is a front cross-section view along line B of the hand pump ofFIG. 65A.

FIG. 65C is an upper isometric view of a hand pump with attachment hose.

FIG. 65D is a front view of a quarter turn adapter fitting for quarterturn air valves.

FIG. 65E is a front view of an air inflation needle.

FIG. 66A is an upper isometric view showing a reinforced rigid orsemi-rigid edge that may be attached to inflatable fabric.

FIG. 66B is an upper isometric view that shows what a reinforced rigidor semi-rigid edge looks like when attached with inflatable fabric tocreate a standing platform.

FIG. 66C is a front view that shows the front view of an inflatablestanding platform that is attached to a rigid or semi-rigid edge.

FIG. 66D is a detailed view of the region within the area D of theinflatable standing platform of FIG. 66C and shows the rigid orsemi-rigid edge attached to a top layer of inflatable fabric and abottom layer of inflatable fabric.

FIG. 66E is a section view showing the top and bottom of a rigid orsemi-rigid edge that do not line up, and the effect on an inflatablestanding platform.

FIG. 66F is a detailed cross-section view showing a closed rigid orsemi-rigid edge attached to a top layer of inflatable fabric and bottomlayer of inflatable fabric.

FIG. 66G is an upper isometric view of what using two separate rigid orsemi-rigid edges look like when attached to a top, bottom, and two sidelayers of inflatable fabric.

FIG. 66H is an upper isometric view that shows two separate rigid orsemi-rigid edges that can bond to inflatable fabric.

FIG. 66I is a front view of two separate rigid or semi-rigid edges thatare attached to inflatable fabric.

FIG. 66J is a detailed view of the region within the area J of FIG. 66Ishowing the rigid or semi-rigid edges attached to a top, bottom, and twoside layers of the inflatable fabric.

FIG. 66K is a detailed section view of the side layer overlapped andattached to the rigid or semi-rigid edge, the top layer of inflatablefabric, and the bottom layer of inflatable fabric.

FIG. 66L is a detailed section view of the side layer attached to thetop layer and bottom layer where there is no rigid or semi-rigid edge.

FIG. 67A is an upper isometric view of a wireless power transfer system,using magnetic resonance wireless power transfer, resting on top of astanding platform.

FIG. 67B is an exploded upper isometric view showing the magneticallyattached power cord, top cover, bottom cover and coil array used totransmit power wirelessly.

FIG. 67C is an exploded upper isometric view showing the wireless powertransfer system resting on a standing platform.

FIG. 67D is an upper isometric view showing that the wireless powertransfer system can be used under the standing platform to power deviceson the standing platform.

FIG. 67E is an upper isometric view that shows that the wireless powertransfer system can be integrated into the standing platform.

FIG. 67F is a front cross-section view showing how the wireless powertransfer system can be integrated into the standing platform.

FIG. 68A is a detailed partial front view of a curved edge of a standingplatform when it is flat on the ground.

FIG. 68B is a detailed front view of a curved edge of a standingplatform when it is tilted up 1 degree.

FIG. 68C is a detailed front view of a curved edge of a standingplatform when it is tilted up 2.5 degrees.

FIG. 68D is a detailed front view of a curved edge of a standingplatform when it is tilted up 5 degrees.

FIG. 68E is a detailed front view of a curved edge of a standingplatform when it is tilted up 10 degrees.

FIG. 68F is a detailed front view of a curved edge of a standingplatform when it is tilted up 20 degrees.

FIG. 68G is a detailed front view of a curved edge of a standingplatform when it is tilted up 30 degrees.

FIG. 68H is a detailed front view of a curved edge of a standingplatform, showing the equivalent curve and the contact points for anglesranging between a 1 to 30 degree tilt.

FIG. 69A is an upper isometric view of a standing platform cover with azipper.

FIG. 69B is a front view of the standing platform cover of FIG. 69A.

FIG. 69C is a lower isometric view of the standing platform cover ofFIG. 69A showing elastic bands attached to the cover.

FIG. 69D is an upper isometric view of the standing platform cover ofFIG. 69A showing the zipper unzipped and opened.

FIG. 70A is a front view of a standing platform with concave edges.

FIG. 70B is a front view of a standing platform with flexed concaveedges.

FIG. 70C is a front view of a user tilting up a standing platform withconcave edges.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION

1. Table of Contents 1. Table of Contents 43 2. Introduction 44 3. KeyMetrics and Term Definitions 46 4. Advantageous Key Metric Ranges andLimits 53 4.1. Rigidity and self-supporting 59 4.2. Coefficient ofrestitution and compression modulus 61 4.3. Collapsing and conformingedge 63 4.4. Slope of platform surface 67 4.5. Bowing arc when exerciseattachments added 71 4.6. Elliptical or convex curvature and shape 724.7. Low friction surface for sliding 76 5. Adjustability of Key Metrics77 6. Advantageous Qualities Afforded by Key Metric Ranges 79 6.1.Friction and rigidity 79 6.2. Different orientations for foot placementof curved 80    perimeter 6.3. Mat manipulation and storage 80 6.4. Matthickness 83 6.5. Rocking ability 84 7. Various Embodiments of Devices95 7.1. Multi layered mat 95 7.2. Spring-loaded mat 96 7.3. Balanceboard with rebounding top 97 7.4. Multi chambered gas mat 98 7.5.Internal threaded air mat 99 7.6. Surface terrain 100 7.7. Curvedsurface platform 103 7.8. Rocking, noise, and temperature control 104 8.Beneficial Applications of Devices 105 8.1. Exercise 105 8.2. Saferimpact for a falling person on it 112 8.3. Surgical/medical applications113 8.4. For high tech environments 113 9. Further Details of CertainDisclosed Embodiments 1142. Introduction

Having tested numerous products on the market today that arerepresentative of the kinds of standing platforms available and alsoevaluated currently existing designs, none have been found that satisfythe optimal metrics for performance of the disclosed devices detailedherein.

The trampoline-like standing movement mats disclosed herein adapt to aperson's stance whether the legs are in a narrow stance, as in closer toeach other, or in a wider stance, as when the feet are further apart.Biomechanically, it is typical that when a person stands with their feetfurther apart, the feet tend to point outward at a greater angle (FIG.40D, 4005) than when their feet are closer together (FIG. 41D, 4105)where the stance with some results in a “pigeon toed” orientation (FIG.41D, 4105). The disclosed devices that have gently curved perimetersfollowing a generally oval and curved oblong shape accommodate the widerangle of the feet when in a wide stance. If a user desires to have partof their feet on the mat and part off the mat (to increase circulationor to put pressure under the arch for a massaging effect), the curvedperimeter shape allows for the feet to be at wider angles in a widestance such that the part of their foot that is off and on the mat (FIG.41B, 4105) stays substantially the same as if the feet were closertogether (FIG. 41D, 4105) despite the change of angle caused by thealteration of the foot stance. Additionally, the size and shapesdisclosed permit a user to stand at the ends of the oval such that theballs of their feet are at or near the front edge of the mat, and theirheels are at or near the rear edge of the mat. The oval shape may besized to adapt to different shoe or foot sizes of various users. Footangle, toe up or toe down, may be achieved without having to rotate themat, by standing astride the rear or forward (FIGS. 8C-8D, 8A-8B) edgerespectively.

The disclosed embodiments of a trampoline-like standing mat encourageusers to move more frequently by actively responding to a user's input.Such embodiments operate to offset the negative effects of gravity onthe feet, back and body of a standing person, while still allowing forimproved blood flow and circulation, by providing a dynamic and highlyresponsive rebound surface response. The disclosed embodiments may beemployed as anti-fatigue mats and provide additional exercise benefitsbeyond that currently available in a traditional anti-fatigue mat, duein part, to their improved rebounding characteristics. Certain disclosedembodiments may also be employed as exercise mats.

The disclosed devices have been found to be more comfortable. Theresilient and trampoline-like bouncy rebounding surface tends toencourage a more proper stance and posture (e.g., one where a user doesnot lock their knees). This is believed to be due to the additionalsupport and micro foot adjustments that occur on a more resilientsurface. The disclosed devices address this challenge in an effectivemanner compared to other devices.

Additionally, over-pronation is a common problem for many standingusers. Over-pronation is the rotation of the medial bones in themidtarsal region of the foot inward and downward so that when walking,the foot tends to come down on its inner margin. This effect also occursin differing degrees when a person is standing. Normal pronationprovides an important shock absorbing function for the human foot, butsome users suffer from excessive pronation (colloquially referred to as“flat feet”) in varying degrees, which can create additional fatigue toa user's foot, as well as cause other physical discomforts. Thedisclosed devices are believed to be effective at supporting users whosuffer from excessive pronation by providing disclosed shapes anddimensions that permit a user to position their feet in various waysthat counter-act over-pronation (and under-pronation and other footproblems) by providing users with places to reposition and support theirfeet for more optimal standing posture to improve comfort and reducepotential discomfort. The conforming edge and rebound provided by thedisclosed platforms have been found to be very comfortable to such usersand allows them to utilize the conforming edges as well to provideadditional and pleasing support underfoot along the contour of themedial longitudinal arch portion of the foot. Although three distinctarches function to support the foot, the medial longitudinal arch hasbeen found to be the arch of clinical significance in preventing injurydue to flat feet (described in Pes Cavus and Pes Planus: Analyses andTreatment by Abby Herzog Franco, Physical Therapy Journal, Vol. 67, No.5, May 1987, Pages 688-94). The greater height of the surface from thefloor of disclosed embodiments permits a user to extend their heeltowards the floor surface while keeping their forefoot on the matsurface, which helps stretch the ligaments and muscles of the calf area;as well as do other exercises that can help alleviate or helprehabilitate improper pronation related conditions, such as posteriortibial tendon stress or the like, as one example. This in turn, helpsincrease the productivity of such a person when working. Tired feet(especially feet that are in a less than optimum stance) are a commoncomplaint of many standing users.

Current anti-fatigue mats dissipate or dampen compression energy orforce (exhibit significant viscoelastic hysteresis) and therefore returnor release significantly less energy (lower coefficient of restitution)with a slower and less dynamic response (reduced compression secantmodulus) than exhibited by the disclosed devices and their embodiments.Significantly, such dampening characteristics (lower coefficient ofrestitution) discourage users from moving because they deaden and do notsignificantly return the energy that the user puts into the mat.Prolonged standing without significant movement has been shown by manystudies to lower user energy and productivity and to be detrimental tohealth. (For example see: Arbeitsbedingungen and gesundheitlichesbefinden aus der sicht der erwerbstatigen by Buchberger, J., Sozprauentiumed, Vol. 2 (Suppl.), 1993, Pages 87-91 (in German);Biomechanical risk factors for occupationally related low back disordersby Marras, W. S., Lavender, S. A., Leurgans, S. E., Fathallagh, F. A.,Ferguson, S. A., Allread, W. G., Rajulu, S. L., Ergonomics, Vol. 38,1995, Pages 377-410; Occupational risk factors associated with softtissue disorders of the shoulder: a review of recent investigation inthe literature by Sommerich, C. M., McGlothlin, J. D., Marras, W. S.,Ergonomics, Vol. 36, 1993, Pages 697-717; A comparison of the effects offloor mats and shoe in-soles on standing fatigue by Phyllis M. King,Applied Ergonomics, Vol. 33, 2002, Pages 477-84; Investigating thePhysiological Effects of Standing, Using a Sit/stand Stool and Standingwith a Footrest During Static Tasks by Sari Julia Sartika and SitiZawiah Dawal, Vol. 5, No. 7, Australian Journal of Basic AppliedSciences, 2011, Pages 516-22; A Review on Health Effects Associated withProlonged Standing in the Industrial Workplaces by Isa Halim and AbdulRahman Omar, Vol. 8, No. 1, International Journal of Research andReviews in Applied Sciences, July 2011, Pages 14-9) The discloseddevices better offset the negative effects of long term standing becausethey are more responsive (less dampening) underfoot for a standing user,thus encouraging contract-relax leg muscle activity, while stillproviding sufficient compression modulus for long term standing comfort.

Some of the features of the disclosed mats are especially designed tobenefit persons working at a standing desk or in a home, work, or officeenvironment where they stand facing in one direction for long periods oftime. It is common for such persons to vary their standing and sittingtimes while working.

The disclosed improvements are achieved by optimizing the standing matsor platforms to meet certain optimal ranges for key metrics. Thedisclosed devices may achieve such ranges within the key metrics byutilizing combinations of elastomeric foams, rubbers, springs (coil,leaf, wave, gas, metal, fiberglass, carbon fiber, plastic, etc.), and/orgas or fluid filled chambers.

3. Key Metrics and Term Definitions

Certain metrics and terms within the descriptions of the discloseddevices have specific meanings and definitions. These metrics and termsshall have the meanings as defined below, whether used in capitalized orlower-case forms.

Trampoline-like: The ability of a mat to return a sufficient amount ofenergy so as to provide some rebound or spring back effect to a userdeflecting a surface of the mat.

User: A user is defined as any sized person able to stand on thedisclosed devices or to perform exercises upon one of them, and toachieve a rebound response. A user may bend or flex or otherwise move onone of the disclosed platforms on their feet or other body part, or moveand manipulate such a device to some degree with their feet or otherbody part to reposition it. The disclosed devices are usable by anyperson of any size. The adult and adult sized users of the discloseddevices are usually individuals between a height of 4 feet 7 inches and6 feet 10 inches, with a weight range between 70 lb to 500 lb, thoughgenerally, the common user falls within the range of normal weights ofthe general population. Children between the ages of 4 to 8 may also useone of these devices, but their bodyweight is generally lighter, between30 to 80 lb. Young people between the ages of 8 and 16 can vary greatlyin weight and size, from 50 lb to in excess of 400 lb. The discloseddevices are configurable, and in many embodiments adjustable, to enableoptimization for individuals in these various weight ranges and agegroups.

Edge Band: In general, composed of the points that represent where thesurface begins to transition to the edge surface and the slope starts tochange (i.e., the rate of change of the slope or second derivative isnon-zero) substantially increases near the perimeter. For example, for agenerally flat mat having a generally vertically oriented edge surfaceor a tapered edge surface, the edge band is composed of the points wherethe surface near the perimeter begins its transition to the slope of theedge surface. In embodiments where all or a significant area of thesurface is sloping toward the perimeter (e.g., a bottom surface with alarge rocking region such as shown in FIGS. 9A-9H, 9K, 9S, 30A-30H,31A-31E, and 32C-32I or a domed top surface such as shown in FIGS. 6B,7A-7F, and 32A-32B), the edge band is located where the sloping surfacelast exceeds 30 degrees from horizontal as it approaches the perimeter.

Near Edge Area: In general, composed of the points that are inside andnear (e.g., within up to three inches) where the surface begins totransition to the edge surface and the slope starts to change (i.e., therate of change of the slope or second derivative is non-zero)substantially increases near the perimeter, including the Edge Band(i.e., all points on the surface between edge band and line givenbelow). For example, for a generally flat mat having a generallyvertically oriented edge surface or a tapered edge surface, the nearedge area includes the points that are just inside (e.g., within up tothree inches) of where the surface near the perimeter begins itstransition to the slope of the edge surface. The Near Edge Area extendsinward up to the line delineating where the compression modulus reaches90% of the center compression modulus. The near edge area correspondsthe surface portion where the board compresses more easily than thecentral region, providing the user with a noticeably softer region. Thisarea is more unstable and less supportive and thereby causes users torock their feet into the softer area, which encourages users to movemore and increases the health benefits of standing. In embodiments withan adjustable compression modulus, the line delineating where thecompression modulus reaches 90% of the center compression modulus mayvary with adjustment of the compression modulus.

Center Area: The points on the surface of a mat in the one or moreregions where the compression modulus is greater than or equal to 90% ofthe center compression modulus.

Surrounding Edge: In general, composed of the outermost points that areoutside of the surface Edge Band (e.g., all points between a top edgeband on a top surface and a bottom edge band on a bottom surface,including the perimeter). For example, for a generally flat mat having agenerally vertically oriented edge surface or a tapered edge surface,the surrounding edge is composed of the points that are outside of wherethe surface slope first begins its transition to the slope of the edgesurface and includes the edge surface.

Central Region: The points on the surface of a mat at or within a oneinch radius of a center-of-mass of an assumed constant density surfacethat are delineated by the edge band.

Rocking Region: In general, composed of the outermost points adjacent tothe perimeter that extend outwardly from where the bottom surface firstbegins to measurably rise away from the floor in a convex manner alongthe curved edge. For example, see the rocking region of length L in FIG.9P. In devices with a collapsing and conforming edge, the rocking regioneffectively extends inward beyond where the unloaded bottom surfacefirst begins to measurably rise away from the floor to also includethose points inward, up to where the bottom surface first begins tomeasurably collapse and conform under a given rocking load. The rockingregion thus varies with the load. This produces an effective rockingregion whose radius of curvature is greater and has a greater extentthan the non-deformed, unloaded curved edge. For example, see rockingregions 807, 808, 809, and 810 in FIGS. 8E, 8G, 8I and 8J. The effectiverocking region is the portion where the board collapses enough toprovide the user a noticeable feel of the rocking motion and feel as ifit is rocking on its edge.

Bending Rigidity: A mat's ability to resist bending deflection. This isdetermined by the force required, applied by an approximately three-inchdiameter impactor on the top surface over the central region, to deflecta mat divided by the amount of bending deflection at its central regionwhile the mat is supported at each end, where such support extendsinward from each end by approximately 0.75 to 1.75 inches to create aspan over an unsupported middle region

$\left( {k_{b} = \frac{F}{\delta}} \right).$The amount of total deflection includes any compression deflection atits support points with the bending deflection. Subtracting out thecompression distance from the total deflection gives the amount ofbending deflection. Note: A self-supporting mat has some significantadvantages, as disclosed below.

Flexural Rigidity: The bending rigidity times the cube of the length ofthe span of the unsupported middle region when determining the bendingrigidity, divided by a constant of 48. The flexural rigidity is anapproximation for the elastic modulus times the moment of inertia. Theflexural rigidity formula is derived from the max bending deflectionequation for a simply supported beam (i.e., has a pinned/fixed supportat one end and a roller support at the other end) with a constantcross-section and a point load at the center. The relationship forflexural rigidity in symbolic form is

${{Flexural}\mspace{14mu}{Rigidity}} = {{EI} = \frac{k_{b}*l^{3}}{48}}$

Compression Modulus: For a given range of strain, the slope of the bestfit straight line, so that the linear curve fit is of the form y=mx+b,where the x-axis is the strain and the y-axis is the stress. Strain isthe deflection of the material divided by the original thickness of thematerial in the direction of the applied force. The Compression Modulusis a stress to strain curve, between the points representing the strainand the required stresses to achieve those strain values. The strainpoints correspond to at least one hundred and fifty sample strain valuesspread evenly across the portion of the available strain that includesthe given range of strain. The stresses are applied using a circularimpactor of a given surface area on the upward facing top surface of amat whose bottom surface is supported by a generally horizontallyoriented floor-like plane underneath. Such sample points are obtained byat least measuring the stress for the strain corresponding to each0.000833 inches of deflection. Therefore this requires more than 150sample points when the available strain represents a range that exceedsan eighth of an inch. Unless otherwise specified, the circular impactorcan be assumed to have a diameter of 3.0 inches and the range of straincan be assumed to be the last 50% of the available strain.

Linear Compression Modulus: For a given range of strain and a given R²(coefficient of determination), the compression modulus is linear if thebest fit straight line of the compression modulus for the given rangehas a computed R² value greater than or equal to the given R² value.Unless otherwise specified, the given R² value can be assumed to be0.90.

Compression Secant Modulus: The slope of the secant line between theorigin and the point representing the strain (strain is the deflectionof the material divided by the original thickness of the material in thedirection of the applied force) that requires 50 psi of stress appliedusing a three-inch diameter impactor on the upward facing top surface ofa mat whose bottom surface is supported by a generally horizontallyoriented floor-like plane underneath.

Edge Compression Modulus: The compression modulus as measured by animpactor whose center is positioned within the near edge area of a mat.

Linear Edge Compression Modulus: The linear compression modulus asmeasured by an impactor whose center is positioned within the near edgearea of a mat.

Edge Compression Secant Modulus: The compression secant modulus asmeasured by an impactor whose center is positioned within the near edgearea of a mat.

Center Compression Modulus: The compression modulus as measured by animpactor whose center is positioned within the central region of a mat.

Linear Center Compression Modulus: The linear compression modulus asmeasured by an impactor whose center is positioned within the centralregion of a mat.

Center Compression Secant Modulus: The compression secant modulus asmeasured by an impactor whose center is positioned within the centralregion of a mat.

Compression Secant Modulus Ratio: The edge compression secant modulusdivided by the center compression secant modulus.

Linear Compression Modulus Ratio: The linear edge compression modulusdivided by the linear center compression modulus for a given range ofstrain and a given R² (coefficient of determination).

Available Strain: The range of strain permitted by a mat under forces(stresses) that are attainable by a human being and that do not causedamage to the mat. Many of the disclosed mats have an available strainranging between 0% strain and approximately 95% strain.

Mat mass: The mass or weight of a mat.

Mat density: The mass of a mat divided by its volume.

Mat thickness: The median height (median distance) of the standingsurface of a mat top above its bottom surface (e.g., mat thickness ormedian height (Hmed) shown measured in FIG. 44C).

Surface Pressure: For a mat whose bottom surface is supported by agenerally horizontal floor-like plane underneath, the mat mass dividedby the area of the portion of the mat bottom surface that is in contactwith the supporting floor-like plane underneath.

Coefficient of Restitution: The square root of the ratio of the heightof rebound (Hr) to the height of drop (Hd) onto the top surface 5309 ofa mat 5301. As shown in FIG. 53, this is measured by dropping a 200 lbweight 5304 solid rigid impactor 5308 having two shaped wooden ovals5302 spaced 8 in apart center to center that are of length 10.5 in andwidth of 3.75 in with a 1 in radius on the entire bottom edge that havea surface area and shape similar to that of two human feet from a heightHd of 3 in above the top surface of a mat that is resting on a rigidfloor surface 5307. The maximum rebound height Hr of the impactor isthen measured.

Unloaded Friction Force: The force required to overcome the staticfriction of the mat in contact with a typical smooth (uncarpeted)workplace floor and when unloaded.

Loaded Friction Force: The force required to overcome the staticfriction of the mat in contact with a typical smooth (uncarpeted)workplace floor and when loaded with 70 lb over a 15 square inch areaover the central region of the top surface.

Wet Friction Force: The force required to overcome the static frictionof the mat in contact with a typical smooth (uncarpeted) workplace floorcovered with approximately a 0.5 mm film of water and when loaded with70 lb over a 15 square inch area over the central region of the topsurface.

Surface Lateral Shear: The amount of lateral deflection resulting from a45 lb vertical deflection force applied to a square rigid 45 square inchsurface plate placed upon and surrounding the central region and another14 lb lateral pulling force applied to the same surface as measured whenapproximately centered over the central region of the mat.

Pushback Force: The force required to press the raised end of a tiltedmat down so that it touches the floor. For this metric, we modeled,using the flexural rigidity, the result of fixing one end of the boardsuch that the board is tilted up at an 8-degree angle to compute apushback force. The pushback force is applied at the tip of the raisedend of the board, perpendicular to the board's top surface.

Adjustment Mechanism: A mechanism by which one or more of a mat'scharacteristics may be adjusted by a user (i.e., to be softer or harder)and that may permit a decrease or increase in the mat's compressionmodulus, bending rigidity, flexural rigidity, and/or mat thickness.Examples of an adjustment mechanism include: lateral compression frame,spring pre-tensioning adjustment set screws 2404, inflation pressurewith valves 2802 or 2806, tension perimeter strap 2502, elastic orinelastic tensioners 2702, wires/bungees/other tensioners 2603,selection of different density blocks 2201 and/or layers, etc. Suchexample adjustments may be affected by a compressing, reducing,relaxing, or configuring in one direction of adjustment (e.g., adecrease) and may be affected by an expanding, increasing, tensioning,or alternate configuration in the opposite direction of adjustment(e.g., an increase).

Ground Surface: Any generally horizontally oriented, substantially flatsurface such as a floor or floor covering and including carpet, wood,stone, tile, linoleum, cement, ground, etc.

The device may interchangeably be referred to as a trampoline, mat,platform, board and the like. Similarly, the device may be described asbeing for working, exercising, standing and the like, including theirvariants.

In view of the many possible embodiments to which the principles of thedisclosed standing platforms may be applied, it should be recognizedthat the illustrated embodiments are only examples of the standingplatforms disclosed herein and should not be taken as defining the scopeof the invention.

It is noted that this disclosure describes standing mats and exercisepads generally interchangeably, as the disclosed devices are able toperform both in many embodiments. Some embodiments that contain the samefeature benefits may be more specifically geared towards an exercisedevice or more geared to a standing mat, but the principles disclosedapply to both applications; often simultaneously in the same mat. It isone of the key benefits of the disclosed devices that they are able toserve a dual purpose for a standing user in a manner not previouslyavailable. Currently, users are generally compelled to choose between ananti-fatigue mat designed to absorb standing pressure underfoot or toinstead forgo that in favor of a specialized exercise device that isless suited to serve as an anti-fatigue platform. The disclosed devicesprovide all of the standard benefits of a typical anti-fatigue mat alongwith significant improvements. They also provide a more sports orientedexercise device in the same product.

The embodiments utilizing fibers 2804 may also interchangeably bereferred to as drop stitch inflatable mats or string mat inflatablesamong other variants. Other terms for describing fibers 2804 includespace yarn, denier space yarn, drop stitch core, drop stitched,dropstitch, polyester filaments, fabric filaments, and/or tensilefilaments.

Note that the American Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM) standardfor Indentation Force Deflection (IFD) is not employed as a metricbecause it is not well suited to characterize the disclosed devices. Forexample, the ASTM IFD definition D3574 measures the amount of forcerequired to deflect a 50 square inch surface by 25% of the matthickness. A 25% deflection corresponds to a single 0.25 strain whereasthe disclosed devices are characterized by their behavior across theavailable strain, typically ranging from 0.00 to 0.95. The IFD iscommonly used for comparing mattress surfaces and thus works with alarge 50 square inch surface area to be deflected, whereas an averagehuman foot is much smaller at approximately 15 square inches. Similarly,the ASTM D2230 standard for shore durometer hardness is not utilizedbecause it is also not well suited to characterize the discloseddevices. The shore durometer measures the depth of indentation for astandard impactor and a given force to produce a dimensionless hardnessvalue. The D2230 standard has various types that employ an impactor withdiameters ranging from 0.031 to 0.47 inches with the impactor shaped asa cone, sphere, or disk. Such an impactor is significantly smaller thanan average human foot. Further, none of these standards address thelinear quality of the compression modulus over a range of strains forthe disclosed devices.

4. Advantageous Key Metric Ranges And Limits

Each of the following ranges and limits has been shown to be optimal bymodeling, experimentation and testing. However the ranges may vary withslightly less optimal characteristics, or may vary for highly specificuses. For each of these ranges and limits, a user and/or manufacturermay adjust the key metrics of the disclosed embodiments to configure andadjust for advantageous operation, such as by an adjustment mechanism.

The disclosed mats advantageously have a mat thickness, which may beadjustable, in the range 0.5-4.0 inches and for a significant portion ofusers the optimum range is between 0.75-2.0 inches in order to achievethe best combination of support and performance. One of the reasons matheight may be advantageously employed relates to the length of theuser's foot as there are certain advantages in foot positioning,exercise, and support by having an appropriately sized platform height.For example, a mat that is too thick prevents a user from placing theballs of their feet on the ground and the heels of their feet on theboard while maintaining a comfortable angle of their foot to providestretching or exercise benefits, or vice-versa with the balls of theirfeet on the board and the heels of their feet on the ground.

As shown in FIG. 41G, some of the disclosed mats advantageously have agenerally vertically oriented edge 4103 containing a conforming andcollapsible edge that substantially conforms to the bottom of a standinguser's foot 4105, either shod or barefoot, when the edge is collapsed orcompressed by weight or downward force by the user such that the user'sfoot 4105, straddling the edge 4103, is able to approach or contact thefloor surface 4106. (This is also shown in FIGS. 8A-8H where feet 803are in contact with floor surface 804 and conforming and collapsibleedges 805 and/or 806, and thus are straddling the edge.) Someembodiments have a curved, convex or circular perimeter shape (as viewedfrom above when placed on the floor surface). Together, the matthickness, generally vertically oriented edge, and/or curved perimetershape facilitate the mat edge's adaptability to conform under a user'sfoot in different positions in order to stimulate the foot in more thanone manner, such as is disclosed in section 6.2—Different orientationsfor foot placement of curved perimeter. Such a generally verticallyoriented edge is substantially vertical and presents a face ofsufficient area and shape that a user, when not standing on or loadingthe mat with weight, may easily push or move the mat out of theway—overcoming the static friction, by applying a force with their foot(or other body part or tool) to the edge without the foot easily slidingor deflecting off the mat edge. Further, the edge may be rounded inwardas it approaches the bottom surface of the device in order to permit auser to insert the tip of their foot (or other body part or tool)between the floor and the facing edge in order to lift the device withtheir foot such as is disclosed in section 6.3—Mat manipulation andstorage. For the purpose of easily moving a mat, a generally verticallyoriented edge is distinguished from a tapered edge that is designed toprevent the mat from moving by increasing downward force against the matedge as the foot is deflected upward. This metric is disclosed furtherin section 6.4—Mat thickness.

The disclosed mats advantageously have a bending rigidity within therange of 15-122 lb×in⁻¹ and that may be adjustable within that range andfor a significant portion of users most advantageously within the rangeof 34-109 lb×in⁻¹. A mat that cannot support at least its own weightwithout bending and collapsing before a load is applied does not satisfythis metric because its bending rigidity cannot be measured. This metricis disclosed further in section 4.1—Rigidity and self-supporting.

The disclosed mats advantageously have a flexural rigidity between 2,000and 101,000 lb×in² and that may be adjustable within that range and fora significant portion of users most advantageously within the range of8,000-63,000 lb×in². A mat that cannot support at least its own weightwithout bending and collapsing before a load is applied does not satisfythis metric because its bending rigidity cannot be measured. This metricis disclosed further in section 4.1—Rigidity and self-supporting.Because bending rigidity and flexural rigidity are related only bylength, a device that satisfies both advantageous metric ranges (i.e.,15-122 lb×in⁻¹ and 2,000-101,000 lb×in²) must necessarily have a lengthbetween 9.2 and 67.6 inches. Similarly, for a significant portion ofusers, a device that satisfies both most advantageous metric ranges(i.e., 34-109 lb×in⁻¹ and 8,000-63,000 lb×in²) must necessarily have alength between 15.2 and 44.6 inches.

The disclosed mats advantageously have a linear compression modulus, fora 3.0-inch diameter circular impactor, which may be adjustable, in therange 40-100 lb×in⁻² and for a significant portion of users mostadvantageously within the range of 50-80 lb×in⁻². Employing theimpactor, the disclosed mats advantageously have a linear centercompression modulus, which may be adjustable, in the range 50-100lb×in⁻² and for a significant portion of users most advantageouslywithin the range of 62-80 lb×in⁻². Employing the impactor, the disclosedmats advantageously have a substantial linear edge compression modulus,which may be adjustable, in the range 43-88 lb×in⁻² and for asignificant portion of users most advantageously within the range of55-70 lb×in⁻². The disclosed mats' linear compression modulus ratio isroughly 0.87 (but at least advantageously within the range of 0.75-0.95and for a significant portion of users most advantageously within therange of 0.85-0.90).

The prior paragraph's [0565] disclosed advantageous linear compressionmodulus (also including both the linear center compression modulus andthe linear edge compression modulus) and linear compression modulusratio may be applied over all but the first 10% strain of the availablestrain such that it is a linear compression modulus for a given R² valueof 0.90. It is useful to exclude the first 10% of the strain, becausewhen a user stands motionless on a disclosed device in a neutralposition it is advantageous that the static stress of their neutralstanding results in at least a 5% to 10% strain and thus the range oflinear deflection is most beneficial for the range of strain beyond thestrain of the user's neutral position. And for some embodiments mostadvantageously over the whole range of available strain such that it isa linear compression modulus for a given R² value of 0.92. Matssatisfying a higher given R² value, for example, greater than 0.91,0.92, 0.93, 0.94, 0.95, 0.96, 0.97, 0.98, or 0.99, provide anincreasingly smoother rebound effect for the user.

For some embodiments, the above disclosed advantageous linearcompression moduli may also be applied over the last 50% strain ofavailable strain and a given R² value of at least 0.92. Mats satisfyinga higher given R² value, for example, greater than 0.93, 0.94, 0.95,0.96, 0.97, 0.98, or 0.99, provide an increasingly smoother reboundeffect for the user.

For some embodiments, the above disclosed advantageous linearcompression moduli may also be applied over the range of strainrepresenting at least any 0.40 inches of the available strain and agiven R² value of at least 0.85. For example, for a mat thickness of 3inches and a range of strain from 0.50 to 1.00 inches, representing 0.50inches of the available strain, the range of strain is represented bythe range from 16.7% to 33.3% strain, corresponding to 0.50 and 1.00inches out of the 3-inch 100% strain. Or, for a mat thickness of 1.0inches and a range of strain from 0.00 to 0.40 inches, the range ofstrain is represented by a range from 0.0% to 40% strain, an embodimentlike this can have 0.4 inches of an air filled bladder on top, a mediumfirmness foam layer of 0.30 inches underneath, and another 0.30 inchesof a hard foam layer at the bottom. Mats satisfying a higher given R²value, for example, greater than 0.90, 0.94, 0.98, or 0.99, provide anincreasingly smoother rebound effect for the user.

An example of one-hundred and fifty sample points spread evenly (withina reasonable error tolerance such as plus or minus 0.02%, i.e., for atarget of 9.50% any point between 9.48% and 9.52% is acceptable) acrossan available strain of 0% to 95% is strains every 0.638% starting at0.00% then 0.64%, etc. up to 94.36% and finally 95.00%.

A user is generally capable of attaining the lower ranges of strains,but the higher ranges of strains may not be attainable for a givendevice by some users due to the forces required being beyond theirability or weight. These metrics are disclosed further in section4.2—Coefficient of restitution and compression modulus and section4.3—Collapsing and conforming edge. Such disclosed mats do not exhibit ajarring or sudden stop or wall of force (i.e., a stress to strain curvewith significantly increasing slope as the strain increases) in therange of stresses that a user applies to a mat surface.

The disclosed mats advantageously have a mat mass less than 10 lb andfor some embodiments advantageously less than 5 lb. The disclosed matsadvantageously have a mat density less than 0.013 lb×in⁻³ and even moreadvantageously for some embodiments that have a density less than 0.006lb×in⁻³ and most advantageously for some embodiments that have a densityless than 0.003 lb×in³. The disclosed mats advantageously exert anunloaded (i.e., without a user standing on the mat) bottom surfacepressure less than 0.026 lb×in⁻² (psi) and even more advantageously forsome embodiments that exert a surface pressure less than 0.013 lb×in⁻²(psi) and most advantageously for some embodiments that exert a surfacepressure less than 0.007 lb×in⁻² (psi). A mat with sufficiently low matmass may be easily manipulated when not loaded (e.g., not being stoodupon by a user's feet) such as is disclosed in section 6.3—Matmanipulation and storage. Additionally, the low mat density and lowsurface pressure help ensure a low unloaded sliding friction due to thelow mass per unit area (pressure) of the bottom surface where thefriction is produced. Additionally, the low mass, low unloaded friction,self-supporting rigidity, and shock absorbing generally verticallyoriented edge advantageously presents a reduced tripping hazard if aperson's foot strikes the facing or leading edge of the mat during awalking motion. When striking the disclosed mats, a foot is lessnegatively affected. The initial impulse of foot impact is spread outover time (e.g., 0.1 seconds) by the shock absorbing nature of the edgeso as present a reduced chance of foot or toe damage upon impact. Next,the mat's bending and flexural rigidity allow it to maintain its generalshape and not bunch, crumple, or fold up upon itself as may occur with afoot striking the edge of a traditional mat. This bunching has potentialto tangle the foot and cause a trip. Additionally, the force of thestriking foot easily overcomes the low coefficient of static frictionand thus the mat is more easily moved by the striking foot and thus doesnot present a significant obstruction. The small mat mass and momentumin comparison to the typical mass and momentum of a person's leg as thefoot swings in a walking motion permit the easy deflection. This allowsthe person's leg to maintain most of its momentum and is therefore lesslikely to cause the person to trip.

The disclosed mats advantageously have an unloaded friction forcebetween 0.5 and 3.0 lb and for some embodiments advantageously in therange 1.0-2.0 lb. The disclosed mats advantageously have a loadedfriction force in excess of 20 lb and for some embodimentsadvantageously in excess of 25 lb. The disclosed mats have a wetfriction force of at least 80% of the (dry) loaded friction force andfor some embodiments advantageously at 85% of the (dry) loaded frictionforce. A mat with low unloaded friction force presents a reducedtripping hazard, as the force required to overcome the static frictionand begin sliding is low relative to the force a striking foot provides.Additionally, a mat with a high loaded friction force presents a reducedrisk that the mat slips out from under a user that is standing orstepping on it, causing a fall hazard. This is because the forcerequired to break free and begin sliding is high relative to the forcesa user of a mat applies during typical use, such as when stepping ontothe mat. Likewise, a mat with a higher wet friction force presents areduced fall hazard when used on a wet surface. The loaded frictionforce and wet friction force are measured (tested) with 70 lb loadapplied to a 15 square inch surface because an average human foot hasapproximately 15 square inches of surface contact when standing on asurface. The measure (test) approximates the effect of a 140 lb personstanding with one foot on the surface and one foot off the surface, suchas may occur momentarily as they step onto or off the device surface.

The disclosed mats have a coefficient of restitution advantageouslygreater than 0.70 and for some embodiments advantageously greater than0.75. Having the coefficient of restitution within those ranges assuresthat the surface has a nice bouncy feel without creating a feeling ofinstability due to being too elastic. This metric is disclosed furtherin section 4.2—Coefficient of restitution and compression modulus.

The disclosed mats have a surface lateral shear advantageously less than0.05 in and for some embodiments advantageously less than 0.025 in. Thesurface lateral shear is measured by affixing a mat on a flat horizontalsurface (such as by clamping it down at points away from the mat centralregion to be tested) in order to hold the mat in place during test. A 45lb mass is applied evenly over a 45 square inch surface area with asquare rigid impactor when approximately centered over and surroundingthe mat central region. Next a 14 lb lateral force is applied and theamount of lateral deflection resulting is measured, while ensuring thatneither the mat nor the impactor has slipped. A surface lateral shearbelow the advantageous limit is shown by modeling, testing andexperimentation to produce a mat surface with sufficient stability so asto give the user a feeling of standing on a more solid surface.Experimentation, modeling, and testing has shown that such a surfacelateral shear limit is less than half of the surface lateral shear of atypical user's foot's heel tissue, so it does not produce anysignificant sense of instability to the user. A surface within thislimit requires less significant cognitive processing by the user tomaintain their stability, such as may be required with balance boardsand instability boards which are more likely to distract from tasksrequiring mental concentration.

The disclosed mats have a plasticity percentage advantageously less than4% and for some embodiments advantageously less than 2%. A typical usermay hold a fixed or nearly fixed position on a mat at times and thedisclosed mats must not significantly permanently deform under suchstatic loads. A plasticity percentage within the advantageous limitensures a user will not experience significant plasticity under normaluse of device. Plasticity percentage refers to whether a materialexhibits non-reversible changes of shape in response to applied forcesthat cause deformation. Plasticity percentage is determined by applyinga one square inch force of 20 lb for 3 hours repeated five times duringthe same timeframe over five days and after the fifth application,measuring the amount of permanent deflection and dividing that by theamount of original deflection to give a plasticity percentage.

The disclosed mats have a pushback force advantageously within the rangeof 5.6-9.9 pounds and for a significant portion of users falling mostadvantageously within the range of 6.4-8.7 lb. Having a pushback forcewithin those ranges assures that when the mat is rocked (tilted) by theuser, the underside of the user's foot that is elevated at the top ofeach rocking motion can feel the feedback of the pushback force duringthe rocking motion, such as is disclosed in section 6.5—Rocking ability.This helps create a pleasing rocking feeling and provide a sense ofstability to the rocking user. The pushback force is calculated usingthe flexural rigidity (EI). Assuming that the effect of the changingcross-section of some of the mats is negligible, we approximate thepushback force using the formula:

$F_{pushback} = {\frac{3*\left( {{Flexural}\mspace{14mu}{Rigidity}} \right)*{\tan\left( {8{^\circ}} \right)}}{l^{2}}.}$

Satisfying the previously disclosed ranges and limits of the key metricsfor mat mass, mat thickness, unloaded friction force, bending rigidity,and flexural rigidity helps ensure that a mat may be easily tipped onits edge (such as for storage) by the user with little effort, as isdisclosed in section 6.3—Mat manipulation and storage. This isparticularly important for people who cannot bend over easily or havedifficulty lifting their legs.

Additionally, satisfying the prior disclosed ranges and limits of thekey metrics for mat mass, bending rigidity, flexural rigidity, andpushback force helps ensure that when a user straddles the product withtheir feet at opposite edges and rocks the product back and forth undertheir feet, that even at the peak of each rocking motion, when the vastmajority of a user's weight is shifted to one of the two sides, theopposite side rises up off the floor and applies a pushback force to theunderside of the opposite foot. (See section 6.5—Rocking ability.) Forvery low values of bending rigidity and flexural rigidity, the oppositeside may not lift off the floor when rocking, or if it does lift at all,it only applies a scant or minimal amount of force (if any) against thebottom side of the opposite foot. A mat with low values of bendingrigidity and flexural rigidity therefore does not provide the same feelor benefit nor does it encourage users to rock and move more during use.As described, such motions benefit health when standing for long periodsof time. A mat with very high values of bending rigidity and flexuralrigidity is relatively hard/firm and unforgiving and thus lacks theresiliency to provide a responsive surface that encourages the user tomove more by giving immediate feedback to the user's movement.

The combination of satisfying one or more of these metrics (e.g., lightweight, disclosed bending rigidity, the generally vertically orientededges that collapse and conform to a user's footfall, etc.), in concertwith each other, produce a great advance in standing mat technology thatis more trampoline-like. This results in an extremely beneficialexperience for a standing worker or other kinds of user.

4.1. Rigidity and Self-Supporting

When an object's bending rigidity is referenced it pertains to anobject's ability to resist bending deflection such as by the followingdisclosed test. Each mat being tested is simply supported (i.e., has apinned/fixed support at one end and a roller support at the other end)near its ends (e.g., fixed support 5205 and roller support 5206 in FIGS.52C-52D) and has ten different weights or forces applied by a three-inchdiameter circular impactor on the top surface over the central region(e.g., force F in FIG. 52D) and the resulting bending deflections of thebottom surface below the central region are measured (e.g., thedifference between the quantity of the loaded measure y2 plus anadjustment for loaded compression y3 in FIG. 52D and unloaded measure y1in FIG. 52C), graphed, and given a best fit straight line that has ay-intercept equal to zero so that the linear curve fit is of the formy=mx. The bottom surface 5208 of the mat 5201 is supported at oppositeends 5203 and 5204 and the supports 5206 and 5205 are placedapproximately 1.25 inches from each end 5203 and 5204. The weights rangeup to 5 lb. For each applied weight (force) the resulting bendingdeflection (e.g., the difference between the quantity of the loadedmeasure y2 plus an adjustment for loaded compression y3 and unloadedmeasure y1) is recorded. The bending deflection is tested using tendifferent load weights to permit graphing the bending deflection foreach mat over a range of loads. The ten load weights are selected to beevenly spread out across the range from 1 lb to 5 lb. However, in thecase that the resulting bending deflection for the 5 lb weight (force)causes the supported device 5201 to fall or collapse, the range of theselected weights is linearly scaled downward (e.g., all by ½) to anadjusted weight range such that the maximum weight of the rangemaximally deflects (e.g., 0.4 in) the device to the point just short(e.g., within 95% of the weight) of causing the supported device to fallor collapse.

An example of ten load weights spread evenly across the weight range of1 lb to 5 lb is weights at 1.00, 1.44, 1.89, 2.33, 2.78, 3.22, 3.67,4.11, 4.56, and 5.00 lb. Such load weights are selected to be within areasonable error tolerance such as plus or minus 4%, e.g., for a targetof 1 lb any weight between 0.96 lb and 1.04 lb is acceptable

The bending rigidity is determined to be generally linear for theselected weight range if the best fit straight line for datarepresenting the measurements for the ten sample weights in the selectedweight range advantageously has an R² (coefficient of determination)value of at least 0.950 and for some embodiments advantageously has anR² value of at least 0.975. The bending deflection of the mat ismeasured from the bottom of the mat, for each of the applied weights(forces). A dial indicator or other measuring device that is accurate to0.001 inches is recommended to use. The ten data points, evenly spreadacross the weight range, are recorded to analyze the data. For theanalysis, the bending deflection is the x-axis (horizontal) and theapplied force (weight) is the y-axis (vertical). The data gathered fromthis testing and experimentation is assumed linear and has a y-interceptequal to zero so that the linear curve fit is of the form y=mx. Any matthat does not have a generally linear bending rigidity for the disclosedload range does not fall within the disclosed ranges for bendingrigidity. Any mat that deforms under its own weight, before any loadweights are added, so much as to make it collapse and thus practicallyimpossible for the tester to support the mat at its ends withoutclamping it to the test support points, does not fall within thedisclosed ranges for bending rigidity. The slope (m) of the disclosedbest fit straight line corresponds to the bending rigidity of the mat.

The lightweight and unique rigidity (both bending and flexural) of themat, according to the disclosed advantageous ranges, is beneficial toits functionality as an improved anti-fatigue and exercise mat for astanding worker. The weight and rigidity of the mat is advantageous suchthat the mat may be held horizontally in a user's hand, extended in theair away from the user (e.g., corresponding to FIGS. 52A-52B). Thus, itis rigid enough that it is self-supporting, in that it maintains itsgenerally horizontal or flat profile, when extended from only onelocation of support into an unsupported space. The opposing, unsupportedend remains substantially horizontal. In this position the mat remainsgenerally horizontal and flat though the only support is at one externalend. For example, in FIGS. 52A-52B, the mat 5201 is rigid enough suchthat if it were held 5202 at edge 5204, the opposing unsupported edge5203 remains substantially horizontal, deflecting downward a minimaldistance d in FIG. 52B. In conducting our disclosed test, the bendingrigidity was measured as the applied force divided by the central regionbending deflection or

$k_{b} = {\frac{F}{\delta}.}$This measurement takes into account the material properties of the mat,the load which is the mat's own weight, and the geometry of the matwhich include its length, cross-section dimensions, and massdistribution. A device that falls within the disclosed advantageousranges for bending and flexural rigidity exhibits these disclosedqualities, such as remaining substantially horizontal (minimal bendingdeflection) when extended out into the air from a clamp or from a user'shand while only being clamped or held at one end.

When force is applied to the side/edge by a user's foot, hand, otherbody part, or tool, the mat is rigid enough such that the forcenecessary to initiate pad movement (i.e., overcome the static friction)does not significantly deform the mat. Thus the mat may begin movingbefore the edge starts significantly deforming from the force of thefoot or hand. A bending and flexural rigidity greater than the minimumdisclosed advantageous range values allows the mat to maintain itsoriginal shape while it is being moved with a user's foot.

4.2. Coefficient of Restitution and Compression Modulus

Anti-fatigue mats, even when made of material and gels that have someresilience, are designed primarily to absorb energy and neutralizeshock. They are not well designed to enhance exercise activity in apositive manner, but rather to reduce discomfort by absorbing shock tocreate a low-impact surface on which individuals may move and shiftwhile standing with lower compressive stress levels exerted on theirbody.

To neutralize shock and more evenly distribute pressure on the bottom ofthe feet, anti-fatigue mats are typically composed of materials suitedprimarily for that purpose; materials such as soft vinyl, nitrile PVCrubbers, and foams made from various chemicals. While this constructionhelps to absorb, dampen, and neutralize impact forces when shiftingstance or moving from side to side, and also equalize pressure along thebottom of the foot, it does not provide the ideal rebound metrics forstanding that are provided by the disclosed devices falling within thedisclosed ranges of the metrics. The disclosed devices have beendesigned and engineered to provide significant advantages in safety,rebound responsiveness, rockability and exercise functionality thatencourages movement, ease of use and storage, customization, etc. forusers over tested anti-fatigue mat designs. Numerous anti-fatigue matsand exercise pads representing the various materials, structures, anddesigns available on the market were tested and it has been found thatnone fell within all of the metrics. Satisfying the metrics provides thedisclosed advantages to a standing desk user.

The compression modulus of the tested devices was measured utilizing a 1kilo-pound Instron load cell S/N 31015 with Instron 4486 S/N 1131 3J(calibration traceable to NIST). The test assembly consisted of a devicespecimen under test, and a 3-inch diameter circular impactor, located inthe central region of the device. Tests conducted at a free crossheadtravel rate of 0.5 inches/minute, until 95% strain or 1,000 pounds offorce was reached, where 1 pound of force was used for the beginning ofstrain measurement. Sample points were taken at every 0.000833 inches ofdeflection, which corresponds to 600 sample points per minute.

The disclosed devices and their variants provide a more resilientrebound surface due to their disclosed linear compression moduli andtheir active and highly responsive rebounding bounce-back and feedbackwith low viscoelastic hysteresis. These qualities do not occur withknown anti-fatigue mat designs and applications. The feedback occurswhenever a user compresses the mat under their foot with force, as themat compresses (deflects) the force required to compress the mat furtherincreases linearly and proportional to the amount the mat is compressed.The trampoline-like feedback the mat provides is due to the mat'sability to act like a linear spring and return much of the energy storedby compressing the mat. When the user reduces the force on the mat itquickly rebounds back toward its original shape as the mat returnstoward its original undeflected form.

Several of the disclosed devices are designed to approximate what hasbeen determined to be key optimal rebound metrics for standing asopposed to a jumper on a full trampoline. Some of these embodimentsinclude at least one gas filled chamber, and in such embodiments, therelationship between the gas pressure and compression (deformation) ofthe mat may be modeled by a polytropic process following the equationP₁V₁ ^(n)=P₂V₂ ^(n). Where P is pressure, V is volume, and n is thepolytropic constant of the process. The gas in the chamber may beassumed to be following an isothermal path. For a polytropic processfollowing an isothermal path the constant n is equal to 1. Unlikecurrently existing anti-fatigue designs, as the user applies more force,the mat continues to compress (deflect) linearly for a greater portionof the available strain. During mat deflection, in response to theuser's foot (bodily) force, the mat supplies feedback of counter actingforce as the mat tries to return to its neutral, undeformed shape.

Dynamic rebounding (trampoline-like) capability has not been sought forcurrent anti-fatigue mats. This is true even when an anti-fatigue mat ismade of a cross-linked PVC compound or other compounds with similarcharacteristics, which while flexible and somewhat responsive, do notprovide the responsive rebound, bounce-back, and more rapid feedback ofmany of the disclosed devices because such devices fall within theadvantageous ranges for coefficient of restitution, compression secantmodulus, and linear compression moduli over some of the disclosedimpactors, ranges of strain, and R² values. Tested anti-fatigue mats donot provide an immediate rebound effect or feedback force to a userstanding upon them, consequently, the user is not consciously orunconsciously motivated to move more due to the lack of responsivenessand feedback of the currently existing designs. Additionally, one maydecrease the stability of the mat in small progressions by use of theadjustment mechanism to stimulate more micro adjustments by the user intheir stance, often occurring unconsciously, which stimulates blood flowand improves the standing experience and benefits. This in turn,increases the likelihood that a user continues to stand longer withoutill effect, which increases an individual's energy level and burns morecalories, among other benefits.

As disclosed, current anti-fatigue mats fail to provide thetrampoline-like dynamic surface response of the disclosed devices. Thematerials in current anti-fatigue mats absorb too much energy andrebound too slowly to their original shape to achieve the disclosedbenefits, due to the viscoelastic hysteresis behavior found in many foammaterials. Viscoelastic hysteresis is the loss in energy due to internalfriction. This may be observed when the force required to compress amaterial significantly exceeds the force released when the material isallowed to return to its undeflected shape. As shown in the graph shownin FIG. 54A, the material takes significantly more energy to compressthan the amount of energy it returns. The equation for the energy lossdue to hysteresis isΔE=∫ _(Q) ^(A) F(x)dx−∫ _(A) ^(O) F(x)dx,which is the difference between the area under the Compression curve andthe area under the Release curve.

Also, over time, common anti-fatigue mat materials described hereinbreak down and become less shock absorbent and less responsive due tothe nature of the materials used in these mats. An example of this isthe response of certain materials that mold and compress when weight isplaced on them, and where they slowly return to shape when the weight isremoved. Even firm, high-grade anti-fatigue mats fail to provide theenergetic responsiveness of the disclosed devices. However such a slowresponse is not as desirable or healthy for individuals that stand at adesk and move very little. This is why the higher energy return and thedynamic and much faster rebound or bounce-back of the disclosed devicesis such a significant improvement for use with standing desks over allthe current shock absorbing anti-fatigue mats on the market. And becauseit is a more responsive surface, such responsiveness may be reduced orincreased by adjustment, thus permitting resiliency to be modulated andadapted to the needs of the user.

Any mat that nearly reaches 100% strain (e.g., above 97%) or nearlyreaches the upper end of the range of the available strain (e.g., 95% ofthe upper end) for the compression secant modulus using 50 psi of stressdoes not fall within the disclosed ranges for compression secantmodulus.

4.3. Collapsing and Conforming Edge

Another advantage of the disclosed mat constructions is that they allowfor a collapsing and conforming near edge area 5109 and surrounding edge5106 when load is applied, as when a user's foot, either shod orbarefoot, is over the edge and this also results in a larger effectiverocking region. An example of a collapsing and conforming edge (e.g.,805 and 806) is shown in FIGS. 8A-8H with resultant rocking regions 807,808, 809, and 810.

The typical anti-fatigue mat is designed to minimize and prevent thenear edge area 5109 and surrounding edge 5106 from collapsing. Acollapsing edge is counterintuitive to such a design. In a typicalanti-fatigue mat, the edge is angled for a smooth tapered transitionfrom a thin perimeter at the ground surface that then graduallytransitions to a full thickness towards the center of the mat.Unfortunately, the desired bouncy response is degraded at the taperededge perimeter area, in contrast to the disclosed mat designs, whoselinear compression modulus ratio is roughly 0.87. Thus, the exercise andother benefits of the faster rebound or bounce-back of the disclosedmats are retained, which allow for more movement and rebound on thesurface.

Nearly all anti-fatigue mats are designed with tapered edges to preventtripping, but for standing desk use, this is a less important featurethan currently assumed. Users are generally not moving on and off themat during focused work with their hands or some other physical activitythat may distract them from being aware of stepping on and off theanti-fatigue mat. Thus a collapsing and compressive edge can be used togreat benefit for standing desk users because it permits them toexercise their feet without having to step off the disclosed mats. Theserealities coupled with the other properties of the disclosed devices,create a lower tripping risk device while still allowing a user tobeneficially utilize the edges in contrast to avoiding them as occurswith tapered edge designs.

A rebounding surface with a conforming near edge area that collapses andcompresses more easily than the central region (having a linearcompression modulus ratio of roughly 0.87) is markedly different fromconventional standing anti-fatigue mats. Furthermore, such reboundingsurface can also be advantageously applied to the top of a skateboard,surfboard, wake board, stationary central pivot rocker balance board,roller rocker balance boards (e.g., Indo® board), or a scooter, suchthat the responsiveness of the device is dampened so that manipulationof these devices by a user's feet or other body part is transferred tothe hard surface below over a larger surface area and more slowly. Thisdampening is especially advantageous for beginners who have not yetdeveloped the highly sensitive motor skills required to manipulate suchdevices at a more advanced level. Having said that, highly advancedusers can use this rebounding surface to create new ways and methods tomanipulate these devices in highly advanced and skilled ways. There areseveral ways to affix such surfaces to a hard underlying platform suchas wood, fiberglass, carbon fiber, aluminum, and other rigid andsemi-rigid materials. For example, glues, bottom surface mounted nutsthat permit bolt attachments, two sided tape, microsuction tape,Velcro®, or straps that are attached to fixed grommets on the surfacemay be employed, to attach such a surface.

The disclosed devices have an edge area that is able to provideexcellent dynamic surface response, characterized by a linearcompression modulus, and also permits edge partial collapse that allowsthe edge to dynamically conform to a user's foot shape, allowing theuser to change the angle of their feet off the edge and to have a smoothtransition to the floor surface. The smooth transition is effected bythe transition of the force required to deflect, deform, compress, orpartially collapse the mat for points in the central region of the matand transitioning to a lesser required force out towards its edge band.At points closer to the edge band and further away from the centralregion, a lesser force is required to achieve the same amount ofdeflection (as quantified by the edge compression secant modulus) ascompared to points further away from the edge band and closer to thecentral region (as quantified by the center compression secant modulus).Typical anti-fatigue mats have a constant compression secant modulusacross the entire surface. The disclosed devices have a unique propertywhere the edge compression secant modulus is substantially softer (lowervalue) than the center compression secant modulus of the mat. This multizone mat allows for a stable platform in the center while stillproviding a more engaging edge that may be stood on when the user wantsto push into the mat more. The compression secant modulus ratio, CR, isthe edge compression secant modulus of the mat divided by the centercompression secant modulus of the mat, or

${CR} = {\frac{K_{CE}}{K_{CM}}.}$CR typically ranges from 0 to 1, where most anti-fatigue mats are closeto 1 because in such mats there is no difference between the compressionsecant modulus at the central region of such mats and at the near edgearea. Some of the disclosed mats advantageously have a compressionsecant modulus ratio, CR, and/or a linear compression modulus ratiowithin the disclosed advantageous ranges, which testing andexperimentation have shown to provide two enjoyable zones, without theedge being too soft or the middle being too firm.

One contributing factor to this effect in gas filled embodiments is thetension provided by the inflation pressure. Closer to the central regionof the mat a downward force is counter acted by the tension force as themat deflects. Closer to the central region, the more the mat deflectsthe more the tension force counteracts the downward force. When adownward force is applied closer to the edge band of the mat, thevertical components to the tension force cancel out. Closer to the edgeband of the mat the surface tension force does not act in a direction asto oppose the downward force. Instead, the edge surface is oriented inline with the downward force, which causes the material under the forceat the edges to buckle easily. The opposing force at the edges is onlydue to the material itself. The user continues to have a bouncyrebounding action when the feet are more centrally located on the mat.This also applies to the rocking edges disclosed in section 6.5—Rockingability.

Disclosed are embodiments where the perimeter edge area may include aseparate fluid, gel, or gas filled membrane or tube that runs along theedge and that may have a generally circular cross-sectional shape thatprovides an advantageous compression secant modulus ratio and/or linearcompression modulus ratio within the disclosed advantageous ranges andan advantageous rounded edge shape to better conform to the shape of auser's underfoot arch.

In embodiments with a generally curved vertically oriented edge, the topedge curvature shape may advantageously closely conform to the shape ofa user's arched underfoot and as the edge is compressed, such a curvededge tends to more readily conform to the shape of the user's archedunderfoot and may deform by buckling outward to permit contact with agreater portion of the user's foot.

Typical anti-fatigue mats may angle or taper their edge for a smoothertransition to the floor surface, but the protection of the paddingprovided by these mats is also degraded and lost by this tapering at theedge. Thus, such a mat is not designed or intended for a user to standat its edge; nor is the user encouraged to have part of their foot bothon and off the mat, as that stance undermines the anti-fatigue purposeof the mat due to the thinner, and therefore less cushioning, taperededge. In contrast, the disclosed devices, whose mat thicknesses aregreater than the minimum of the disclosed advantageous ranges, allow auser to extend a portion of their foot over the edge of such a device toexercise or work the arch of the foot or to stand on one's toes on thefloor surface, and stretch the toes by standing, so the foot ispositioned as if the user were wearing high heels, (at the front) or onemay drop their heel off of the backside towards the floor surface,enabling them to better stretch their calves.

With the disclosed mats, different mat thicknesses may be employed tocreate different elevations above the floor surface. For example, alarger foot size can derive advantage from a greater mat thickness evenas thick as seven inches and a smaller foot size can derive advantagefrom a lesser mat thickness even as thin as half an inch. Certainadvantages can be derived by any size thickness, but not all theadvantages are available, unless the thickness is appropriate to thefoot size as disclosed. The edge collapse may be made to be gradual sothat the transition is smooth. For these types of exercises, a smallerelevation is more advantageous for small feet and the mat thickness maybe adjusted upward in small progressions to optimize the stretch andpositioning of larger feet (when wanting to step off partially so that aportion of the foot is both on the mat and in contact with the floorsurface, e.g., FIG. 8A) by either having the mat thickness thicker orthinner. This may also be accomplished by having the mat thickness bethe same size for all foot sizes, but having resilient or non-resilientlayers added (which may be attached at the bottom plane) that elevatethe upper platform that is stood upon, further from the floor surface inorder to accommodate larger feet. This permits a better extension andstretching action for the different foot sizes.

Another advantage of the disclosed curved edge is that it permits abarefoot user standing on the device to curl their toes around the topedge and clench it and grip it with their foot and permitting them toapply an upward pulling force with their clenched foot. This allows theuser to exercise by rocking their weight back and forth between theirleft and right feet and alternately pulling and pushing the top edgethat is gripped by their toes (e.g., pushing with their left foot whilepulling with their right foot). Such use is not viable with existinganti-fatigue mat designs.

Many of the disclosed devices have a linear compression modulus forvarious impactor areas, ranges of strain, and coefficient ofdetermination values within the disclosed advantageous ranges. It isadvantageous for the stress to strain graph to have a linear shape sothat the rebound cycle of the device provides a smooth feel to the useras they move up and down. The smooth rebound effect is due to the factthat the device responds proportionally and linearly to the amount offorce the user applies with their feet or other body part. Typicaldevices in the market are characterized by a non-linear stress to straincurve shape that begins with a softer feel (lower slope) that becomesproportionately much harder (higher slope) as the user deflects furtherinto the device (especially in the second half of the available strain).This non-linear curve makes the rebound cycle feel uneven and lesscomfortable for the user. For some disclosed embodiments, the deviceadvantageously has or is adjustable to have a range of linear deflectionthat includes the last 0.5 inches of deflection of available strain. Therange of linear deflection is the greatest contiguous portion of theavailable strain for which there is a linear center compression moduluswith an R² value of at least 0.95. It is also advantageous that for therange of forces achievable by most users when standing and pushing theballs or heels of their feet into the device as they shift their weightfrom one leg to another, that 80% of their deflection remains within arange of linear deflection and that the downward span of the lineardeflection is at least 0.5 inches.

Having a linear compression modulus for various impactor areas, rangesof strain, and coefficient of determination values within the disclosedadvantageous ranges is advantageous in that it provides a more stableplatform to the user such that they are less apt to get off balance. Italso provides a smooth stress on the body and knees due to itsdeflection and rebounding force being uniform, linear, and smooth. It isadvantageous that the total range of linear deflection is at least oneinch of the deflection of the available strain and has no harsh orabrupt moments during such deflection (i.e., it is linear) and does notbottom out at the limits of deflection, such limits of deflection beingbeyond the typical forces applied by a user (e.g., beyond the availablestrain).

4.4. Slope of Platform Surface

Anti-fatigue mats were originally designed to neutralize and equalizepressure for a standing person that is physically moving or using mostof their body to perform manual labor. Thus, anti-fatigue mats aregenerally composed of materials suited primarily for that purpose, forexample, materials such as soft vinyl, nitrile PVC rubbers, and gelfilled, and are of various thickness of the same type of materials.While this construction helps to neutralize downward pressure andequalize the pressure points on the foot, it also embodies drawbacks inits current design and use. It was found during design and testing ofproducts during development of the disclosed devices, that standing forlong periods of time on current anti-fatigue mats resulted in negativephysical responses with back discomfort and foot fatigue. One way toaddress these challenges is by utilizing a more rapid rebound or bounceresponse as afforded by many of the key metric ranges and limits.

It has been found by testing and experimenting that one of the negativeaspects of standing on a typical anti-fatigue pad is due to the footheel sinking below the level of the foot ball (e.g., foot heel 3407 islower than foot ball 3406 in FIG. 34D). In a large percentage of users,this contributes to poor back posture, discomfort, and foot fatigue. Ifa person stands on the floor, their feet heels and feet balls remainlevel with each other when barefoot (i.e., the heel area of the footremains at or near the same level as the forefoot); or, when shod, theirfeet remain at the angle of their shoe where the shoe heel height oftenprovides foot heel elevation above the foot ball, if only slightly.Because elevated heels are common, a slightly elevated heel stance is anormal and customary position for many standing users. Standing on astandard anti-fatigue mat counteracts this in cases where the heel ispermitted to sink lower than the forefoot when standing (e.g., as shownin FIG. 34D). This then results in an uneven and uncustomary pressuredistribution across the foot because the heel receives a higher pressureor load than the forefoot, which is counter to what most users haveunconsciously trained their bodies to perform.

This effect occurs even with highly resilient and firm standing mats.Further, this problem has not been properly diagnosed or addressed incurrent anti-fatigue mat designs because these mats were larger andoriginally designed for use in physically active environments and notfor standing in one place for a long period of time with little to nomovement. Also, the problem has not been addressed historically due toignorance or a lack of interest in improving anti-fatigue mats beyond agenerally horizontal orientation. The sloped solution is not apparentdue to the larger expectation and historical habit that a mat isgenerally flat for a standing user, not sloped. Further, a sloped mat3402, such as is shown in FIG. 34A, may present an edge 3403 that istall enough to have the potential to present a tripping hazard ifimproperly designed with key metric(s) outside the disclosedadvantageous ranges. However, now that standing desks are in muchgreater use and standing desk users don't move as much as the intendedusers of traditional anti-fatigue mats, there is a need for somethingbetter suited to current conditions. It has been assumed that a flat matis the optimal type of mat to have at least to the extent that it issubstantially horizontal in orientation—because it was seen as muchsafer to have a level surface to move around on and to move on and offof as a user works. This is true whether or not there are terrainelevations such as bumps or ridges along or part of the surface of themat; it is still horizontal in orientation or relatively flat for theuser.

A generally flat mat or one with a substantially planar surface is onewhere for every given pair of 3-inch diameter circular sample areas thatare each completely inside a portion of the center area, the averageheight (mean distance) of the two given sample areas is within a ½-inchtolerance of each other. The average height for a given sample area ofthe standing surface is the average distance between the mat top in thegiven 3-inch circular area and a supporting floor surface underneath themat.

It has also been assumed that standing mats need to be flat in order tobe safer for work surfaces where anti-fatigue mats have been employed.For example, a mat in front of the sink in a kitchen has been seen asneeding to be flat because persons are moving around the kitchenconstantly and it has been thought that unwanted stumbles or trippingare best avoided by having a flat mat surface. This is true incommercial applications in restaurants, warehouses and for generalcommercial use. Thus, the same basic assumptions have been, by default,applied to an anti-fatigue mat for a standing desk worker, withoutrecognizing that standing desk workers have unique needs and challenges.A worker standing at a desk or an elevated workspace faces in thedirection of the work surface and where the technology of work likecomputers and laptops are resting. This results in the worker standingfor long periods of time in a single orientation. Recognizing this factand addressing it permitted the inventor(s) to overcome the prejudicetowards a substantially horizontal plane for an anti-fatigue mat.

The traditional thought process is additionally shown in how mat edgesare designed. Current anti-fatigue mats typically have some sort ofbeveling, tapering or reduction of material on their edges for theentire perimeter of the mat edge; this is for the precise purpose ofreducing unintended tripping or stumbles when stepping on and off themat during use. However, none of these methods and habits arenecessarily optimum for an office employee using a standing desk wherethey spend a majority of their time standing in only one place in frontof their personal workspace, which often has a computer and keyboard.Such modern office workers move around the office, but most of theirstanding is stationary, oriented forward towards their workspace, andstatic with little movement. It was found through testing andexperimentation that a mat where the slope is angled between 2 to 5degrees (with a general maximum no more than 13 degrees) in onedirection permits a user to stand where their foot heel does not sink ordescend into the mat surface below the level of the toes or forefoot.

Disclosed is a sloped anti-fatigue mat where a standing user's heeldescends to a level equal to and not below the toes or arch andforefoot. This orientation has resulted in a reduction to the back andfoot discomfort during long periods of standing in a small area andoriented in one direction, even when utilizing current anti-fatigue matmaterials. The mat may be reversed in orientation so that the toes arehigher than the heels for temporary changing of body position, but ithas been found that a slight forward angle of the mat where the heelcannot descend below the level of the toes is optimum for long periodsof stationary standing, as is common in an office environment.

Experimental and experiential testing has shown that standing on such asloped mat may be more comfortable in the long run because the heel isnot permitted to descend such that it is lower than the forefoot. A usermay still shift their stance, while still maintaining a better pressureequalization between the heel and the forefoot. The ideal shape of thesurface angle depends on the type of cushioning used, how firm or soft,and what is optimum for a user's weight, foot length and size, and thelike, as well as the standing angle to which the user is accustomed. Forexample, people that have worn high heels to work and to which theirbodies have become accustomed, may need to start out at a higher angle,like 13 degrees. Different mats may be utilized depending on a user'sweight so that the disclosed result occurs where the heel does notdescend below the forefoot. The optimum result occurs where, when theheel sinks into the mat surface, the front of the foot remains at orbelow the height of the heel.

Disclosed is an improved mat wherein the standing surface slope of a matmay also be adjusted by altering the mat itself. There are multiple waysto achieve this adjustability. For example, by changing an adjustabletilting base 3602 so that the surface is sloped at a particular angle(FIGS. 36A-36C), or the addition of one or more wedged shaped foams,rubbers, and/or air bladders situated above or below the primary matsurface which permit adjustment of the slope by altering the addedwedges.

Disclosed is an alternative form of slope adjustment. By adding andutilizing a multi-chambered gas system, the layer in contact with theuser's feet may be maintained at a firmer pressure, while a lowerchamber, closer to the floor surface but on the other side of thesurface chamber, may be deflated slightly. This permits a user to applypressure forward with their stance (toward the forefoot or balls of thefeet), which slopes the mat forward. As the top chamber's inflation isunaffected, the entire surface tilts forward which equalizes the heelpressure more with the forefoot, without loss to the reboundingresiliency and bouncy response of the surface in contact with the user'sfeet. Additionally, a user may step back slightly towards the rear ofthe platform and the heel pressure results in the slope reversing suchthat the toes or forefoot is elevated. This process and shifting occurswhile the entire surface bladder is in contact with the user. The useror manufacturer may make pressure adjustments to one or more of the gaschambers to permit further variability of the mat's behavior. The useror manufacturer is able to modulate the resiliency factor of the mat,and tailor and adjust the pressure and sloped tilting angle of the matto the user's advantage.

Disclosed is a platform with one or more attachment points permittingthe addition and subtraction of various accessories, such as elasticbands or straps for resistance exercise, as just one example. Otherresistance exercise accessories may also be attached to the disclosedmat system. The mat disclosed is more responsive and resilient or“bouncy” due to its advantageous rebounding characteristics(interchangeable terms).

4.5. Bowing Arc when Exercise Attachments Added

Disclosed are mats with an advantageous bending rigidity that issufficient to permit the mat to store enough potential energy to allow auser to exercise by flexing the mat at or near the extremities from auser's foot placement when resistance attachments are employed. As shownin FIG. 33 (comprising FIGS. 33A-33D), the edges of the mat 3305 flexsuch that the mat helps absorb some of this energy, which in turn,modulates and smoothes out the force in a more elastic manner. Forexample, elastic bands 3303 or straps of some type may be attached tothe standing mat for exercise and strengthening. In the discloseddevices, the mat may be configured by adjustment to permit the mat toflex upward at or near the attachment point of an exercise band to themat. When a user utilizes elastic bands, this compliant mechanism storesthe work done by the user as potential energy in the deflection of themat. Traditional mats are compliant and bend easily, and cannot storeenough potential energy to make exercise effective due to their lack ofbending rigidity. The elastic potential energy put into the platformelastic band system is U_(E)= 1/2 k_(eq) x² where k_(eq) is theequivalent spring rate (the derivative or slope of the force versusdeflection graph for the given loading condition) when combining twosprings in series. In the case of a standing platform with an elasticexercise cord attached, it is determined by the balance between thespring rates of the two springs, k_(p) (platform spring rate) and k_(e)(elastic cord spring rate). If the two springs have the same springrate, the equivalent spring rate, k_(eq), is equal to half of the springrate of one of the individual springs. As the difference between the twosprings increases, the spring with the lower spring rate becomes thedriving factor, and the equivalent spring rate ends up closer to thespring rate of the softer spring. In the case of standing mats, a rigidplatform serves the function to hold an elastic cord and store theelastic energy required to perform a workout. For a rigid platform,k_(p>>)K_(e), SO k_(eq) ≈k_(e). This means that the equivalent springrate of the elastic cord and platform system is the same as just thecord alone, so the board adds no value to the workout. For a non-rigidanti-fatigue platform, k_(p) <K_(e), SO k_(p) <k_(eq) <K_(e). This meansthat the equivalent spring rate of the elastic cord and platform systemis driven by the low spring rate of the platform, which renders italmost useless for exercise. In this case, the mat deflects excessively,and it is not possible to increase the resistance of a workout becausethe equivalent spring rate of the system is still driven by the soft mateven when changing to higher spring rate elastic cords. The disclosedsystem has a ratio of

$\frac{k_{p}}{k_{e}}$between 10 and 100.

This zone provides a balance where the board is rigid enough towithstand the workout, but it is also soft enough to deflect andcontribute to the dynamic of the exercise.

The platform elastic band system is adjustable because the k_(p)(platform spring rate) is adjustable by the user and its valuecorrelates with the bending rigidity and flexural rigidity of theplatform. This alteration may be made by an adjustment mechanism.

Traditional mats are generally heavier, and when a pulling force isapplied tend to bend more sharply, making an angle pointing toward thepulling force and pulling up at the edges, while the rest of the matremains relatively flat on or near the floor surface. For traditionalmats, k_(p) is small, and allows large deflections, which causes theangle between the floor and the bottom of the platform to approach 90degrees with very little force. Many of the disclosed devices behavedifferently because as the edges pull up, the pulling force also pullsthe mat up in an “arc” like flex (akin to the arc of a pulled bow); suchthat more of the bottom surface of the mat is released from the floorsurface with a level of force that would only lift the edge area of atraditional mat. This is because such mats generally provide onlygravitational force, and much less, if any, flexing force.

Also, as disclosed, attachable layers may be added to one of thesurfaces of the mat with flex properties such that the flex arc of themat more readily resembles a pulled bow. Traditional anti-fatigue matsare less suited for the disclosed use as a platform for exerciseattachments because they lack the ability to store enough potentialenergy in their deflection in the advantageous manner just disclosed.The disclosed devices provide maximum support underfoot (like atraditional mat), while at the same time providing sufficient elasticityof movement to absorb some of the potential energy of attachmentsengaged by a user.

4.6. Elliptical or Convex Curvature and Shape

Disclosed are devices embodying a curved, elliptical, rounded, or convexshape along their edge perimeter. The perimeter shape is selected inorder to adapt itself more readily to the standard stances of a range ofusers from the population and to permit the conforming, generallyvertically oriented edge to fit under one or more portions of the user'sone or more feet and thus more comfortably shape or conform to thebottom of a user's foot, whether barefoot or shod. Additionally, thedisclosed devices may be shaped of one of any polygonal or non-polygonalshapes. In some embodiments, such as shown in FIG. 1C, the discloseddevice employs a roughly elliptical curve along one half or side of theperimeter and a roughly trapezoidal shape along the other side of theperimeter to create a “D” like shape where the long side of an ellipseon one side abuts or faces the trapezoidal portion on the other side.The standard stance of a standing worker is with their feet aboutshoulder's width apart with their feet planted nearly parallel to eachother and pointing forward with their toes oriented outward and furtherapart than their heels such that their feet line up to suggest a slight“V” shape. Traditional mats are generally rectangular or square in form.Testing, experimentation, and use of the disclosed devices has resultedin a shape-specific design that both capitalizes on how a variety ofhumans stand, and takes better advantage of the properties of thedisclosed mats.

Many of the disclosed devices advantageously have a greatest span alongthe upper surface of the device where the length of the greatest span issubstantially longer than any width along the upper surface, where thewidth is measured perpendicularly to the greatest span. The greatestspan and the greatest width are measured across the upper surface fromone extreme outside edge point to another, as viewed from above theupper surface. For example, a greatest span of length L1 in FIG. 25D anda greatest width W1 in FIG. 26C. The length is selected to fit theanatomy of a user to permit a selected range of users (e.g., of commonheight ranges) to comfortably straddle the mat along its length asdescribed in Section 6.5—Rocking ability and in the table described inparagraph [0670]. The mat is shaped such that a range of widths arepresent in the mat to permit a range of users to position one or more oftheir feet so as to select the mat feel under the front and/or heel oftheir foot to have a distinct feeling as compared to other footpositions and/or to the center of their foot. In certain embodiments,the greatest width is selected to be less than or equal to 25 inches andin some embodiments greater than or equal to 9.6 inches. In someembodiments, widths smaller than 9.6 inches may be employed.

Some of the disclosed devices have 90-degree (i.e., tetrad or fourfold)rotational symmetry (e.g. a regular octagon, square, or circle) and thushave a greatest span along the upper surface of the device where thelength of the greatest span is the same as the greatest width, where thewidth is measured perpendicularly to the greatest span. For devices thatare regular in shape and have a non-doubly-even number of sides (e.g.,3, 5, 6, 7, 9, 10 sides) and thus do not have four-fold rotationalsymmetry, the greatest span is somewhat longer than the greatest width,although as the number of sides increases, the difference diminishes andthe width approaches being substantially the same as the length. Indevices where the length is the same as or only slightly longer than thewidth, the length is selected to be large enough to permit the user tostand with their feet at least shoulder width apart. For a circularshaped device, a 99^(th) percentile male adult requires a diameter of 32inches to stand at shoulder width apart and have their feet remaincompletely inside the surrounding edge.

A 99^(th) percentile adult (male or female) user has an average footlength of 11.7 inches and accounting for wearing typical shoes that addno more than 10% to their foot length gives a maximum total shoe lengthof approximately 13 inches. The minimum width required for a 13 inchshoe length of a user to permit their foot, that is oriented to span thewidth, to remain completely inside the near edge area (e.g. inside atypical 3-inch near edge area and a typical 0.75-inch surrounding edge)and thus completely over a center area, that is characterized by anyportion of which having a compression modulus that is at least 90% ofthe center compression modulus, is approximately 19 inches. A maximumbuffer area of 20% of foot length or 2.3 inches for an 11.7 inch foot oneither end of the foot is generally sufficient to permit a user ampleroom to shuffle their feet and shift their stance during use and remaincompletely inside the near edge area with little cognitive load, hence amaximum width of 25 inches is advantageous.

For children, an average 5-year old user has an average foot length of6.7 inches. The minimum width required for a 6.7 inch foot length of auser to permit their foot that is oriented to span the width to remaincompletely inside the edge band (e.g., inside a typical 0.75 inchsurrounding edge) and thus completely over the surface of a mat isapproximately 8.2 inches. A minimum buffer area of 10% of foot length or0.7 inches for a 6.7 inch foot on either end of the foot is generallysufficient to permit a user minimal room to shuffle their feet and shifttheir stance during use and remain completely over the surface of themat with acceptable cognitive load, hence a minimum width of 9.6 inchesis advantageous.

The range of widths include those that permit the user to place theirfoot such that it remains entirely within the perimeter of the mat andaway from the near edge area, or it straddles the near edge area of themat with at least one of the front or heel of their foot while having atleast the center of their foot remain completely or substantially withinthe perimeter of the mat and away from the mat near edge area and closertoward the center of the mat. The near edge area has a compressionmodulus that is less than 90% of the center compression modulus so as toprovide a less stable location on the mat surface for a portion of thefoot straddling, over or approaching the near edge area. When the footextends over the surrounding edge, the compression modulus under thatportion of the foot is further reduced and an even less stable locationis provided. A reduced compression modulus under at least one portion ofa foot facilitates the user to more easily rock and depress that portionof the foot into and out of the mat surface due to the lesser forcerequired by the reduced compression modulus, thereby providing an areaof less stability under that portion of the foot and thus encouraging,stimulating, and permitting more user movements.

In some embodiments, it is advantageous that given a line that isparallel to the greatest span (e.g., axis 102 in FIGS. 1D-1F), a usermay position their foot in a plurality of locations each of whichexhibits the line intersecting the same point of the foot's centerlineat the same angle (e.g., perpendicularly or 80 degrees). At least afirst of the plurality of locations is entirely within the perimeter ofthe mat and a second such location is characterized by the foot's heelbeing in the near edge area. The first location is in the stable centerarea of the mat where the compression modulus at all points under thefoot is at least 90% of the center compression modulus. The secondlocation is in a less stable area of the mat where the compressionmodulus under at least the heel of the foot is less than 90% of thecenter compression modulus. Alternatively, the second location may bewhere the compression modulus under at least the ball of the foot isless than 90% of the center compression modulus. Alternatively, thesecond location may be where the compression modulus under at least theball and the heel of the foot is less than 90% of the center compressionmodulus. In some embodiments, the second location also exhibits acompression modulus under the center of the foot that is at least 90% ofthe center compression modulus. The less stable second location permitsthe user to rock at least one of the heel or ball of their foot moreeasily into the board due to the lower compression modulus in the nearedge area where the heel is positioned which facilitates more usermovement of their foot as the user needs less force to depress theirfoot's heel or ball when it is over the near edge area.

It has been found that a generally circular, elliptical, oval, oblong,or ovoid (egg shaped where each end of the mat are different sizes)convex shape that contains a continuous slope (no vertices) permits themost flexibility for a user to take full advantage of the discloseddevice. Other polygonal shapes with vertices also perform well, but asmooth curvature perimeter on at least one side provides additionalbenefits not available to other shapes, such as the more commonrectangular or square shapes of a typical anti-fatigue mat. It is notedthat when using the term “round, circular, curved, elliptical or oval”,unless the context dictates otherwise, the terms denote a perimetercurvature of generally continuous slope (i.e., having no vertices) andadvantageously convex along the surface, edge, and/or perimeter of themat to facilitate the conforming function under a user's foot, and in amanner more beneficial and adaptable for a user's varied foot stances onthe mat.

The external curvature of the edge itself (as opposed to the curvedperimeter when viewed from above) may be generally vertical and rounded,following a curved path from the floor side of the mat or platform tothe upper side of the mat where a user's feet may stand. The edge may bemore or less curved or even vertical or tapered in different forms. Theedge is also advantageously convex in shape.

By utilizing an approximately elliptical (advantageously close to anellipse with an eccentricity approximately between 0.84 and 0.87) andless circular shaped platform, as shown in FIG. 3K, a user may placetheir feet such that their forefeet 305 are pointed towards the widermiddle portion of the mat 301, while their heels are situated at thetapered ends 303 so that they permit the mat edge to deform towards thefloor surface. This position allows the mat to conform more readily tothe arches of a user's feet, providing arch support and a pleasing senseof support. It also provides a secondary benefit in making the mat moreeasily manipulated by a user's feet without the need to bend over at thewaist. This foot conforming effect occurs whether the person has higharches, which can lead to over-supination; or pronates more towards aflatter foot stance. The low weight and density and general rigidity ofthe disclosed mat permits the user to easily move the mat to variousorientations underfoot with ease not possible with traditionalanti-fatigue mats. Such manipulation may be easily effected by steppingoff the mat and using one's foot to orient and position the mat asdesired, obviating the need to bend over and use one's hands to positionthe mat as disclosed and shown in FIGS. 11G and 11H.

Additionally, by utilizing a generally more elliptical and less circularshaped platform, a user may adjust the mat's location relative to theirworkstation such that a desired distance between their feet may beaccomplished with the mat's edges lining up with their feet to employthe various disclosed conforming edge maneuvers. This adjustabilitycomes from the elliptical shape of the mat and that opposite edges areof varying distances at different positions along the ellipse like shapedue to its eccentricity, which advantageously is approximately between0.84 and 0.87.

4.7. Low Friction Surface for Sliding

Another improvement with the disclosed devices is the utilization ofdivots or bumps of a very slight size that permit the mat to slide moreeasily (reduced friction due to less surface area contact) when in anunweighted/unloaded condition when a user is not standing upon the matwhich is positioned upon a dry surface. Additionally, on a wet surface,such as one upon which coffee or other drink has been spilled, theutilization of divots are believed to provide added safety by providingfor increased friction due to the need for any liquid to fill the divotsbefore the whole surface can hydroplane and cause a slipping hazard. Thedisclosed devices optionally incorporate very slight dimpling or othersurface features to achieve these advantages. It has been found thatsuch dimpling appears to permit a user to more easily “slide” or movetheir mat along a ground surface due to the reduced friction achieved byreduced overall surface contact of the mat to the floor or surface. Thedimples slightly elevate a subset of the mat's bottom surface such thatfriction is reduced through fewer points of contact. In an advantageousembodiment, as shown in FIG. 12A, the dimples at 1202 are tiledtriangularly such that each dimple forms the vertex of an equilateraltriangle and each dimple is itself surrounded by a hexagon of six otheradjacent dimples. While such dimpling is generally slight, the effect ispositive. The increased slipperiness of the mat in dry situations allowsfor easy sliding of the mat along the floor surface. However, when loadis applied from above, such as when a user stands on any portion of themat, the friction is increased by way of more points or area of contactbetween the mat and the floor such that the mat does not readily slideor move when in a weighted condition, requiring a greater force toovercome the now greater friction effect that is compounded by thegreater load. Testing and experimentation confirms that the frictionalforce for embodiments of the disclosed devices increases at a greaterthan linear rate when a standing person applies downward pressure on theplatform. Surface tension or friction is such that the mat slides andmoves easily when unweighted, but friction increases and the mat becomesmore non-sliding when weight or pressure is applied. Thus when a usersteps off of the top surface, the dimples rise up at the bottom surfacelessening the area of contact with the floor and thus reduce the surfacetension (or friction).

The disclosed devices' surface pressure is less than 0.007 psi, suchthat the mat slides easily over any ground surface.

The level of “stickiness” or lack of movement due to friction(coefficient of static friction) when loaded is high; yet the mat movesmore easily when load on the mat is relieved or withdrawn, making theplatform easier to slide than typical mats. This effect is due to thenon-linear response whereby the coefficient of static friction increaseswith the load applied to the mat. Thus, a user gains the benefit of amore easily moveable device that still stays safely stationary andimmobile when force or weight is applied downward, such as when a useris standing on the mat. The low weight and low density of the mat,coupled with its high self-supporting rigidity, greatly enhances thisaffect.

The friction force that must be overcome when a person strikes the matparallel to the floor is governed by the equation F=μ_(s)N. Where F isthe force, μ_(s) the coefficient of static friction, and N is the normalforce. In the case where no external load is applied to the mat, thenormal force is equal to the weight of the mat and the resulting forceis the unloaded friction force. It has been found through modeling,testing, and experimentation that a 3 pound reaction force against aperson's foot mid stride is the threshold where tripping will start tooccur. Therefore, the unloaded friction force is advantageously belowthat limit.

5. Adjustability of key metrics

The disclosed dynamic rebounding response mats are advantageouslydesigned to permit alteration of the coefficient of restitution,compression secant modulus, linear compression moduli, bending rigidity,and/or flexural rigidity (these metrics are felt in the mat'sbounciness, resilience, and/or rigidity) affecting the reboundingcharacteristics in order to adapt to different users (e.g., differentweights, different shoe sizes, etc.) and to adapt to a user desiringdifferent dynamics for rebound, shock-absorption, or feedback responseto their applied pressure. This alteration may be made by the adjustmentmechanism. Such adjustability advantageously permits the user tooptimize the product for themselves by varying the disclosed key metricsalong the disclosed advantageous ranges of bending rigidity, flexuralrigidity, compression secant modulus, linear compression moduli, and thecoefficient of restitution. This rebounding effect is described by theresilience of a material or the coefficient of restitution and energyabsorption or compression energy and the return energy necessary tooptimize the use of the mat for an adult sized user in relationship toeach other.

The disclosed mats can be adjusted, such that each mat may be made veryfirm to very soft. Such adjustments may control the underfoot/bodyfirmness of some of the entire devices or at one or more locations orsubsections of some of the devices. Less firm (e.g., reducing theadjustment mechanism) mats are believed to be characterized by a lowerbending rigidity, a lower flexural rigidity, a lower compression secantmodulus, and/or lower linear compression moduli, than more firm mats.Disclosed are spring-tensioned mats (e.g., FIGS. 24A-24E) that embodythese characteristics in various degrees. Disclosed are compressionframe encased mats (e.g., FIGS. 25A-25F) that embody thesecharacteristics in various degrees. Disclosed are gas filled mats, withadjustable pressure in, one or more gas filled chambers (e.g., FIGS.28A-28K) that embody these characteristic in various degrees.

The disclosed embodiments permit the attachment of additional layerscovering most or all of a single surface which may be made of rigid,semi-rigid, flexible, or softer materials of varying shapes which helpto adjust how the device itself functions. For example, a semi-rigid butresponsive layer may be added on either the bottom or top surface orboth with a catenary or highly eccentric elliptical like (such as shownin the bottom edge of 908 in FIG. 9K cross-sectional view of a mat)surface curvature path that permits a user to stand substantially flatwhen their feet are towards the middle of the platform, but permitseasier tipping and lifting of the platform at the edges when the feetare oriented further toward the ends of the device or its edges.

The disclosed mats may be adjustable in a variety of ways. Aspring-loaded mat may be adjusted by changing the pretensioning of thesprings. A gas filled mat may be adjusted by changing air pressure. Anon-gas filled or partially gas filled mat may also be adjusted byutilizing differing foam or rubber densities. Moreover, surfaces ofvarious properties may be interchanged on an existing mat to adapt todifferent sized users of any weight conceivable. So, a small childweighing less than 30 pounds may benefit, up to an adult weighing inexcess of 400 pounds. But users at these extremes of light or heavyweight are not the typical adult weight user that utilizes such mats.Such typical users are generally between the weights of 75-275 pounds.

6. Advantageous Qualities Afforded by Key Metric Ranges

6.1. Friction and Rigidity

The disclosed mats leverage controlling friction to enhance theusability and convenience for a user, particularly in an office workenvironment and on any ground surface.

For almost 30 years, since their advent, anti-fatigue mats have been andcontinue to be more “floppy” (not rigid) and flexible enough such thatthey can be rolled up to some degree as opposed to only being able tofold, pinch, or crease when a person attempts to reduce its size fortransport or movement. One cannot readily flip such a mat on its side oreasily push out of the way when desired. Additionally, it has been theindustry standard to taper edges on the mat to reduce tripping againstwhat is a substantially non-sliding or moving surface. In fact, taperedsurfaces are regularly “recommended” as something to look for whenpurchasing or acquiring an anti-fatigue mat.

The disclosed mats completely reverse this rationale. They retain andeven exceed all of the common benefits of current anti-fatigue mats, butdo so with a lighter weight and a more rigid mat and surface, and wherethe edges are intentionally not tapered. Each mat's edges aresubstantially vertical and non-tapered. The edges may be curved orrounded to varying degrees, but a sufficiently vertical side or face isgenerally presented. The light weight and rigidity, coupled with theoutright removal of tapered edges creates a mat that is extremely easyto move when the user is not standing on it, but stays in place whenforce and weight is applied in an amount much less than that applied bya standing individual.

Another key aspect of the disclosed devices was to control theirfriction aspects. One great downside of current anti-fatigue mats isthat they are relatively difficult to move around. This poses achallenge in that standing workers also need to sit down during theworkday. Non-stop or excessive standing is not generally recommended,especially in an office environment. A key behavior is to changepositions, move, etc. Current mats are not very easy to move or slidearound, or reorient to be placed out of the way of the now sitting user.The disclosed devices successfully address this common defect. When auser/worker lowers their standing desk so that the worker may sit, theymust either move the mat out of the way, or ignore the fact that theirwork chair may be impinged by it if it remains in its original location.Additionally, such mats cover enough area such that fitting them underdesks can be more challenging. If wires, outlets, garbage cans,briefcases or other items are stowed under the desk, then sliding astandard anti-fatigue mat under the desk becomes even more difficult ifnot impossible.

6.2. Different Orientations for Foot Placement of Curved Perimeter

In embodiments utilizing a generally oval perimeter shape, the userfaces their work space with the oval mat pointing forward along thehorizontal plane toward the back of the desk or work space (i.e., suchthat the longer axis of the elliptical shape points toward their workarea), while, as shown in FIG. 3K, the user is standing on the “rear”orientation of the mat close to or at the extremity of the mat, on ornear its edge. Thus the majority of the mat may be extended under theworkspace or desk when the user is facing their workspace (or computerkeyboard, display monitor, etc.). As shown in FIG. 3C, this orientationmay be reversed so that the mat now extends behind the user while theirfoot stance is at the front end of the mat. In this stance, the majorityof the mat extends behind the user, and not towards or under the worksurface. In this reversed orientation, the mat edge conforms to the feetsuch that the user's forefeet collapse on the edge towards the floorwhile the heel portion of their feet extends towards the middle portionof the mat. This allows the user to have a different feeling of supportand alters the pressure under foot while still allowing the mat toconform more comfortably under the user arches.

By being able to change their stance during standing, a user increasesblood flow and their overall comfort while working and while standing.The oval shape of the mat makes these arch conforming alterations easierto perform at the ends of the mats. And, as disclosed, the relativelyhigh rigidity of the mat coupled with its relatively low weight anddensity, permits the user to move off and shift the mat easily andreadily to make these adjustments, possibly making such adjustments bymanipulating the mat with their feet, which are facilitated by the lowfriction of the mat when unloaded. Current anti-fatigue mats are moredifficult and cumbersome to shift and move in this manner. They aredesigned to stay relatively fixed and stationary in one place and notmoved around. The disclosed devices allow for the opposite result byintent. Easy movement of the standing mat permits the user greaterflexibility in adapting the mat to their desires and comfort, and allowsthese alterations to occur swiftly and with much less difficulty andoften even without the need to bend over.

6.3. Mat Manipulation and Storage

Disclosed is a mat that is sized to fit under a standard desk or anelevating desk so that a user may more easily move the mat under thedesk surface for relatively unimpeded foot placement when sitting. A keygoal in the development of the disclosed devices was that they be easyand convenient to move out of the way when a standing user changed to asitting position at their workstation. This feature has been generallyignored in the current market but is a key requirement for the discloseddevices and their various embodiments. The resulting mat is sizedgenerally smaller than most anti-fatigue mats designed for theworkplace, whether commercial or office. For the office or desk useenvironment, many scientific studies have found that it is healthier fora person to neither stand nor sit continuously for any extended durationof time, but rather to transition between both positions regularlyduring work. However, when a worker desires to sit, they often need tomove or shift the mat out of the way to better accommodate their chair.Current anti-fatigue mats, especially the heavier more shock absorbingdesigns, are more difficult to shift and move than the disclosed devicesdescribed herein. The difficulty and annoyance of moving the mat tendsto reduce the frequency of changing between a sitting and standingposition to the detriment of the worker

The most advantageous sizes are generally between 21 and 39 inches alongthe major axis; for a significant portion of adult users a mostadvantageous size of 25-34 inches along the major axis has been found tobe excellent for platforms utilizing the disclosed technology described.Curved surface embodiments (e.g., FIGS. 30A-30H, 31A-31E, and 32A-32I)of the device may be as large as 39 inches at their greatest length(e.g., major axis). The disclosed devices are an improvement over thesetraditional mats because they are so much easier to move aroundaccording to the user's needs. Additionally, this size range generallyfits within the stance width range for most standing persons such thattheir feet may be more easily placed at or near the ends or edges of themat in order to rock, tip, or otherwise manipulate the platform andutilize the other benefits of the design.

Advantageously, the shape is roughly elliptical with an eccentricityapproximately between 0.84 and 0.87. Such size is advantageouslygenerally elliptical in shape and sized between 825 mm×450 mm with about0.84 eccentricity and 720 mm×360 mm with about 0.87 eccentricity. Largersizes may be employed but some of the advantages of the smaller sizesare reduced in such cases.

Easier mat manipulation also benefits users with physical challenges, orfor whom bending over is difficult due to injury or prior condition.Ironically, the recommendation to switch regularly between standing andsitting during work can exacerbate the chance of injury or strain. Tomake room for a chair or stool to sit, the mat must be moved out of theway each time. Users risk discomfort and injury whenever they bend overat the waist to grab the mat with their hands. Moving currentanti-fatigue mats often require hand manipulation because they are lessrigid (more “floppy”), have greater floor friction, and of such a weightthat moving with feet are difficult. The disclosed mats reduce the riskof discomfort or injury because their light weight, low ground friction,and wide edges permit easy foot manipulation and movement without a userneeding to bend at the waist or engage their hands. As a result, usersare more likely to follow the sensible recommendation to regularlyrotate between sitting and standing during the workday.

With the generally vertically oriented edges that include a curvatureand that are more vertical (i.e., non-tapered) coupled with the lightweight and rigidity of the disclosed devices, the user may manipulatethe mat with their feet (e.g., as shown in FIG. 10) such that they mayflip the mat onto its edge and lean it against the inside of the desk,wall, or against a trash can or other nearby vertical objects.

Additionally, the generally vertically oriented edges that include acurve may provide a slight space between the edge and the floor wherethe edge approaches the underside of the device. As shown in FIGS. 10Eand 10G, this permits a user to place their toes into the gap under thebottom edge 1004 and apply a lifting force in order to pivot, hinge, orrock the mat about the opposite bottom edge 1005, as shown in FIGS. 10Fand 10H, so as to permit the user to grab the lifted edge now in the airwithout bending over or to lean it against an upright surface bymanipulating with their feet. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 11A-11D,a user may step with leg 1108 on the edge 1104 to roll, pivot, rock, orhinge the edge 1104 and cause the opposing edge 1105 (opposite side) tolift off the floor, enabling the user to grab it with their hand withoutbending over or to continue, as shown in FIGS. 11E-11H, by lifting themat 1101 underside with their other leg 1109 at adjacent side edge 1106causing it to pivot about opposite edge 1107.

Additionally, the disclosed devices offer safety for any user thatmanipulates them with their feet, as there is no aspect or area of thedisclosed devices upon which a user's foot can be caught within ortangled up with. The improvement results from the disclosed devicesbeing generally rigid with a generally convex macro scale surface, andthat each mat may be thought of as a generally convex body and thusprovide a much reduced chance for the foot to get entangled with the matbody. A convex macro scale surface disregards any micro concave cavitiesof the device that are smaller than ½ the diameter of the smallest toeon an average person's foot. In advantageous embodiments, such microconcave features all have a depth of less than 0.1 inches and the spanacross such micro concave features are all less than 0.2 inches.Examples of micro concave features in an advantageous embodiment includethe dimpled pattern (e.g., dimples 1204 on bottom surface 1202 shown inFIG. 12) that is employed to favorably decrease the friction of thedevice and the lips where layers of covering fabric overlay and areaffixed to make a seam.

Being so effective for the office and work environment does not,however, exclude the disclosed devices from non-office environmentrelated activities. For example, the disclosed mat can be used bymechanics working next to a vehicle or machine; or by a coach, standingand observing their athletes; as well as other non-office relatedstanding activities. Because it is so easy to handle and move, it iswell suited to be carried or transported to various venues andlocations, and to then be placed on the floor surface for immediate andbeneficial use.

6.4. Mat Thickness

Another improvement disclosed is that the disclosed devices possessgreater mat thickness. Traditional work mats generally have taperededges that thin or taper substantially towards the floor to make thetransition from floor to mat as graduated or smooth as possible tomitigate tripping; an important safety concern that has influenced thedesign of all current mats for the past 30 plus years. The discloseddevices go in the entirely opposite direction and instead permit anelevated edge line where the sides of each mat are not tapered butrather are substantially vertical in orientation. The disclosed mats aregenerally thicker (of greater height) than tested anti-fatigue mats,which are at, or less than, one inch thick as used in the currentmarket. The disclosed mats, falling within the disclosed advantageousranges of mat thicknesses, make them the most elevated anti-fatigue matsever sold for general use that still possesses a conforming edge withall thicknesses. The edges are not tapered, as is common in traditionalstanding mats, but may be curved slightly. Despite any edge curvature oralternative shape, a much more vertical orientation of the edge isdisclosed. This edge remains conformable under foot, and is not avertically rigid platform such as a hard plastic, wood or other rigidmaterial.

At first, such a generally vertically oriented or thick edge might beseen as a tripping hazard in a work environment. However, the edge isemployed in concert with a rigid but lightweight structure. The trippingrisk is reduced because when struck, the mat readily slides or movesaway from the point of impact. The reduced friction achieved wheredimpling of the bottom is included, is believed to add to this effect.Thus, if a user or pedestrian inadvertently strikes or kicks the mat, itmoves as opposed to resisting the strike. This differs from the counterforce of a traditional and therefore higher friction mat and its lack ofrigidity to weight that instead cause a stumble or trip when so struck.Current mats are designed to be slip resistant and therefore have higherfriction coefficients. A high friction coefficient and relatively heavyweight increases the “push back” or resistance of the mat to movementwhen struck. For example, one is less likely to trip or stumble on asoccer ball when kicked because the ball lacks significant friction tostay in place upon impact but instead slides or moves away from thestriking foot. Additionally, the ball's mass is relatively small andtherefore provides little resistance to the momentum of the impactingfoot.

As disclosed, when the device is struck accidently by a foot, itgenerally slides away, however, it is possible that a fixed barrier liesin its path of deflection, such as a table leg. In such cases, where aconvex shape is employed, the shape advantageously has a high likelihoodof striking the fixed barrier at an angle and deflecting around it toone side or the other. Additionally, in embodiments with a curvedvertically oriented edge, were a fixed barrier to be encountered by thedislodged mat and the mat not deflected around the barrier, the user'sfoot has a high likelihood of deflecting around the top or bottom due tothe generally vertically oriented edge's curvature.

Not only is the likelihood of tripping greatly reduced, the thicker matand edging permits the various other benefits described in thisdisclosure. The mat is easier for a user to manipulate and move. Thethicker mat also permits better rebound characteristics, improvescirculation, and enhances the user's experience. And the mat has a moreresponsive and snappy feel than traditional mats. Additionally, it hasbeen found that the mat conforms readily beneath a user's foot or shoe,adding to the general comfort of the device. And, as disclosed, the edgeof the disclosed devices collapse and conform to a user when that useris standing on each mat at those edges, regardless of which portion ofthe foot (heel or forefoot) is extending at the edge of the mat. Thus auser may stand on the edges of the disclosed mat without difficulty eventhough the edges are substantially vertical in orientation and nottapered in the traditional manner. And, the user gains the additionalbenefit of having the mat conform to the inside of their foot or feetwhich adds comfort, support, and variation in ways to increase bloodcirculation and comfort.

6.5. Rocking Ability

Some of the disclosed mats operate to permit a rocking motion such thata user may tip the bottom surface of the mat off of the floor byshifting their weight from one side or end when applying pressure at theother side or end. The disclosed mats that include a collapsing andconforming edge, such as disclosed in section 4.3—Collapsing andconforming edge, have a rocking region that extends into the flat stablecentral area. It is a surprising and useful outcome of the rocker designthat this collapsibility expands the rocking region into the flatcentral area, allowing for the dual purpose of both standing stationaryand rocking near the perimeter where the flat stable central areaoverlaps the rocking region. For example, FIG. 8I shows an extended leftside rocking region 807 and FIG. 8J shows an extended right side rockingregion 808.

Some of the disclosed embodiments allow the user to maintain stabilitywhile moving, stepping, and/or shifting their weight across the vastmajority of the central surface area (e.g., over more than 60%, 70%,80%, or even 90% of the central surface area), yet also provide arocking region along the perimeter that permits rocking. Some of thedisclosed embodiments operate to permit a user to stand on a stable and“flat” platform when they need or desire to be still and/or steady, butto also be able to rock the mat back and forth by changing their footposition. Such disclosed devices permit this benefit due to acombination of one or more of the following characteristics: rockingregion, mat thickness, mat length, mat width, rigidity, and curvature ofperimeter, surface, and edge as disclosed. Rocking edges areadvantageously accentuated due to substantially vertically orientededges, where the edges are convexly rounded, with the mat thicknesswithin the disclosed advantageous ranges.

As shown in FIGS. 8I-8J, the height of many of the disclosed embodimentspermits a user's legs 802 to apply more leverage in a way that assistsin elevating one end (e.g., right side rocking region 808 in FIG. 8I andleft side rocking region 807 in FIG. 8J) of the mat 801 when userpressure is applied at the opposite end (e.g., left side rocking region807 in FIG. 8I and right side rocking region 808 in FIG. 8J) of the samemat. This action permits the mat to more readily tilt upward at thenon-pressured end. The user may then alternately apply pressure to theopposing end while releasing it on the originally pressured end to causea rocking motion. Greater mat thickness provides greater leverage andthus makes rocking easier for a user; however, this benefit must betraded off against the downsides of a mat that is too thick (e.g.,becomes more difficult to mount, or is uncomfortably elevated where auser could stumble off). Testing and experimentation have shown that aheight between 1.5 and 3 inches provides a comfortable compromisebetween these competing benefits.

Additionally, a user may flex their feet forward and back (betweenforefoot and heel versus the side to side motion disclosed) to stimulatetheir muscles and feet differently. Alternatively, as shown in FIGS. 8Eand 8F, a user may position their feet 803 at the front and rock theboard 801 forward on its forward edge 805 and poise it on front siderocking region 809 to improve their balance. Or, as shown in FIGS. 8Gand 8H, a user may rock the board 801 backward on its rear edge 806 andhold it on rear side rocking region 810 to improve their balance andstretch their calves. Also, a user may adjust the overall rigidity ofthe mat, as it has been found that a more rigid mat is more easilytilted or rocked in the manner disclosed. If the edges/ends are convexlymore rounded and less squared (more circular or curved, such as anellipse or other continuously sloped curved shape) it is easier for auser to rock the board onto its edge when shifting their weight. Thispermits the user to produce a slight up and down rocking motion whichstimulates the user's muscles in a manner different than for those matsthat cannot be rocked. The more ways a user can stimulate their musclesand stance and movement on a working mat, the better for their long-termcomfort and health; this is especially true for a working environmentwhere the user is standing (and sitting) at the same workstation forlong periods of time. The ability to engage in this additionalstimulation is very beneficial to the long-term comfort and health ofthe user.

By this motion, a user that rocks the device may cause their calfmuscles to contract and relax similarly to how the calf muscles contractand relax when walking as one takes a new step forward. Such motion istherefore similar to a normal walking activity and helps to improvecirculation and elevate energy levels for higher cognitive performance.In as even as few as ten rocking motions back and forth, users arebelieved to achieve these benefits. Thus, a method of exercise isavailable that is unique to this design. A user may utilize thedescribed rockability by crafting tailored sets, each set containing oneor more movements. For example, a method of rocking exercise may beinitiated by a user rocking back and forth multiple times (constitutingone set), and then repeat such sets multiple times. These exercisemethods take advantage of the unique characteristics of the disclosedmats in a manner unavailable with other mats. By rocking towards acollapsing edge curvature, a user is benefited by a smooth and lessextreme movement that still provides great benefits for coordination,stimulation, and muscle contraction. Additionally, the collapsing edge(see section 4.3—Collapsing and conforming edge) functionally extendsthe effective rocking region curve by collapse and conformation in thearea of foot pressure, such that the effective radius of curvature isenlarged and the effective curvature elongated. A rocking region thatspans the width of a user's foot placed near the perimeter makes iteasier to both initiate and sustain a rocking motion. This functionallyenlarged curvature, in turn, helps the user initiate a rocking motion toroll or pivot about what was once a flat surface; that throughcompression becomes part of the curved rocking region. Creating arocking region from a flat device is a notable improvement in thestanding mat art. More generally, this “rockability” is a key benefitthe disclosed devices possess over current designs. The colloquial term“rockability” is short for rocking-ability and is alternatively used todescribe this feature.

Existing rocking devices upon which users stand are designed such thatthe pivot point smoothly moves from the center of the device's lowersurface outward to the edges as a user rocks on one of these devices.Thus they have a rocking region that originates from a center point andencompasses the entire lower surface. Such a shape basically follows thepath of a rocking chair leg curvature to some degree. Another centrallylocated curvature is achieved by a protruding round middle dome of aplatform, e.g., dome 4602 of FIG. 46. For example, a round ball likeshape is centrally located on the bottom surface to permit the surfaceto readily tilt from a central pivot point.

In contrast, many of the disclosed devices have a “flattened” centerportion of the lower surface to provide stability; in such cases, therocking region begins further away from the center portion of the lowersurface. In these devices, the pivot points (rocking region) areintentionally located away from the central location and toward theoutward perimeter of the mats. This structure is uniquely beneficial toanti-fatigue mat devices for work where rocking can be distracting. Theflat base central portion allows for little to no movement; but whenrocking and movement is desired, a user may widen their stance and/orshift their center of mass closer to a perimeter edge and over therocking region to begin rocking. This activating user action permits themat to tilt or rotate upward, which initiates a rocking motion. Havingboth a flat stable center portion and an edge rocking region isadvantageous compared to a continuous rocking action that results fromdevices with no flat stable region but instead having central rockingpivot points. Devices without a flat stable center portion do not give auser the choice to easily avoid a rocking action during their tasks byplacing their feet interior to the rocking region and nearer to thecenter and over the flat stable center portion.

To permit rocking, the disclosed devices advantageously have a matlength (e.g., along the major axis) that allows a user to comfortablystraddle the mat with one foot at one end, over the rocking region, andtheir other foot at the opposite end, over the opposite rocking region.Experimentation and testing has shown that for many users, a comfortablestraddling stance for rocking is one where the legs are separatedsomewhere between a 30° and 40° angle (e.g., such as is measured in A1and A2 in FIGS. 50A-50B). Smaller angles typically result in the feetbeing less than shoulder-width apart and thus allow little rockingbefore a user's center of gravity begins to cross past the outside edgeof their feet and the rocking motion must end to maintain balance.Larger angles tend to result in an uncomfortable stance that begins tofeel awkward and unnatural. Some of the disclosed devices areelliptically shaped so as to allow a user to place their feet at theopposite sides of the mat length and have the toe area of their feetextending into the rocking region of the front edge and the heel area oftheir feet extending into the rocking region of the rear edge. Such astance allows the user to either rock the board side-to-side or to rocktheir feet front-to-back without shifting their foot position. Suchmotion additionally helps to activate and exercise the hips. A mat thatis too long along the major axis does not permit a user to place boththeir left and right feet in a fixed position such that they can rockboth ends of the mat in succession. If the major axis is too long, theuser's feet are unable to straddle enough of the mat to simultaneouslyplace their left and right feet in the rocking region at the oppositeends of the mat (i.e., the ends at the extremes of the major axis).

In embodiments that can provide a rocking motion, a minimum length of aflat region between rocking regions of 20.6 inches is advantageous, soas to match a minimum comfortable straddling stance of a 99^(th)percentile male user with legs shoulder-width apart and legs at a 32.9°angle which positions the feet on opposite ends of the standing platformand over the rocking regions. Additionally, a maximum length of a flatregion between rocking regions of 29.6 inches is advantageous, so as tomatch a maximum comfortable straddling stance of a 99^(th) percentilemale user with legs shoulder-width plus two single foot widths apart andlegs at a 47.7° angle. Similarly, a maximum length of a flat regionbetween rocking regions of 19.5 inches is advantageous, so as to match amaximum comfortable straddling stance of a 1^(st) percentile female userand with legs shoulder-width plus two single foot widths apart and legsat a 41.3° angle which positions the feet on opposite ends of thestanding platform and over the rocking regions, and a minimum of 13.5inches with legs shoulder-width apart and legs at a 28.5° angle. Becausethese two ranges (i.e., the ranges for the 99^(th) percentile male andthe 1^(st) percentile female) do not overlap with each other, multipleboard sizes are needed to meet the needs of the extremes of the averageuser population. The bottom surface includes edge curve 911 of length Lthat forms a rocking region and may effectively be extended to alsoinclude straight sections that form a portion of a flat center sectionif base 910 of FIGS. 9M-9P is compressible. An example of an extendedrocking region is also shown in FIG. 68. Additionally, the platformrequires a sufficient bending and flexural rigidity to affordrockability.

Angle (of leg spread) 1% Female 99% male 25° 11.8 15.7 26° 12.3 16.3 27°12.8 17.0 28° 13.2 17.6 29° 13.7 18.2 30° 14.2 18.8 31° 14.7 19.4 32°15.1 20.1 33° 15.6 20.7 34° 16.1 21.3 35° 16.5 21.9 36° 17.0 22.5 37°17.5 23.1 38° 17.9 23.8 39° 18.4 24.4 40° 18.8 25.0 41° 19.3 25.6 42°19.8 26.2 43° 20.2 26.8 44° 20.7 27.4 45° 21.1 28.0

The above table lists the distances (in inches) between the inside edgesof the left and right feet (e.g., distance between guidelines 5005 inFIGS. 50A-50B) for various angles (in degrees) of leg separation (e.g.,A1 and A2 in FIGS. 50A-50B). These are shown in FIGS. 50A-50B and arebased upon a user 5001 facing forward with their legs 5007 spaced apartat the angle formed at the apex of the divergence of the two legs 5007and measuring the distance from the inside of one foot 5003 to theinside of the other foot 5003. The lower value is based upon the heightthat 99% of women exceed and the upper value is based upon the heightthat 99% of men fall below.

For many users, a comfortable straddling stance that permits rockingcorresponds to FIG. 50A where the feet 5003 are placed near shoulderwidth or slightly wider than the shoulders 5002 and thus having a flatregion between rocking regions of length corresponding to at least auser's shoulder-width is advantageous. A straddling stance of a user'sfeet placed less than near shoulder-width apart permits very littlerocking amplitude before a user's center of gravity begins to passoutside of a user's feet and thus a user begins to lose balance.

1% 50% 99% 1% 50% 99% 50% Male Female 5-Year-Old Shoulder Width    15.8″   18.3″    20.6″    13.5″    16.1″    18.0″   10.6″ Angle (of legspread)    30.8°    32.6°    32.9°    28.5°    30.8°    31.2°   32.3°Foot Width    3.4″    3.9″     4.5″    3.0″    3.5″    4.1″    2.7″ FootLength    9.1″    10.4″    11.7″    8.3″    9.5″    11.7″    6.7″Required Foot Span    21.2″    23.1″    25.1″    20.0″    21.8″    25.1″  17.6″ Shoulder plus 2 feet    22.6″    26.1″    29.6″    19.5″   23.1″    26.2″   15.9″ Angle (of leg spread)    44.2°    46.8°   47.7°    41.3°    44.5°    45.7°   49.3° Shoulder plus 4 feet   29.4″    33.9″    38.6″    25.5″    30.1″    34.4″   21.4″ Weight  100.3 lb   172 lb    244 lb    93 1b   137.5 lb   217.6 lb   39.4 lbBending Rigidity    50.2    86    122    46.5    68.8   108.8   19.7Flexural Rigidity 18,363 48,375 100,782 11,035 26,957 63,054 2,662

The above table provides expected measures for average male and femaleusers in the lowest 1^(st), middle 50^(th), and top 99^(th) percentilesof the United States population. It also provides expected measures foran average 5-year-old child in the middle 50^(th) percentile of theUnited States population. The above table (in inches) lists the measureL1 of the shoulders 5002 width (first row), which corresponds to theminimum flat region width for various sized users in the first row andthe user's corresponding typical foot width in the second row. Thesecond row lists the measure A1 of the corresponding angle of leg spreadrequired for a typical user to achieve a shoulder-width (row one)stance. Two single foot widths (third row) and one shoulder-width (firstrow) are added together as the measure L2 to get the sixth row thatcorresponds to a maximum flat center portion length (e.g., along themajor axis) to permit a user to rock while comfortably straddling a matwith both feet over a rocking region. The seventh row lists the measureA2 of the corresponding angle of leg spread required for a typical userto achieve a shoulder-width plus 2 feet (row six) stance. Four singlefoot widths (third row) and one shoulder-width (first row) are addedtogether as the eighth row that corresponds to a minimum board length(e.g., along the major axis) to permit a user to rock while comfortablystraddling a mat with both feet over a rocking region and within the matsurface. The foot length is listed on the fourth row and provides aminimum board width to permit a user's feet to remain within the matsurface. The required foot span is listed on the fifth row and providesa minimum board width to permit a front and back edge of a user's footto remain inside a 3-inch near edge area that is inside a 0.75-inchsurrounding edge by a buffer of 20% of foot length on either end of thefoot and an additional buffer of 10% of foot length for a typical shoe'sextra length compared to the enclosed foot. The average weight is listedon the ninth row. The tenth row lists the bending rigidity required fora two-inch bending deflection with support points corresponding to thecenter of the user's feet that are placed shoulder width plus 2 feetapart, which is a center-to-center span that is the average of rows sixand eight. The eleventh row lists the flexural rigidity required for atwo-inch bending deflection with the same support points as row ten.Many of the values listed herein related to measures of average humananatomy are derived from data in the reference book The Measure of Manand Woman by Alvin R. Tilley, John Wiley & Sons, New York, 2002, pages11-4.

For those users desiring a highly rockable mat with less stability, therocking region advantageously spans the entire underside. For manyusers, that want a combination of a stable center portion and an outerrocking region, the inner edge of the rocking region advantageouslycorresponds to the inside edges of the left and right feet whencomfortably straddling the mat. For these users, when the rocking regionis within these limits, a user may straddle the flat or concave midregion and place their feet on opposite ends over the rocking regionsand thus rock the board from side-to-side. For example, 98% of women'sfeet are between 3.0 and 4.1 inches wide and 98% of men's feet arebetween 3.4 and 4.5 inches wide. Therefore the width (e.g., L in FIGS.8I, 8J, and 9P) of the rocking region outside of a relatively flat orconcave center portion is advantageously between 3.0 and 4.5 inches,this allows the rocking region to be substantially under the foot.Consequently, the board length along its major axis is advantageouslybetween 21.6 and 40.9 inches for users straddling with an angle of legspread between 20° and 30° and for a typical comfortable leg spread of25° between 25.9 and 36.3 inches. A 30 inch board may be straddled bythe smallest 1% of women by utilizing an angle of approximately 30°while also being straddled by the largest 99% of men by utilizing anangle of about 20°. Therefore boards of about 30 inches in length afforda rocking region accessible by almost all sizes of users that preferthese performance characteristics. For other users, that want apredominantly stable platform, the inner edge of the rocking regionadvantageously corresponds to the outside edges of the left and rightfeet when straddling the mat. Herein are disclosed innovative devicesdesigned to meet the preference needs for the above exemplary usergroups.

One advantageous embodiment is to curve the base (bottom surface) inseveral ways, such as shown in FIGS. 9A-9H, which show a fully orpartially curved surface base or underside 902 curved gradually to 3inches inward (at 904 and 905 in FIG. 9B) and continuing upward andtoward the center surface that is slightly raised above 903. Or, putanother way, a central area whose edges begin to extend downward towardthe floor 903 at the contact points 904 and 905 (approximately 3 inchesfrom the edge) before reversing direction and rising upward from thefloor 903 toward the generally vertically oriented edge at rockingregions 926 and 927. The curving edge size may be constant all along theboard. This provides a consistent sloped tilting feel in all directions.

In another embodiment the entire bottom surface is concave and rounded,but when loaded by a user, compresses in the central area of the bottomsurface to flatten out and conform to the plane of the floor surfacebeneath. However, the user may readily rock the platform and move thecompressed area toward one side or the other in a smooth and stablefashion due to the dampening resulting from the compressed area thatconforms to the surface of the floor. The material for the fully roundedor curved surface base may be compressible or soft, and hence pliableenough to flatten in this manner. The surface curve may follow agenerally catenary or elliptical path, which enables a smooth transitionfrom the center almost flat surface area to a steeper perimeter surfaceand edge area. The surface curve path may mirror or follow a generalcatenary (bridge support span) curvature and path. The generallyvertical side edge of the mat may be curved following the curvature of aconstant mean curvature surface area bubble, and may resemble a fluidmembrane whose sides are under differing pressures. The bottom surfacemay be made of one or more layers of flexible, rigid, compressive, semi-or non-compressive materials of various durometers such as foam,urethane, wood, plastic, gas or liquid filled bladders or chambers, etc.to construct a fully or partially curved surface base embodiment.

Other curved surface base embodiments employ drop stitch inflatabletechnology that utilize internal threading or filaments or fibers 2804connecting a first (top or upper) surface and a second (bottom or lower)surface to maintain, under pressure, a flat or planar first and secondsurface with a uniform thickness where a seam 919 is placed around theperimeter of the first and second surfaces to seal them together andthus permit the interior to be pressurized sufficiently to engage theinternal threading of filaments or fibers 2804 in a taught state thatcounteracts the surface's tendency, under pressure, to producenon-parallel top and bottom surfaces. The seam width where the twosurfaces are connected may be advantageously sized such that whenpressurized, at and near the perimeter of the first and second surfaces,the seam pinches the two surfaces closer together (center gap 925) thanthe limiting distance afforded by the internal threading or fibers 2804.The device is thus allowed to shape into non-parallel top and bottomsurfaces around the perimeter region where the filaments or fibers 2804are not fully engaged. The two surfaces may be pinched together at theedges by the seam width being narrower than that traditionally employedin current applications. The seam may be thinned more on one surfaceside 924 of the seam 919 than the other in order to pinch one surfaceside more than the other due to the surface material's resistance tobeing stretched. The resulting shape may be modeled as a minimal surfacearea curve under differing pressures with an additional pressure sourcederiving from the constraining geometry of the taught seam that does notsignificantly stretch. This distinctive seam, surface geometry, andresulting edge pinching, results in a mat that, when pressurized, has amore rounded bottom or top surface and bottom or top edge. This resultis accomplished while retaining a mostly flat top or bottom surfacealong and near the perimeter as controlled by the seam geometry andresulting pinching forces. Such an advantageous shape affords a greaterrockability or more stability.

The bottom surface 921 may be sized to a smaller or greater footprintarea than the upper surface 918. For example, tapering in and shrinkingthe perimeter of the top surface 918 relative to the perimeter shape ofthe bottom surface 921 may create the top surface 918 perimeter shape.Such tapering/shrinking of top surface 918 perimeter may be maximized atthe farthest apart perimeter edges (e.g., at the ends of an ellipticalperimeter's major axis) such as by an additional inch inward from thesides at the far ends of the perimeter (e.g., major axis ends) ascompared to the bottom surface 921 and reduced down to no reduction ofthe perimeter as compared to the bottom surface at the closest apartperimeter edges (e.g., minor axis ends). Alternatively, this may bereversed with the tapering of top surface 918 perimeter maximized at theclosest together perimeter edges (e.g., at the ends of the ellipticalperimeter's minor axis). Additionally, the tapering may be eliminatedwith the top surface 918 perimeter may be equally shrunk as compared tothe bottom surface at all points along the top perimeter. Alternatively,this sizing may be reversed such that the top surface is larger than thebottom surface to produce a more stable concaved surface platform thatis harder to rock (e.g., by flipping the platform upside-down).Additionally, a hybrid approach may be taken where sizing is reducedalong one axis (e.g., minor axis) and increased along the other (e.g.,major axis) to produce a saddle shaped surface that rocks along oneconvexly shaped axis and is stable along the other concavely shapedaxis.

Any of these reductions may also be achieved to some extent, aspermitted by the seam width, by affixing the side seam 919 to overlap agreater or smaller portion of the bottom surface 921 as compared to thetop surface 918 or alternatively, in the case of a variable sizingdifferentiation between top and bottom, alternatively by adjusting thewidth of seam 919 by curving one side of the seam more or less than theother side of the seam as shown at trimmed side 924. When sealed withseam 919 and inflated to pressure, this produces a curved surface devicewith edges or whole surface that curls to account for the differingsurface areas of the top and bottom and/or any width adjustment of seamtape 919 center gap area 925 such as shown in FIGS. 9AC, 9AD, where thecenter gap area 925 narrows at trimmed side 924 of seam tape 919 andFIGS. 30A and 32A where the center gap area 925 remains constant andseam tape 919 does not have any trimmed side 924.

When the effect of the differing sized top and bottom surfaces isadvantageously combined with the effect of the pinching seam 919, itproduces an asymmetrical effect such that the one surface (e.g., bottom921) curves in further and longer than the other (e.g., top 918) surfaceand the latter (e.g., top 918) surface may develop a small protrudinglip or such lip may be adjusted such that it is advantageouslycounteracted by curvature of the edge seam 919 and surface (e.g., top918) to maintain a primarily convex shape of curvature. Thus, thebottom, curved edge and surface shape, may afford greater rockability,and may be formed to have a longer more gradual curve (i.e., greateraverage radius of curvature and thus larger rocking region) than theopposite curved edge and surface shape on the top that may be a moregenerally flat surface with a more sharply curved top edge.

In some embodiments, the top surface 918 may be covered with a variablethickness layer to equalize out any lip on the perimeter of the topsurface afforded by the asymmetry between top and bottom surfaces andnot being counteracted by the curvature imposed by the seam's pinchingforce. In other embodiments, the area of increased overlap may bedistributed non-uniformly around the perimeter such that the overlap isincreased as the seam approaches the wider major axis dimension (e.g.,820 mm) of the surfaces and is decreased as the seam approaches thenarrower minor axis dimension (e.g., 450 mm) of the surfaces. Thisresults in a curved underside surface that has a greater rockability inits wider dimension (major axis) than in its narrower dimension (minoraxis). The opposite approach (e.g., increased overlap towards thenarrower dimension and decreased overlap towards the wider dimension)may be taken to provide a surface that has a greater rockability alongits narrower dimension than in its wider dimension. Alternatively, seamoverlap may be held consistent throughout, with no differentiationbetween the wider and narrower axes of the top surface, to provide aconsistent rockability along its entire perimeter.

Utilizing a curved surface shape on the underside of the standingplatform enables a pleasing rocking motion. In contrast, a rocking chairtypically uses a constant curved arc that may flatten out towards theeach end of the arc which then slows down the rocking motion as theperson in the chair approaches the limits of rocking afforded by thechair, a standing platform rocker is most pleasing when constructed witha very different kind of arc. In particular, when the standing platformis in its neutral position of resting flat on a floor surface with noforces being applied to the surface of the platform, a stable positionmay be desired and is achieved with an arc on the bottom surface of theplatform whose curved shape is flattened toward the center and gets asharper curve (e.g., smaller radius of curvature) toward the edges.

Several mathematical curves may be approximated to achieve a pleasingrocking motion, each curve of which appeals to the tastes of differentpeople. One such advantageous curve is an ellipse with eccentricitybetween 0.91 and 0.999. However, in the case of thicker mats,approaching the maximum disclosed advantageous ranges of matthicknesses, the eccentricity may advantageously approach 0.80. And, incases where the elliptical shape (i.e., rocking region) only reachesinward about 3 inches to a flat/non-curved inner contained surface, theeccentricity may advantageously span the whole range to 0.00. Such acurve may be applied to the bottom surface along the longest dimensionand then adjusted as such a curve is rotated about the center point ofthe surface such that the height of the ellipse is constant but thewidth of the ellipse is varied to match the desired shape of the surfaceas seen from above. Another such curve is a catenary or funicular asused in some bridges to avoid bending moments, this may be expressed as

$y = {a\mspace{11mu}{{\cosh\left( \frac{x}{a} \right)}.}}$When using a catenary (or parabolic approximation of a catenary) a largevalue for the parameter a is required to give a shape that correspondsto an ellipse with high eccentricity in order to get a pleasing rockingmotion with stability in the center.

Additionally an equation such as described in The n-dimensional analogueof the catenary: existence and nonexistence by U. Dlerkes and G.Huisken, Pacific Journal of Mathematics, Vol. 141, No. 1, 1990, andavailable http://projecteuclid.org/download/pdf_1/euclid.pjm/1102646773may be used as the curve to shape the surface bottom. Such a shape maybe found by creating a soap bubble along a boundary which depicts theoutline of the desired surface shape as seen from above and applying agreater pressure on one side and a lower pressure on the other side inorder to deform the bubble surface into a minimal surface under pressurewith the desired pleasing rocking motion. In general, a surface bottomthat approximates a minimal surface under pressure offers a smoothrocking experience and depending on the particular curve selected hasrocking properties that some users find most pleasing and advantageous.

As previously described, the rockability may be adjustable in thedisclosed devices. There are several reasons why a user may want toalter the responsiveness of the rocking motion: in one example, a usermay be overly sensitive to a highly rockable surface such that a certainlevel of movement disrupts their concentration while at task duringwork. Other users may prefer a more responsive action because theadditional movement does not bother them, or the extra movement actuallyaids their concentration. Some users are kinetic learners who think moreclearly when they move; while others think or concentrate better whenthey move less and are fairly still. The disclosed devices areadjustable so that these different types of users may utilize the samedisclosed devices by altering the responsiveness of the mat. In thoseembodiments where the bottom surface has a set curvature level, the usermay then utilize the top surface to modulate or adjust the overallresponsiveness of the platform. By adjusting the softness or resilienceof the top surface, a user may alter responsiveness of the matregardless of the properties of the bottom surface. For example, FIG. 9series of drawings disclose rocking surfaces with an adjustably inflatedtop surface such as standing platforms 907, 909, 913, and the like.These surfaces may be inflated or possess adjustable springs as shown inFIG. 24A-24E. They may be of other materials that permit the top portionto be adjustable to change the level of responsiveness. In these variousversions of the device, a rocking surface may be disposed as the bottomsurface while the adjustability of the top surface permits a user tomodulate the top surface responsiveness such that it affects the overallresponsiveness of the device.

In this way the speed and reactiveness of the user's movements may besoftened such that the device moves less (or more) than would otherwiseoccur without adjustment. In another example of this concept, 3502 ofFIG. 35A is replaceable with a rocking surface. The top surface isadjustable to either soften or firm up the top surface, which in turnalters the overall responsiveness of the device as previously described.The same concept is applicable to FIGS. 23A-23C, FIG. 24, FIG. 42, FIG.46, and FIG. 66E as examples. In each of these variations, the topsurface becomes a means of adjusting and modulating the responsivenessof the rocking action for the user without altering the bottom surfacecharacteristics. A user may fine-tune the platform to improve theircognitive performance or focus during work. For example, a user enteringinto a high stress phone call may adjust the mat for increased movementby softening up the top surface to encourage more balance movements andengage their core which can help to reduce stress. By allowing for akinetic outlet for stress during such a call, users can keep their bloodpressure down, and their thoughts clearer than if they were forced to berelatively still during a high stress situation. In other circumstances,the same user may be reading detailed reports or spreadsheets where lessmovement is desired to aid in concentration. An adjustable top surfaceis new in the art, where the obvious way to adjust reactiveness ofmoving or rocking surfaces has been to alter the bottom surfacecharacteristics and keep the top surface relatively firm and more rigid.

7. Various Embodiments Of Devices

7.1. Multi Layered Mat

Disclosed are embodiments wherein one or more individual interlockingpieces may be layered upon one another to permit the user to adjust themat's key metrics to meet their needs and desires, FIGS. 22A-22P.Disclosed herein are additional embodiments, FIGS. 29A-29D, withmultiple layers of foam, rubber, or the like that are selected toproduce a linear compression modulus within the disclosed advantageousranges over at least a half of the range of the available strain (e.g.,at least 0.0 to 0.75 inches for an available range of deflection of 0.0to 1.5 inches which corresponds to the available strain) and an R² valueof 0.89. A hybrid embodiment, FIGS. 31A-31E, includes at least oneenclosed fixed or adjustable pressure air bladder surrounded by layersabove and/or below of foam, rubber, or the like.

Disclosed are embodiments, FIGS. 23A-23F, that include a rigid membranebetween one or more pairs of adjacent layers of foam, rubber, or thelike. The rigid membranes may be fabricated out of high-densitypolyethylene (HDPE) or other strong materials. When the rigid membranereceives a loading force over an area, it operates to distribute theforce over a larger area underneath and is engineered and designed toproduce a linear compression modulus within the disclosed advantageousranges over at least a 50% range of the available strain and an R² valueof 0.89. The rigid membrane may be cut up into a lattice of individualcircular or polygonal areas (e.g., 2307 and 2308) of increasing sizes(e.g., increasing diameters, widths, etc.) in lower layers so as todistribute the force to an ever larger area as each rigid layer passesthe loading force downward to the next lower layer.

As shown in FIG. 23F, it is possible to sandwich non-linear compressionmodulus materials (e.g., layers 2304, 2305, 2306, 2309, 2310, and 2311)by rigid or semi-rigid dividers (e.g., 2307, 2308, 2312, and 2313) insuch a way that the resulting compression modulus of the sandwich (e.g.,standing platform 2301) is more linear than the compression modulus ofthe bulk materials individually. This is achieved by varying the stresslevel between the layers of materials (i.e., dispersing the force over alarger area in lower layers of materials). The force is constantthroughout all of the layers (both materials and dividers), so the areaover which the force is applied must change to result in differentstress levels. Stress is defined as

$\sigma = \frac{F}{A}$where F is force and A is the area over which the force is applied.Stress may be computed as σ=Eε where σ is stress, E is secant modulus ofelasticity and ε is strain

$ɛ = \frac{\delta}{L}$where δ is the deflection of the top surface and L is the thickness ofthe material. The formula for the deflection of a layer is then

$\delta_{n} = {\frac{{FL}_{n}}{A_{n}E}.}$The formula for the total deflection of the stacked system is shown as

$\delta_{Total} = {{\delta_{1} + \delta_{2} + \delta_{3}} = {\frac{{FL}_{1}}{A_{1}E} + \frac{{FL}_{2}}{A_{2}E} + {\frac{{FL}_{3}}{A_{3}E}.}}}$The thickness and area of each layer may be adjusted to achieve a moreor less linear response.

7.2. Spring-loaded Mat

Disclosed are embodiments as shown in FIG. 24 (comprising FIGS. 24A-24E)wherein individually adjustable springs are arrayed together under aresilient layer 2402 to provide an adjustable mat. Near the perimeter,the adjustment set screws 2404 may be set so as to provide a collapsingand conforming edge. Furthermore, a central section or other disclosedzones may be adjusted to be softer and more resilient, while the ends orother zones can be adjusted to be firmer. The same variability of zonesmay be achieved in many embodiments such as the individually adjustabletubes 1608 and 1615 of FIG. 16, individually adjustable inflatable balls1806 of FIG. 18, assembling differing density foam blocks 2201 of FIG.22, individually adjustable chambers 1702 and 1704 of FIG. 17,individually tightened tensioners 2603 of FIG. 26, and individuallytightened tensioners 2702 of FIG. 27. The springs 2406 are selected toprovide a linear compression modulus within the disclosed advantageousranges and over many of the disclosed ranges of strain and R² values.One example of a type of linear spring that meets the above performancespecifications is a helical coil spring that exerts a constant rate offorce per unit distance compressed.

Disclosed are embodiments utilizing wave springs as shown in FIGS.27A-27D. The wave springs provide an adjustable linear compressionmodulus within the disclosed advantageous ranges and over many of thedisclosed ranges of strain and R² values by permitting theirpretensioning to be adjusted with elastic or inelastic tensioners 2702to adjust the slope of the stress to strain curve.

7.3. Balance Board with Rebounding Top

Disclosed are devices with a hard (bending rigidity greater than100lb×in⁻¹, flexural rigidity greater than 50,000 lb×in², and/orcompression modulus greater than 600 lb×in⁻² over many of the disclosedranges of strain and R² values) upper surface that may be generallyelliptical and that is centered on top of a center pivot surrounded byan array of adjustable springs (e.g., adjustment set screws pushingagainst spring compression washers) that provide a generally linearcompression modulus over many of the disclosed ranges of strain and R²values as the surface is rocked upon the center pivot where the range ofmotion at the edges is at least 30 mm for a configured force in therange 80-250 lb. The design affords a balance board that does not travelaway from its set positioned location relative to the user's work areaunder normal use by a user as is typical for traditional balance boarddesigns where the moving action of the board is in contact with theunderlying floor surface and thus may cause the board to migrate as itis used.

Such embodiments may be supplemented by attaching a cushioned surface tothe top surface to provide a less firm feel and that tends to dampen theforces a user applies with their feet and other body parts. This givesthe device a rebounding top. Such cushioned surface may be composed outof internal threaded air mat, one or more air chambers, rubber mat, foammat, etc.

Current applications for stand on rocking devices utilize hard andrelatively inflexible rigid top surfaces that transfer energy to pointloads directly and make the surfaces very reactive with quickresponsiveness. When thinking about creating a rocking platform for usewith a standing desk, the goal was to make a device that is lessreactive and slower to respond to foot movements and weight shifts onthe platform in order to reduce the cognitive load (i.e., the totalamount of mental effort being used) needed to manage the instability ofthe platform. By making it more stable, it permits a more peaceful,higher performing state of mind. Research has shown that the control ofbody sway and cognitive functioning are to some extent related. Forexample see: Effect of cognitive load on postural control by GerhardAndersson, Jenni Hagman, Roya Talianzadeh, Alf Svedberg, and HansChristian Larsen, Vol.

58, No. 1, Brain Research Bulletin, May 2002 Pages 135-39,doi:10.1016/s0361-9230(02)00770-0.

Some of the disclosed devices that permit rocking include a standingsurface 914 that distributes the exerted point loads or pressure pointsfrom a user's foot into a broader area (e.g., FIG. 23F) so that therocking platform becomes less sensitive and less reactive. This slowsdown and dampens the rocking and tilting motions that normally occurmore rapidly when the foot does not have this additional dampeninglayer. This same dampening and, in some disclosed embodiments,adjustable dampening may be applied, using any of the attachmentmechanisms described herein, to the top surface of skateboards,surfboard, scooters, wake boards, central pivot rocker balance boards,and roller rocker balance boards (e.g., Indo® board) to make them lessreactive, more forgiving, and easier to use for beginners.

7.4. Multi Chambered Gas Mat

Disclosed are embodiments with a multi-chambered gas mat system (e.g.,FIGS. 18A-18F and 17A-17H). Such a design has been found to havebeneficial effects in adjusting the slope of the mat. Anothermulti-chambered system is disclosed wherein longitudinal or latitudinalchambers 1608 of FIGS. 16A-16M, beneath a top surface, may be employedto permit adjustability of pressure within different zones or areasbeneath a user's footfall or stance. Such chambers may be of any size orshape to permit the foot or stance of a user to be supported by eitherincreasing gas pressure or reducing it in different portions of the mat.Optionally, such chambers may maintain a flat surface by utilizinginternal threading or filaments or fibers 2804 connecting a first (topor upper) surface and a second (bottom or lower) surface to maintain aflat surface. The chambers may be vertical 1702 or 1704 in nature aswell, and/or overlap each other in varying degrees. Also, the chambersmay be hollow and operate to receive other objects such as gas-filledballs 1806, which provide more individualized pressure and response foreach discrete ball or combination of balls oriented in various patternsunder a user's foot, within the platform. Alternatively, the balls maybe foam, rubber, or the like and permit mat adjustment by thesubstitution of balls with those of differing characteristics such asdiffering compression secant modulus and/or coefficient of restitution.The chambers may also be filled with foam or other fillers that performthe disclosed functions by being of varying feel/character correspondingto the varying feel/character of balls inflated to different pressurelevels. The chambers may be hybrid and contain balls that are surroundedand held in place within foam filling.

Also disclosed is an adjustable pressure mat that may be altered to fitwith a user's weight and use and comfort range underfoot. Most adultusers find that pressurizing the mat between 2.0 and 4.0 psi is mostadvantageous and maintains a sufficiently stable standing surface orplatform for standing at a desk without significant cognitive load to auser to main maintain their balance. Some users may find it advantageousto go above or below this range depending upon their size and weight,and use preferences, for example, as low as 1.0 psi and as high as 8.0psi or even as high as 10.0 psi. Larger and heavier adults and childrentend to prefer pressures above 3.0 psi while smaller and lighterchildren and adults tend to prefer pressures below 4.5 psi. According tothe United States Center for Disease Control National Center for HealthStatistics, available athttp://www.cdc.gov/nchs/data/series/sr_11/sr11_252.pdf, the 10^(th)percentile average body weight of the U.S. population is 116.4 lb. andthe 90^(th) percentile is 266.3 lb. Testing has shown that over 80% ofpotential users, those whose weight falls between the 10^(th) and90^(th) percentiles, tend to prefer pressures between 2.0 psi and 5.0psi. All of the disclosed gas filled devices are pressurized or can bepressurized to fall within these ranges.

Typical drop stitch fabric material has a fabric tensile strengthranging between 200 to 350 psi depending on the orientation of thefabric and the grade of material. Such material is rated for a maximumpressure of approximately 22 psi. For a standing platform application, atypical inflation pressure is 3.5 psi. Doubling that pressure to 7 psias a safety factor, the minimum tensile strength required for dropstitch fabric for a standing platform is between 65 and 110 psi.

Lower inflation pressures have not been preferred or sought for dropstitch devices. High pressure has been desired in order to have as rigidor stiff a structure as possible. The disclosed drop stitch devicesstart with a much lower inflation pressure which permits a userincreased foot movement, and both encourages, and causes, users to makemore small or micro movements. This is possible because the lowerpressure mat provides a less stable surface. This results in severaladvantages—it improves circulation, enhances muscle engagement, andincreases and improves lymphatic flow, which then elevates a user'shealth and performance. Mats that posses a single pressure adjustableair chamber provide the same improved benefits, and decreased inflationin all relevant designs serve the purpose of enhancing micro movementswithout the distraction of more extreme changes being perceived by auser. Thus, a user may gain the benefits of constant and subtlemovements which permits the body's pumping mechanisms, such as the lymphsystem, to operate more normally, without the distraction of excessivemovements while performing work tasks.

7.5. Internal Threaded Air Mat

Some of the disclosed air mats or beams (interchangeable terms for thepurposes of this disclosure) maintain a flat surface by utilizinginternal threading or filaments or fibers 2804 connecting a first (topor upper) surface and a second (bottom or lower) surface to maintainflat surfaces. Without these connecting internal filaments or fibers2804, the pressurized gas mat loses its flat shape. Such unwanted shapedistortions are exacerbated in air chambers lacking these filaments orfibers 2804. While this type of material has been commerciallyavailable, the application, constructions, and developments in thedisclosed embodiments herein have not been previously employed for usewith this type of material.

A perceived negative of such disclosed design is that it does not resistthe compressive force at the edges of the mat, which in turn causesthose edges to buckle when weight is applied. However, the discloseddesigns are benefited by a differing (from the center) edge compressionsecant modulus, such as is disclosed in section 4.3—Collapsing andconforming edge.

7.6. Surface Terrain

Disclosed are devices that may have a strip or hump bifurcating thecenter or middle of a central air beam of the mat. This strip or bumpmay be of other lengths on the surface, or may be of other shapes; asviewed from above, it may be straight, serpentine, circular, or toroidalin shape, or any combination of shapes. It may be located at anylocation on the surface where the foot contact occurs, or on theopposite planar side where the floor surface is in contact with it. Itmay be a different density (less or more firm than the mat) of cushionedmaterial than the provided air portion of the mat. It allows forflexing, exercising, and/or stretching the toes, calves, and ankles. Andit may be rigid or semi-rigid of various materials. One of the benefitsof having a firmer bump in relation to the rest of the mat surface is toincrease the pressure, which allows for more stimulation underfoot. Thisis believed to provide improved circulation, while still providing asofter general surface of the remaining mat.

A perimeter bump or elevation may be advantageous to a user so they mayeasily feel the location of the board perimeter with their feet and alsoto provide an edge upon which to grip their feet upon when rocking theboard. This bump may be angled to improve the positioning or alignmentof the foot and ankle when applying pressure on the ends for rockingpurposes.

Like the other terrain variants, this disposition of the hump or stripmay be oriented lengthwise or crosswise or closer to an edge. Whencloser to the edge, the mat itself may be flipped over or turned 180degrees so that the edge may be closer to the opposite edge withouthaving a different mat. These orientations permit the standing user tostand in a manner that allows them to comfortably manipulate their feetso that they may increase the circulation and massage their feet; aswell as elevate their heels or toes; and to rotate their ankles,utilizing a harder or firmer strip to support their manipulations. Andit is adaptable to different foot lengths and sizes by increasing ordecreasing the size or width of the hump or strip.

Another type of surface terrain is generally flat and affords differingregions or zones of firmness. A user wearing high heels may desire afirmer rear zone where they place their heels and a softer front zonewhere they place the balls of their feet. Attaching a semi-flexible thintop surface layer to cover a portion of their board's top surface mayprovide a firmer zone. The covering layer may be made of a thin woodveneer, bamboo, spring metal, plastic, fiberglass, carbon fiber, and/orother materials with similar rigidity properties. The cover may beshaped to cover a desired portion of the top surface. The cover may beaffixed in one of several ways. The cover may include thin magnets tohold it in place over attracting thin magnets built into the mat, justbelow its surface. The cover may be affixed with a weak adhesive thatpermits easy removal. The cover may be affixed with a grooved patternthat dove tails into an opposite pattern along the curved edge perimeterof the mat. The cover may come in sections that may be placed adjacentto each other to provide a configurable area of continuous coverage. Thecover may provide a region or zone that is more stable and/or lessbouncy offering a different dynamic than the uncovered area.

In these, and their variants, the surface stiffness or firmness may beadjusted by thickening the surface material, or permanently affixing oneor more additional thin layers of the same material in order toproviding a slightly stiffer surface. This in turn, helps distribute thepoint load across a broader area underfoot. Such surface material may beof a variety of PVC type or other similar materials that create a firmersurface without adding overly thick layers on the top of the device. Thesurface may be thicker or have thin layers of a second or more sheet ofthe same material in order to maintain a similar feel underfoot but witha slightly varied firmness. The thickening changes the dynamics slightlyand helps to stabilize the platform. Such layers may be permanentlyaffixed during fabrication of the device, or may be permanently affixedlater by a seller prior to shipment or by the user after delivery.Various methods already described in this specification may be utilizedto adhere or otherwise attach these layers to the surface of the devicesdescribed herein.

Also disclosed is an add-on surface attachment with moveable anddepressible, shock absorbing “bumps” that operate to massage a user'sfeet, and are attached or otherwise connected to the disclosed mats. Anexample mat attachment is shown in FIG. 63 (comprising FIGS. 63A-63H).The mat attachment is a flexible, semi-flexible or rigid surfacematerial forming a substrate containing either a regular or irregularlattice of openings to permit bumps to protrude through each opening.The mat attachment that connects to the mat is substantially horizontalin a relatively flat orientation, and contains multiple holes (from oneto hundreds or even thousands depending on the size of the depressibleshock absorbing button or bumps and the surface area of the mat). Eachhole permits a button to be freely inserted through the hole upward.Each button possesses an extended base or flange which is wider than thehole or collar and prevents the button from completely escaping upwardout of the hole, but may move freely downward into the mat surface andthen continue to depress or push into the cushioned mat from above,downward towards the floor surface. This provides multiple shockabsorbing buttons that operate to massage the feet of a user.

The horizontal member or add-on may be made of any number of materials,but is generally thin enough to insert buttons through its holes suchthat the buttons come into contact upward with a user's feet whenstanding upon them. It can be of a cloth material that is flexible andstretches such that it naturally tightens against the mat when attached;or, it can be made of a thin plastic material. In inflatable boardembodiments the material may tighten to snuggly fit and/or stretcharound the mat upon board inflation. It may be attached in any number ofways. For example, it may utilize attachment points located on the mattop surface, edges, or bottom surface. The attachment may be ofdiffering sizes. The surface of the add-on may be rigid or soft along acontinuous sliding scale of stiffness or rigidity, but still permitbuttons to pop upward toward a user's feet. When that user steps on theadd-on, attached to the mat, the user's downward foot pressure in turndepresses the buttons, each independently, based upon the pressurereceived at that button's location, and push down into the mat'scushioned spring surface. The mat itself may contain these properties byhaving a permanent surface portion that is part of the mat that servesthe previously described function, but the same effect can also beachieved with an attachable part, thus giving the user the flexibilityto upgrade a more basic mat that lacks this feature. And, it may bedisconnected from a mat when the user no longer needs or wants it.

As described, the number of holes is limited only by the size of thesurface attachment and the diameter of the holes. Thus the number ofholes may be from one larger hole to hundreds or even thousands ofsmaller holes. The user may insert buttons through any subset of theholes in any pattern they desire. The buttons themselves may be made ofdifferent lengths and levels of firmness. The buttons may be soft orhard or any level between. The holes may vary in size on the sameattachment and the buttons may vary in size as well. The user is thenable to adjust and fine-tune the foot stimulation or massage effectunderfoot by customizing the button mapping underfoot and in a mannerthat feels best to them.

The mat attachment may be located anywhere on the board surface. As oneexample, a board or mat may contain two attachments located at the shortends of a mat (at the ends of the major axis), so that a user may standon a flat, smooth surface while working, and then periodically, shifttheir stance and feet such that they stand on the buttons to massage andstimulate their feet, or to drive their legs downward to initiate arocking action while receiving a massage action underfoot. And becauseof the continuous adjustability, the user may adjust the terrain of thebuttons to match the user's feet in a manner that is both comfortableand more beneficial. The result is a device that succeeds ininvigorating the standing user, which in turn, helps them to maintain anenergized level even during tedious work. Another example is where theattachment covers the entire top surface, even to the point where theholes extend along the edge of the mat such that the buttons also pointoutward, away from the user, and not just upward, from the top surface.The user may then take advantage of the compressible edge, so that whenan edge is compressed, the buttons are engaged and reoriented but stillmassaging or otherwise engaging with the user's feet. This effect occurswhether the user's foot is located at the compressed edge while stillremaining entirely on the mat; or, where a portion of the user's foot isin contact with the ground surface.

7.7. Curved Surface Platform

Disclosed is a curved surface platform that expands the response optionsand provides dynamic variability for a user. The inflated versions ofthe curved surface mat may be up to 39 inches in length; however, thelarger size fits under fewer desks than the other versions disclosed inthese specifications. Pre-curving the device surface, such as shown inFIG. 30 (comprising FIGS. 30A-30H) and FIG. 31 (comprising FIGS.31A-31E), as part of its construction is advantageous in enhancing therocking function of the device. And a user's weight (in the rangesdisclosed) tends to flatten to some degree the platform such that itfeels flat underfoot when standing, such as shown in FIG. 30D. Forexample, as shown in FIG. 30G-30H, a user may stand with their feet morecentrally positioned on the platform. In this stance, the user isstanding “flat” on the mat and the floor surface beneath, while theexternal edges at the farthest locations continue to curve up off of thefloor surface. The user may then widen their stance and compress ordirect the upturned ends towards the floor surface, such as is shown inFIG. 31D. The user is able to initiate a rocking motion side to side,which permits them to flatten one end against the floor surface, whilethe opposing end more easily lifts off of the floor surface. The rockingmotion provides the additional benefits disclosed; utilizing a curvedsurface platform makes the desired effect easier to achieve for thestanding user.

In another version, one of the disclosed mats may be affixed on top of arigid rocking surface such as a balance board that affords a large rangeof rocking motion. For example, see FIGS. 42E-42F and 42I-42J. Theaddition of a cushioned mat on top of a balance board allows for one'schanging motion and force input to the balance board to be dampened.This allows beginners or those with lesser balancing abilities to moresuccessfully and more easily utilize the resulting balance board when sofashioned with a top surface mat. Such top surface mats provide a shockabsorber to absorb some of the energy when a user hits the hard limitsof tilt that such balance boards afford as well as to dampen the inputas one applies changing forces. Another way is to couple curvedattachments at the perimeter of the mat at one or more locations toassist in initiating a rocking action by the user stepping on the curvedattachment, or utilizing the curved attachment to extend a rockingsurface when foot pressure is applied on the mat near the curvedattachment. Thus, a substantially flat mat (aside from the curved edgeand perimeter) may have an enhanced curvature added by the curvedattachment when desired; either on the bottom surface or on the mat edgeperimeter. As disclosed, each of the disclosed devices creates a hybridapparatus that is able to provide the benefits of an anti-fatigue matconcurrently while providing more dedicated exercise methods andbenefits with the same device.

7.8. Rocking, Noise, and Temperature Control

At some or all times, a user may not desire the rockability feature. Inthose cases, an add-on edge (e.g., non-compliant base 916) may beemployed to prevent the mat from rocking in the manner disclosed. Oneway to achieve this is to have an attachable edge, base, or frame, orunattached substructure, base, or frame (e.g., non-compliant base 916 orbase 917), following the entire external perimeter of the mat, such thatthe mat is almost entirely within the add-on. Another way is to addattachable clips (e.g., clips 1902) of size small to larger sizes thatare set equidistantly around the perimeter of the mat. This solutionrequires far less additional material to achieve the same result where alimited number, 3 or more clips or feet or rocking blockers are attachedto the mat to prevent tipping and rocking. They may be fabricated of anynumber of materials, plastic, rubber, fabric, wood, fiberglass, carbonfiber, etc.; and may be of any desired width.

In some embodiments, a thin fabric layer made of cotton, polyester,linen, paper, silk, or other similar material may be added or affixed tothe bottom surface to keep the bottom surface out of direct contact withthe floor. This has the advantageous benefit of allowing the board torock without producing significant noises. Some bottom surfaces, such asPVC based materials, produce a squeaking noise when rocked by a userupon a hard ground surface such as wood, cement, linoleum, or other hardfloor surface. Such noises are greatly reduced when the devices arerocked upon a soft ground surface such as carpeting, or other soft floorsurface. Therefore, to avoid such noises that may prove distracting andbothersome to users, a thin fabric may be affixed (e.g., glued,buttoned, hooked, looped, Velcroed®, magnetically held, elasticallyheld, static cling, capillary action, etc.) to the bottom surface toavoid noise when the device is rocked. Alternatively, a skirt or cosy offabric may be added that contains an elastic band that expandssufficiently to place the device inside and once inside, completelycovers the bottom and sides of device with the elastic portion onlycovering top perimeter at the near edge area and surrounding edge suchthat the skirt is held in place. Such a skirt may be added and/orremoved as desired by a user. Such a skirt may also be affixed toattachment points such as by hooks, rings, loops, buttons, magnets, drawstring(s), slip cover, etc.

Such a skirt or cosy may also cover the top surface to provide aninsulating advantage. Some disclosed devices exhibit a heat sink likeeffect on a user's feet due to a device having either significantthermal conductivity or thermal mass relative to a user's feet. Bycovering the top surface with an insulating material, a user's feet areadvantageously isolated from the heat sink effect by a layer of lowthermal conductivity, and thus a user does not experience cold feet dueto the device whisking away heat from their feet. Any layer of lowthermal conductivity material may be utilized to provide this advantage.Alternatively, the device may include a resistive heating element and/orpre-heated high thermal mass material layer to maintain the devicetemperature to one that is comfortable for the user. The heatingelement, when electrically powered, may be integrated into any deviceaccessory grounding mechanism (e.g., cable 4902 and plug 4903 or clamp4905). The heating element may be located on the mat top, bottom, and/orside surface, may be attachable, detachable, embedded, and/or integratedwith the device. The pre-heated high thermal mass material layer may becomposed of shredded or granulated or fluid material that conforms tothe user's feet, such as rice, buckwheat, liquid, plastic or rubberpellets, sand, etc. Such a non, semi, or compressive granulated layerthat it is highly conforming to the details of a user's foot shape(e.g., conforming to the individual toes) and when placed on top of asmooth, lesser conforming, spring constant layer mat is an innovativecombination that provides a very supportive and detailed conformingsurface for feet.

8. Beneficial Applications of Devices

8.1. Exercise

Also disclosed, is a standing mat that may also be utilized forexercises during breaks from work or in other environments. Workers haveoften exercised at work by having resistance devices near theirworkspace and by creatively placing treadmills, bicycles and othervarious devices designed specifically for exercise in order to improvefitness and productivity. Such devices are cumbersome and can be heavy,especially if weights and the like are placed near the workspace. Suchitems can be a hazard as they are heavy and can drop, risking injury ifthey strike a person. The disclosed devices, with their cushioned andmore responsive rebounding characteristics enable plyometric exercisesand calisthenics to be performed with greater convenience and safety.The softer, resilient, trampoline type surface of the mat, coupled withits light weight, permits its inclusion in the workplace as an aid toexercise, but at the same time minimizing dangerous or cumbersomeinterference with the primary purpose which is work productivity. And,when exercises have been completed, the mat is immediately restored to asupportive and productive anti-fatigue mat.

Additionally, a worker may perform many movements on the mat that areminimal so as not to disrupt their work concentration. For example, aspreviously described, the user may rock the device to slightly increasetheir heart rate, and improve circulation and blood flow, but withoutthe excessive distraction (cognitive load) that can be caused by otherdedicated exercise devices, such as can occur with treadmills, balancedevices such as Indo Boards® and the like, which are more reactive andtherefore more distractive (impose a larger cognitive load) to a workerat task. Movement on the device is permitted along a continuum ofstillness, to slight movement and rocking and foot adjusting, on up tothe point where a user takes a break from their work tasks and uses sucha platform as a dedicated exercise platform. As a dedicated exerciseplatform, they may perform various plyometric and callisthenicexercises; with, or conjunction with additional exercise devices, suchas elastic bands, weights, bars, poles, and medicine type balls. Theseare just examples of a much longer list of other exercise items that maybe used with the disclosed devices. However, a great benefit is thatwhile the mat is an outstanding platform for numerous exercise options,it is minimally disruptive to the work environment; and is immediatelyoperative to being rededicated as a superior anti-fatigue mat.

The disclosed devices may be calibrated to account for the weight of theperson utilizing them as an exercise device by adjusting such a device'srebounding resilience or bounciness characteristics such as by theadjustment mechanism. By these adjustments, a user may advantageouslyadapt the feel of the exercise platform to match their desired feel. Aheavier person may desire a firmer feel such as by tightening tensioners2603 or inflating with valves 2802 or 2806 to a higher pressure. Aperson may desire to adjust the feel depending upon the particularexercises they are performing. For example, when doing planks, the usermay position their hands along the collapsing edge and may desire toadjust the mat such as to prevent their hands from bottoming out on thefloor. Alternatively, a user may wish to adjust the firmness of the matto achieve a level of stability or instability that is advantageous fortheir exercise needs. A person may also choose to adjust the portion ofthe mat upon which they place their feet, hands, or other body part thatis supporting their weight so as to achieve the desired cushioning,stability, instability, etc. For example, a user may do one plankexercise with their elbows situated nearer to the center of the mat,which provides a firmer feel. The user may then follow this with adifferent exercise where they place their fists closer to the perimeterof the mat to achieve a softer feel that is less stable. A softer, lessstable perimeter feel is afforded by the transitioning force required todeflect the mat surface as the perimeter of the mat is approached.

Additionally, a user may perform other calisthenics in a more uniquemanner utilizing the disclosed devices. For example, pushups may beperformed with the hands gripping at or near the collapsing edge tocreate different balance and resistance features unique to thisplatform. A user may increase or decrease pressure from hand to handinto to the inflated version's surface, and alter the tension byadjustment for their weight and strength; and may alter their handpositions at the edges or towards the center of the device. Also, a usermay “pump” or push vigorously with one or both hands to stimulate theirmuscles and balance in different ways that are unique to the discloseddevices. A softer setting level (lower compression secant modulus)results in a less firm and less stable medium that is easier to pressinto with one's hands during a push up. Thus, one may take advantage ofthe variable surface tension that is adjustable for users with differentabilities, conditions or needs; or to make the exercises more difficultor easier by adjusting the surface tension. Another example is to applythese same principles to a user's foot stance, when doing macromovements like squats, with their feet partially on the mat andpartially over the conforming edges toward the floor surface. Otherexercises are also available that are more unique to the discloseddevices due to their disclosed properties.

Disclosed is an exercise method utilizing any of the disclosedair-spring mats that possess: a curved perimeter at one or more of theends or sides in a line that most advantageously deviates fromstraightness in a smooth, continuous fashion; comprising generally twoshort ends or sides (at the ends of the major axis) and two long ends orsides (at the ends of the minor axis) with a total maximum long endlength of less than 39 inches; and a collapsing and conforming curvededge that arcs from a point near the edge of the bottom surface plane incontact with a ground surface to a point near the edge of the topsurface plane, that contacts a user. The disclosed mat permits themovement dynamics to be adjustable for any weight user by increasing ordecreasing inflation pressure of the air spring.

The curved perimeter in concert with a curved edge provides benefitsthat standard mats do not. The disclosed mat moves and compresses as theuser places force on it, especially at the edges as well as tilts upwardat the non-pressured sides when sufficient force is applied by the useron or near the edge perimeter. The user is able to pivot (tilt) the matupward and downward multiple times in a pleasing and unique manner,which elongates the calves to stretch them, and stimulates the legmuscles and benefits posture. The feet may be placed where the heels areat or near any part of the edge along the curved perimeter portion ofthe mat. When the user presses their heels downward, the air spring edgecollapses, and the mat more readily tilts upward away from the heels incontrast to typical rectangular or square shapes. The curved perimeterof the mat aids in the tilt in a significant manner. The user may alsouse their forefeet to press on the edge (as if standing on their toes),which tilts the mat from the back. The user may bend and flex theirknees to varying degrees to increase the resistance and to exercisetheir balance and coordination. In designs that utilize rocking bottomsurfaces or enhance curve edges or attachments that increase the mat'sreadiness to rock, the described curved edge and perimeter of the matenhance its rocking ability.

The curved perimeter and curved edge of the mat reduces the surface areaagainst which the pressure is being applied, which then helps initiate atilt more easily; and permits the tilt to be manually maintained by theuser's fine motor adjustments of their leg muscles. The more easilytilted mat also provides consistent visual cues to the user, whichprovides reliable feedback to the user as to the effort and controlbeing applied. When a downward force is applied closer to the edge bandof the mat, the vertical components to the tension force cancel out.Closer to the edge band of the mat the surface tension force does notact in a direction as to oppose the downward force. Instead, the edgesurface is oriented in line with the downward force, which causes thematerial under the force at the edges to buckle easily. A standardsquare cornered mat does not perform such movements nearly as well. Ifthe rectangular mat is air filled, then applied pressure of feet in onearea, fails to relieve the air pressure at the near corners on eitherside of the feet. The corners do not buckle and instead remainpressurized. This in turn causes signification resistance to the mattilting due to the interference of the more pronounced and pressurizedcorners. With the disclosed mat, the pressure from the feet is directeddownward onto a smaller surface area than with a rectangular or straitedge mat, which in turn, permits the mat to tilt more readily. There areno pronounced corners along the curved perimeter capable of increasingin pressure on its perimeter to resist edge rotation and tilt. This, inturn, provides less force and requires less energy to begin and sustainthe mat tilt.

It has been found that when standing for a long period of time, posturecan get poor and then such posture is maintained during a long standingtime segment before the user sits. According to information in anadvisory by the U.S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and HealthAdministration, SHIB 03-24-2004, updated 2011, Safety and HealthInformation Bulletins: Suspension Trauma/Orthostatic Intoleranceavailable at https://www.osha.gov/dts/shib/shib032404.html, excessivestanding in a static position can result in Orthostatic Intolerance insusceptible individuals. Orthostatic Intolerance is improper blood flowcausing people to get light headed or even faint. An example is soldiersfainting while at attention because they stay too long in a fixed bodyposition. Changing postural positions regularly helps offset suchnegative effects. The described edge and perimeter curvature of thedisclosed mat permits the user to initiate helpful posture changes whilestanding. When a user is standing on their feet and stuck in extensionall day it can tend to put them in an anterior tilt (where they'rebending forward at the waist with their buttocks pointing outward). Poorposture stances are alleviated by engaging the anterior core andactivating the gluteus muscles to put oneself into a more posteriorpelvic tilt (where the buttocks is directed forward). This posturechange and action is more easily accomplished with the disclosed devicebecause the ready tilting action of the device moves the body morequickly and easily from anterior tilt, to a more neutral tilt, and thenon through to a posterior pelvic tilt. The smoother transitions resultin improved overall posture, and lengthen the time a user may workcomfortably in the standing position.

Different users may stand in a static or fixed position differently; forexample, one user may habitually stay in a constant posterior tilt,where another user habitually locks up in a different tilt. In suchcases, the described benefits remain because the user may move and tiltthe mat, which alters their stance and alleviates an excessively staticstance and position regardless of how they maintain their static stancewhile standing. Exercises unique to the disclosed curved edge and curvedperimeter mat that benefit posture and balance are possible anddisclosed.

Having a variable curved perimeter or curved edge provides a range ofvarying edge compression moduli that vary with the average radius ofperimeter curvature and/or edge curvature in the area where a userplaces their feet. Areas with greater average perimeter or edge radiusof curvature have a greater edge compression modulus than areas with alesser average perimeter or edge radius of curvature. Unique exercisesand stimulation movements are thus possible with the multi-curved (edgeand perimeter) mat that utilizes the range of available average edgecompression modulus under a user's feet.

Many exercises are available that take advantage of the uniqueproperties of the disclosed air spring device. As previously described,exercise methods utilizing the unique structure and characteristics ofthe disclosed mat that possesses both a curved perimeter and a curvededge are possible. Disclosed is a method of exercise on a air springtrampoline-like mat with a total maximum length in one direction (e.g.,along a major axis) of less than 39 inches, having generally two shortends or sides (e.g., sides 6011 in FIG. 60D) and two long ends or sides(e.g., front edge 6008 and rear edge 6009 in FIG. 60D), a top surfaceplane for standing and movement, a bottom surface plane for contact witha ground surface, and a collapsing and conforming curved edge that arcsfrom a point near the edge of the bottom surface plane to a point nearthe edge of the top surface plane along the perimeter of the mat. Themat also has a curved perimeter at one or more of the ends or sides in aline that deviates from straightness in a smooth, continuous fashion.The disclosed mat permits the movement dynamics to be adjustable for anyweight user by increasing or decreasing inflation pressure of the airspring.

The curved perimeter in concert with a curved edge provides movementbenefits that standard mats do not. For example, in a toe grip exercisewhere the user compresses and flexes their toes at the collapsibleconforming near-edge of the mat. The toes and forefoot depress thecompressible edge, which provides increased stimulation underfoot. Thecurvature of the perimeter along with the curvature of the edge helpsbetter facilitate the ability to engage the toes.

Another discrete exercise is to perform a “forward mat tilt up” withboth toes towards the middle portion and heels near the edge of a longside of the mat. The user applies pressure at their heels at the rearedge of the mat. It has been found that the stretching action for thecalves is greater and improved with this exercise. Because the boardtilts (in this case) up towards the user, the surface of the mat hoversbeneath the user's feet, with the surface parallel to the bottoms of theuser's feet. The board's tilt position provides a visual cue or feedbackto the user, which helps them hold the stretch position for a longerperiod of time.

Another movement is a “rear mat tilt” with both forefeet at a near-edgeof the mat on the forward (facing work area) long side. Pressure isexerted down through the forefoot. The forward action of the foottowards the floor surface serves to tilt the mat such that the portionbehind the compressed area elevates. This action is unique to the devicebecause of both its perimeter curvature and because of the verticalcurvature of the edge of the mat.

Another movement is where the user stands on their toes and lightlybounces. The user may hold another surface with their hands foradditional balance support. The user may flex their knees or dip in asquatting motion to any degree desired in order to increase difficultyor change the feel and balance of the exercise.

Another exercise is to turn the mat a quarter turn (90 degrees) so thata short side faces forward in the same direction the user is facing (orperpendicular to the work area to which the user is facing). It shouldbe noted that symmetrical devices do not technically have a front or aback, but such terms are used when a standing person is using thedevice. One may perform a forward mat tilt up with both forefeet towardsthe center of the surface, heels at furthermost end edge. The userapplies pressure downward through the heel. The edge collapses while thecurvature minimizes counter force against the downward action (due tothe reduction of defined corner resistance), resulting in the mattilting upward away from the pressure zone with the elevation maximizedat the far end of the board from the heels. A rocking action may beapplied as well, and is more easily performed due to the curvature ofthe generally vertically oriented edge coupled with the curvature of theperimeter edge. Both in combination provide a unique movement andexercise. The muscles of the legs, glutes and tendons in the ankle andfoot area are simultaneously engaged and stimulated in a manner notpossible with devices lacking the combined curvatures of the discloseddevice.

Another exercise is that, instead of feet together, a user may alter thestance of their feet such that one foot is extended in front of the userand the other foot is extended to the rear of the user. The edgecurvature and perimeter curvature decrease the resistance to the tiltingactions previously described for other exercise movements. This movementmay be performed with a forward mat tilt up with right leg forward onlong side; or a forward mat tilt up with left leg forward on long side;or a forward mat tilt up on short side with both legs. Or, the user mayperform a rear mat tilt up with both forefeet on mat surface and rearfeet off of mat at rear long side edge. As well as a rear mat tilt withboth forefeet on the forward edge of the short side. By compressing theedge with the forefeet, the rear portion of the mat tilts up toward theuser.

It should be apparent that other foot stances and heel/toe variationsmay be employed on the mat which varies the balance and feel of thedevice underfoot to the benefit of the user in being able to stand forlonger periods of time in comfort. Other exercises are also possiblethat do not involve standing. One variation is to perform similarexercises in a kneeled position. The air spring is extremely comfortableto kneel upon, and coupled with the curved edge and curved perimeter,permits similar benefits previously described for a standing user, butinstead the knees are engaged downward to initiate mat tilt, and to moresignificantly alter the user's position. Other exercises may be utilizedto take advantage of the boards unique properties. For example, planksmay be performed in greater comfort than when performed on a surfaceharder than the disclosed curved edge and perimeter air spring.

Planks are an exercise form already discussed, but some additional plankexercises for the disclosed device may also be utilized. A user mayplace their elbows towards the near side (rear orientation) of the matsuch that the forward long side tilts up when the elbows press downwardnear the edge portion of a curved portion of the edge perimeter. Thelevel of tilt is dependent on the inflation tension setting that a userdeems most appropriate for their skill level, size and weight, whetherthe force is focused at the elbows, or spread across the forearms whenholding the plank position. The disclosed devices permit a greateramount of elbow pressure downward as a result of their cushioning. Thedisclosed devices permit increased elbow pressure by the user due to thecushioned surface than possible when performing regular planks on a morerigid floor surface, even a carpet or typical mat padding in a gym,while still permitting a tilt of the entire mat. One may performmovements where the elbow pressure is adjusted to hold the plank whilecontrolling the mat to pop up and down in sets. For example, one mayexert pressure on elbow to tilt mat upward from floor surface 15 x for 2sets, etc. It should be noted that this technique applies for standingexercises at edge.

Another significant stimulation movement for a standing user is theability of the disclosed board's ability to rock side to side morereadily. The rocking of the board is discussed in these specificationsin more detail, but exercise methods are able to be adapted to takeadvantage of these benefits. Other exercises may include:

(1) Rocking side to side at short ends of the mat; knee bend can changeto alter difficulty and feel.

(2) Rocking front to back at long side of the mat with the user rotated90 degrees relative to the mat (e.g., like the rotated 90 degree user inFIG. 3 and FIG. 57B); knee bend can change to alter difficulty and feel.

(3) Rocking front to back at long side of the mat with either right legforward and left leg back or with left leg forward and right leg back;pressure applied at balls of the feet. Knee bend can change to alterdifficulty and feel.

As also described elsewhere, exercise bands, cords, springs and the likemay be attached or otherwise coupled to the board and may add to theunique exercise properties of the board. For example, such bands may beadhered to the base surface so that, when compressed by a standing user,remains secure such that the bands may be extended at tension andresistance without slipping out from under the mat. Additionally,connection or attachment points may be placed along the curved verticaledge of the mat at one or more locations. After a band (or cord orspring member) is so connected, a user may grasp a portion of the bandwith their hands, and extend the band to create resistance. At thispoint, the advantages of the tipping board due to its curved perimeterand curved edge are initiated. FIGS. 33A-33D show how a connected bandunder tension by a user affects the board by turning it up at theconnection points. In the exercises described here, one may see asimilar response where a user utilizes one of the previous standingmovements with a resistance band. The board tilts, the bands addresistance but that resistance is more smooth and more extended so thatthe movement is smoother to the user during the resistance phase of themovement. The curved edge and perimeter collapse from the foot pressureresponds to the resistance action by the band or bands.

The increased friction afforded by the mat when a loading force isapplied to its surface is beneficial in its use as an exercise platformas well. Between exercises, a user may easily slide the discloseddevices around on the floor by removing themselves from the surface(e.g., stepping off the device or such as when planking, removing one'shands from the surface); once removed such a device's friction isreduced and it may be readily moved with little force being required.Conversely, while performing an exercise, including ones wherein one ofthe disclosed devices is placed against a wall and one's back is placedagainst the device to press against the wall with the device providing acushioning and conforming shape for the back so as to more evenlydistribute the forces across one's back as one leans into the wall, aswell as turning one's torso from side to side; the device's friction isincreased under load and thus tends to remain in place while the loadingexercise (that causes a force to be applied, generally perpendicularly,to the surface in contact with the floor or wall) is being performed.

8.2. Safer Impact for a Falling Person on it

A corollary benefit of the disclosed mats is that they are an extremelyeffective method of preventing injury if one were to inadvertently fallon such a mat. If a user were to trip elsewhere (through no contact withthe mat), the disclosed mat technology is very effective at breakingsuch a fall and greatly reducing the chance of injury. While ancillary,this benefit is by no means minor. According to statistics compiled bythe Center for Disease Control's 2015 released “3^(rd) edition FallPrevention study” available athttp://cdc.gov/homeandrecreationalsafety/pdf/CDC_Falls_Compendium-2015-a.pdf,wherein it states in part that “one-third of people aged 65 and olderfall each year, and those who fall once are two to three times morelikely to fall again.” Additionally, the study found that falls are the“leading cause of both fatal and non-fatal injuries among older adults,”which causes our elderly loved ones loss of independence and ultimatelya “reduced quality of life.” The disclosed mat is an effective fallbreak. Adjacent mats can be linked together in a lattice (e.g.,triangular, rectangular or hexagonal mats that fit together with no gapsbetween them) to provide a stable but effective fall break over a largercontiguous area.

8.3. Surgical/Medical Applications

Also disclosed is an improved anti-fatigue active surface for doctorswhen performing surgery. The benefits disclosed may be applied to manyin the medical professions (e.g., for use by technicians in a medicallab, doctors outside of surgery, compounding pharmacies, radiology, orother sterile room applications). Some surgeries can last an entireworkday, even beyond 12 hours where a surgeon must continue with thesurgery until it is completed, no matter how long it takes. Thedisclosed devices provide an improved platform upon which a physicianmay stand for long periods of time in greater comfort and with improvedalertness, whether in surgery or not. The mat may contain anantimicrobial and/or antibacterial agent or surface. Additionally, ahighly impermeable surface or super hydrophobic surface (e.g., asdescribed by C. Guo and A. Vorobyev in Multifunctional surfaces producedby fetntosecond laser pulses, Journal of Applied Physics on Jan. 20,2015, a summary of which is available athttp://www.rochester.edu/newscenter/superhydrophobic-metals-85592) thatis readily cleaned may also be applied for such uses. The top surface ofthe mat may also be selected to provide adequate friction for usersstanding on the mat wearing either dry or damp surgical booties. The matmay be sized to optimize different medical and surgical uses. The matmay also be secured in some manner (e.g., microsuction tape) to thefloor surface to prevent movement even when unweighted. The surgeon mayselect tapered edges that may also be attached or incorporated in thesespecialized applications. However, as disclosed, a surgeon may select amat that is easily moved about. The firm surface, lightweight andsubstantially rigid structure is well adapted to provide a comfortableand supportive surface for a medical professional. Testing users havereported that they are able to stand comfortably for as much as fourtimes as long or more without the onset of discomforts associated withlengthy standing.

8.4. For High Tech Environments

In high-tech environments (e.g., electronics, microprocessormanufacturing, explosives, and chemical storage industries) where themanagement of the risk of electrostatic discharge around electrostaticsensitive devices is important, the disclosed device 4901 may beequipped with an accessory grounding mechanism (e.g., cable 4902) toprovide a dissipative feature such as shown in FIGS. 49A-49C. This maytake the form of a traditional antistatic mat being affixed to the topsurface 4904 of the disclosed device 4901. Alternatively, the groundingsurface may be in the form of a skirt or cosy that covers the topsurface 4904 and can be held in place similarly to the skirt or cosydisclosed in Section 7.8—Rocking, noise, and temperature control.Grounding surface can also be a semi-rigid or rigid cover that is shapedto securely and snuggly conform and tighten around the perimeter curvededge upon inflation of inflatable embodiments of device 4901.Optionally, an antistatic wrist strap may itself be connected to themat. The grounding of the disclosed mats is done through resistancebetween 10⁵ and 10⁸ ohms between such a mat's surface 4904 and thereference ground plug 4903. In an advantageous embodiment, theresistance across the surface of the mat 4904 to ground is controlled atall points to stay within the range of 4×10⁷ ohms and 9×10⁷ ohms.Grounding may be accomplished by providing a cord 4902 that plugs 4903or connects into the ground of a typical electrical outlet (e.g.,3-pronged or 2-pronged) and connects to the mat through the prescribedresistance. The surface 4904 of the disclosed mats 4901 may also becovered with an anti-static material that inhibits triboelectriccharging (the buildup of charge by rubbing or contact with anothermaterial). For example, Pink Poly (a clear hot pink polyethylene thatmay be formed into a film on the surface of the disclosed devices or athin foam applied to such a surface) is a suitable material to use forthis purpose of avoiding the buildup of a charge such as due to rubbingones foot or shoe on the surface 4904. The surface 4904 may also becovered with a vinyl optimized for its dissipative featurecharacteristics. The surface 4904 may employ multiple layers; a toplayer providing static dissipative characteristics may be layered on topof a highly conductive scrim that is connected with cable 4902 to groundsuch as by clamp 4905. The underside of the mat may also contain astatic-dissipative layer, such as those constructed of foam or vinyl.

Another form of high-tech environment is a clean room that may require asilicone free mat to avoid contamination during assembly processes suchas soldering, adhesive bonding, coating, and wire bonding. Anotherapplication is in the food or metal industries where the mat may becovered with an outer surface (e.g., nitrile rubber) that is resistantagainst heat, oils, alkaline liquids, acids, hot metal shavings, etc.These properties may be additionally integrated with the discloseddissipative anti-static characteristics for industries requiring both.

9. Further Details of Certain Disclosed Embodiments

The above and other objects, effects, features, and advantages of thepresent devices will become more apparent from the following descriptionof the embodiments thereof taken in conjunction with the accompanyingdrawings.

FIGS. 1A-1C show possible alternate shapes for the boards 101. Differentshapes may be used to offer an ideal edge 104 for a user to place theirfeet. FIG. 1A shows an ellipsis-like external perimeter curvature withthe board 101 being symmetrical about horizontal axis 102 and verticalaxis 103. FIG. 1B shows a modified ellipsis-like perimeter with lesscurvature along the corners with the board 101 being symmetrical abouthorizontal axis 102 and vertical axis 103. In each case, these shapeshave been found to be effective in enabling to some degree otherdisclosed features such as disclosed in section 6.2—Differentorientations for foot placement of curved perimeter. FIG. 1C shows a Dshape mat that has a curved perimeter 104 and a straight perimeter 105with the board 101 being asymmetrical about horizontal axis 102 andsymmetrical about vertical axis 103. This shape allows a user toposition their body in different ways. When a person stands with theirfeet further apart, the feet tend to point outward at a greater anglethan when their feet are closer together. The board in FIG. 1C is gentlycurved along the “D” perimeter curvature 104 to accommodate the widerangle of the feet when in a wide stance. If a user desires to have partof their feet on the mat and part off the mat (to increase circulationor to put pressure under the arch for a massaging effect), the D shapeallows for the feet to be at wider angles in a wide stance such that thepart of their foot that is off and on the mat. The D shape may be moreor less gradual, but there continues to be a straight edge on theopposite side. A user may flip the mat around to stand either on thecurved perimeter side or the straight perimeter side. The flat end ofthe D shape permits a more balanced stance in the event a user wishes tostand in that manner. Additional shapes are also possible that conformto the previously described metrics. Some examples are shown in FIGS.60A-60F, later described. Any polygonal shape conforming with thedisclosed metrics is possible though not shown.

FIG. 1D is a top view of a user with feet 106 standing on the board 101of FIG. 1A and positioned symmetrically about horizontal axis 102 andvertical axis 103. The inside edge of the user's left foot 106 is at adistance of L3 from the vertical axis 103. The front edge of the user'sleft foot 106 is at a shortest distance L1 from the front perimeter 108of board 101 and the back edge of the user's foot 106 is at a shortestdistance L2 from the rear perimeter 109 of board 101. The distance L1differs from the distance L2 due to the position of the user's left foot106 relative to the horizontal axis 102. The area in between the twodashed lines is the near edge area 110. In FIG. 1D the feet 106 aretouching the edge of the near edge area 110.

FIG. 1E is a top view of the user with feet 106 standing on the board101 of FIG. 1D with the feet 106 in a stance wider than in FIG. 1D. Theinside edge of the user's left foot 106 is at a greater distance of L6from the vertical axis 103 than the distance L3 in FIG. 1D. The frontedge of the user's left foot 106 is at a lesser shortest distance L4from the front perimeter 108 of board 101 than the distance L1 in FIG.1D and the back edge of the user's foot 106 is at a lesser shortestdistance L5 from the rear perimeter 109 of board 101 than the distanceL2 in FIG. 1D. The distance L4 differs from the distance L5 due to theposition of the user's left foot 106 relative to the horizontal axis102. The feet 106 in FIG. 1E are partially in the near edge area 110.

FIG. 1F is a top view of a user with shorter feet 107 than the feet 106of FIG. 1D. The shorter feet 107 are standing on the board 101 of FIG.1D. The inside edge of the user's left foot 107 is at a greater distanceof L7 from the vertical axis 103 than the distance L3 in FIG. 1D. Thefront edge of the user's left foot 107 is at a shortest distance L1 fromthe front perimeter 108 of board 101 that is equal to the distance L1 inFIG. 1D and the back edge of the user's foot 107 is at a shortestdistance L2 from the rear perimeter 109 of board 101 that is equal tothe distance L2 in FIG. 1D. The distance L1 differs from the distance L2due to the position of the user's left foot 107 relative to thehorizontal axis 102. The feet 106 in FIG. 1F are touching the edge ofthe near edge area 110.

FIG. 2A shows a D shape mat that has a curved perimeter 201 of curvededge and a straight perimeter 202 of curved edge. This shape allows auser 203 to position their body in differently useful ways. FIG. 2Bshows an alternate D shape, where the curved perimeter 201 of curvededge is more gradual, and there is still a straight perimeter 202 ofcurved edge on the opposite side. FIGS. 2C and 2D are upper isometricviews showing how a user 203 may flip the mat around to stand with theirfeet 204 pointing outward, either on the curved side 201 or the straightside 202.

FIG. 3A shows a side view of a user 304 standing with feet 305 orientedstraight out on one end 302 of a standing platform board 301 in thelengthwise orientation. FIG. 3B is a top view and FIG. 3C is an upperisometric view of the user 304 standing with feet 305 oriented straightout on one end 302 of the board 301 in the lengthwise orientation ofFIG. 3A. FIGS. 3D and 3E are top and upper isometric views of the user304 standing with feet 305 pointing in along the curved perimeter on oneend 302 of the board 301 in the lengthwise orientation of FIG. 3B. FIG.3F is a side view of the user 304 standing with feet 305 on the oppositeend 303 of the board 301 shown in the lengthwise orientation of FIG. 3A.FIGS. 3G and 3H are top and upper isometric views of the user 304standing with feet 305 pointing out along the edge on the opposite end303 of the board 301 in the lengthwise orientation of FIG. 3B. FIG. 3Iis a side view of the user 304 standing with their feet 305 orientedstraight ahead on top of the opposite end 303 of the board 301 of FIG.3A. FIGS. 3J and 3K are top and upper isometric views of the user 304standing with their feet 305 oriented straight ahead on top of theopposite end 303 of the board 301 of FIG. 3B. FIG. 3L is a side view ofthe user 304 standing with feet 305 angled out slightly on the middleedges 306 of the board 301 in the lengthwise orientation of FIG. 3A.FIGS. 3M and 3N are top and upper isometric views of the user 304standing with feet 305 angled out slightly on the middle edges 306 ofthe board 301 in the lengthwise orientation of FIG. 3B. The position ofFIGS. 3L-3N allows the user's foot arches to conform along the edge ofthe board. Other shapes may be employed to permit additional flexibilityin how a user may adjust their stance and foot placement.

FIG. 4A shows a user's legs 404 standing on the wider ends 401 of adumbbell shaped (e.g., hippopede like) platform that has two wider ends401 and a narrower center section 402. FIG. 4A is a top view, FIG. 4B isa front view, and FIG. 4C is an upper isometric view showing the user'sfeet 403 each positioned on one of the wide ends 401. This curved andcenter tapered board allows a variety of places for a user to placetheir feet. They may stand in the wide end areas, 401 if they want astandard and stable flat surface. FIG. 4D is a top view, FIG. 4D is afront view, and FIG. 4F is an upper isometric view showing the user withboth feet 403 positioned in the narrow center section 402 of thedumbbell shaped platform of FIG. 4A. The center section 402 is not asstable and deforms more than on the wide ends 401. It is narrow enoughthat the user may rock their feet 403 back and forth and the front andback edges of the narrow section 402 deform and rebound with the user'sfeet 403.

FIG. 5A is a top view and FIG. 5B is an upper isometric view showing auser's legs 502 standing on two separate platforms 501. The separateplatforms 501 permit the user to position their legs 502 in anyorientation they please. FIG. 5C is a top view and FIG. 5D is an upperisometric view showing the platforms 501 of FIG. 5A spread apart andpointed outward. This lets the user position their legs 502 in a widerstance. FIG. 5E is a top view and FIG. 5F is an upper isometric viewshowing the platforms 501 of FIG. 5A brought together and pointed in.This setup allows the user to position their legs 502 close together.FIG. 5G is a top view and FIG. 5H is an upper isometric view showing theplatforms 501 of FIG. 5A offset front and back which allows the user toplace one foot in front of the other. FIG. 5I shows different separatepads 503 which have Velcro® type fasteners 504 on the inside edges.Alternatively, microsuction tape may be used instead of Velcro®fasteners 504. This allows the two coupling standing platform pieces 503to be separated and also attached, depending on the position the userwants. FIG. 5I is a top view and FIG. 5J is an upper isometric viewshowing the pads 503 separated and the user standing with their legs 502apart. FIG. 5K is a top view and FIG. 5L is an upper isometric viewshowing the pads 503 of FIG. 5I attached, and the user standing withtheir legs 502 closer together and facing forwards. Varying standingposition throughout the day is beneficial for the user, and the separatepads 501 and 503 permit many different positions.

FIG. 6A shows a front exploded view of a flat inflatable standingplatform 601 and a rigid curved arched plate 602 with a convexly curvedarched upper surface and a flat lower surface. The rigid arched plate602 is an accessory that helps align the feet and ankles of a user whotends to over pronate. FIG. 6B shows a front view of the standingplatform 601 resting on the rigid arched plate 602 of FIG. 6A. As seen,the platform 601 bottom surface curves to conform to the upper arch ofthe plate 602, this results in a similar curvature at the top surface ofthe platform 601. The platform may be attached in a variety of waysincluding Velcro® type fasteners, magnets, adhesive, clips that attachto the ends of the board, and fasteners that are attached to the board.FIG. 6C is a front view showing that when a user 603 stands on thecurved top surface of the standing platform 601 attached to the rigidcurved arch 602 of FIG. 6B it compensates for the user's foot pronationand aligns their feet more properly. FIG. 6D is a side view of a user603 standing on a flat inflatable platform 601 attached to a rigidconvexly curved arch 602. FIG. 6E is a front view of the rigid convexlycurved arch 602 of FIG. 6D. FIG. 6F is a side view of the rigid convexlycurved arch 602 of FIG. 6D. FIG. 6G is a front view of a flat inflatableplatform 601 attached to a concave rigid curved arch 604. The concaverigid curved arch 604 is similar to convexly curved arch 602 of FIG. 6D,but it has a concavely curved upper surface, which can be utilized torespond to those users whose feet over supinate. Supination (orunderpronation) is the insufficient inward roll of the foot afterlanding. This places extra stress on the foot and can result in knee,plantar fasciitis, and Achilles damage and injury. The disclosed devicemay be configured to alleviate the effects of over supination as well.The arched plate 602 may also be semi-rigid so long as it similarlyelevates the mat in the manner described.

FIG. 7A shows a mildly convexly curved domed platform. The platform base701 has a mildly convexly curved surface top 702. FIG. 7B shows a frontview of the platform base 701 of FIG. 7A with a user 705 with mildlypronated feet 706 adjusted out by the mildly convexly curved surface top702 (i.e., nearly flat, e.g., with a maximum height less than 130% ofthe height at the edge band). When the user stands on and applies weightto the platform 701, the surface top 702 deforms slightly and results inproperly aligned feet 706. For some users, if there is no curved surface(i.e., the surface of platform base is flat), the feet 706 may tend toover pronate or over supinate which disrupts proper body posture. FIG.7C shows a front view of a platform base 701 with a moderately convexlycurved surface 703 (i.e., less close to flat, e.g., with a maximumheight between 130% and 160% of the height at the edge band). FIG. 7Dshows a front view of the platform base 701 of FIG. 7C with a user 705with moderately pronated feet 706 standing on the platform surface 703.FIG. 7E shows a front view of a platform base 701 with a stronglyconvexly curved surface 704 (i.e., least close to flat, e.g., with amaximum height greater than 160% of the height at the edge band). FIG.7F shows a front view of the platform base 701 of FIG. 7E with a user705 with strongly pronated feet 706 standing on the platform surface704. The amount of surface curvature, including whether it is convex orconcave, may be optimized for different users 705 and different padfirmnesses. The user's weight and feet play a part in determining thecorrect surface curvature. A soft pad requires a larger surfacecurvature to end up in the neutral position when weight is applied. FIG.7G is side view of a standing platform 701 with a concave surface top.FIG. 7H is a cross-section view along line H of the standing platform701 of FIG. 7G with a concave surface top 707. When the user 705 of FIG.7F stands on the concave surface top 707 of FIG. 7H, the user's feet 706of FIG. 7F tilt in the opposite direction from the convex surface tops702 of FIG. 7B, 703 of FIG. 7D, and 704 of FIG. 7F to correct the oversupination of the feet.

FIG. 8A is a side view of a user standing on a standing platform 801with their feet 803 angled off the front conforming and collapsible edge805 of the board. The ground 804 supports the toes of the feet 803. FIG.8B is an upper isometric view showing the feet 803 off the frontconforming collapsible edge 805 of the standing platform 801. FIG. 8C isa side view of a user standing on a standing platform 801 with theirfeet 803 angled up onto the rear conforming and collapsible edge 806 ofthe board. The ground 804 supports the heel of the foot. FIG. 8D is anupper isometric view showing the feet 803 tilting up onto the backconforming collapsible edge 806. Being able to stretch on both sides ofthe board allows the user to stretch different parts of their legs 802all while facing forward at their desk.

FIGS. 8E and 8F are respectively a side and an upper isometric view of auser stretching their legs 802 with their feet 803 pointed down off thefront of a standing platform 801 while balancing the standing platform801 on its front side rocking region 809 that contains the center of acollapsed flat section of length L1 and lifting the rear edge 806 offthe ground 804. The front side rocking region 809 compresses in responseto the downward force of the user's feet 803 which smoothes thetransition to the curved edge by increasing the effective rockingregion. FIGS. 8G and 8H are respectively a side and an upper isometricview of a user stretching their legs 802 with their feet 803 pointed upon the back of a standing platform 801 while balancing the standingplatform 801 on its rear side rocking region 810 that contains thecenter of a collapsed flat section of length L2 and lifting the frontedge 805 off the ground 804. The rear side rocking region 810 compressesin response to the downward force of the user's feet 803 which smoothesthe transition to the curved edge by increasing the effective rockingregion.

FIG. 8I is a front view of a user straddling a standing platform 801with their legs 802 and feet 803 apart and rocking the standing platform801 up onto the user's right side rocking region 807 that contains thecenter of a collapsed flat section of length L3 and lifting the user'sleft side rocking region 808 off the ground 804. While not shown hereand elsewhere, the feet 803 also compress into the top surface ofplatform 801. The user's right side rocking region 807 compresses inresponse to the downward force of the user's right foot 803 whichsmoothes the transition to the curved edge by increasing the effectiverocking region. FIG. 8J is a front view of a user straddling a standingplatform 801 with their legs 802 and feet 803 apart and rocking thestanding platform 801 up onto the user's left side rocking region 808that contains the center of a collapsed flat section of length L4 andlifting the user's right side rocking region 807 off the ground 804.

FIGS. 9A-9H show a standing platform 901 with a rockable base 902attached. FIG. 9A is a side view of a standing platform 901 with arockable base 902 with variable rigidity and flexibility that is on afloor 903. FIG. 9B is a front cross-section view along line B showinghow the standing platform 901 fits into the rockable base 902. Therockable base 902 is a relatively rigid material of sufficient rigidityto permit a rocking motion (e.g., the base should be at least as rigidas the board, having a bending rigidity of at least 11 lb×in⁻¹ and aflexural rigidity of at least 4,000 lb×in²). The base 902 contacts thefloor 903 at two lines of contact 904 and 905 on opposite sides of thebase 902. Platform 901 has minimal surface area touching between linesof contact 904 and 905 and the floor 903. In applications where floor903 may be wet or covered with any liquids, such as near a swimmingpool, this design provides a reduced slip hazard by lines of contact 904and 905 pushing away water with little resistance due to the adjacentempty volumes beneath the board into which the lines of contact 904 and905 push and/or displace water or other liquids. The rockable base 902has two rocking regions: a right rocking region 926 that begins at lineof contact 904 and extends outward and a left rocking region 927 thatbegins at opposite line of contact 905 and extends outward. The rockingbase 902 is sized such that the outer perimeter is substantiallycoextensive with the outer lower perimeter of the platform 901. Thelines of contact 904 and 905 extend in a vertical direction (when thebase is horizontal) and the base 902 tapers thinner away from the linesof contact 904 and 905 toward the perimeter of the base 902 to provide arocking region. The rigidity may be variable by utilizing differentmaterials such as foams, fillers, plastics, woods, fiberglass, carbonfiber, metal, aramid fibers and the like, or other woven and non-wovenmaterials, or even bamboo, just to name a few.

The rocking region may be softer or firmer, or portions of the rockinglevel may be made of multiple shore durometers, firmnesses, and/orrigidities. For example, the external ends may be fabricated of softerresilient material, while the more central area is more rigid foradditional support. The central area can also be made flexible such thatthe board bends some amount when a user stands on it. With a bendingboard, the location of the two contact points 904 and 905 change thebending characteristics of the board. Changing how far apart they arespaced makes the board either bend more or less, and this can be tunedto compensate for a user with misaligned joints. The two contact points904 and 905 contact the floor 903. FIG. 9C is a front view and FIG. 9Dis an upper isometric view showing the user standing with their legs 906positioned above the contact points so the platform 901 is balanced andlevel. FIG. 9E is a front view and FIG. 9F is an upper isometric viewshowing the user with their weight shifted to the user's left of thecontact point 905. This causes the platform 901 to rotate up along therocking region, causing a rocking action. FIG. 9G is a front view andFIG. 9H is an upper isometric view showing the user with their weightshifted to the user's right, on the outside of the contact point 904.This causes the platform 901 to tilt upward on the opposite side'srocking region. The user is thus able to rock back and forth by shiftingtheir weight, which provides an opportunity for them to move instead ofstanding statically. The platform is sufficiently stable such that itremains relatively non-moving when rocking is not desired or initiated.

There are many types of surface curves suitable for sloped tilting orrocking. FIGS. 9I-9K show a board 907 that has a revolved catenary curvesurface base 908, providing a rocking region all along the bottomsurface of the board 907. The base 908 may be constructed of eitherrigid or semi-rigid material and is rigid enough to facilitate a rockingmotion. The revolved catenary curvature is advantageous because itfacilitates, for a non-circular board perimeter, greater tilt in aside-to-side direction than in a front-to-back direction. FIG. 9I is atop view of a standing platform 907 with a catenary rigid or semi-rigidrocking base. FIG. 9J is a side cross-section view along line J of thestanding platform 907 of FIG. 9I showing the catenary curve surface base908. FIG. 9K is a front cross-section view along line K of the standingplatform 907 of FIG. 9I with the catenary curve surface base 908 andshows that the lengthwise sloped tilting height HL allows the user torock the board lengthwise higher than they can with the lesser widthwisesloped tilting height HW shown in FIG. 9J. FIG. 9K also shows thecatenary curve surface base 908 gets thin towards the ends of the board.The thickness of the surface base 908 can be designed so it taperstowards the ends, which permits some amount of flex and movement. Theright amount of flexibility allows engaging movement while stillproviding enough rigidity to rock the board back and forth. FIG. 9Kshows the platform 907 sitting in the rocking base 908. A friction fitis one way to attach the two, but other more secure ways may beemployed. One example is to put both the platform 907 and the base 908into a skin that has some means of opening such as a zipper, Velcro®, orother method. When the board 907 is inflated, it tensions the skin, andthen the board 907 and base 908 are firmly connected. Skins can be usedto contain boards and bases of any size or shape including round ones.When the board 907 is an embodiment with a compressible material (e.g.,an inflatable or foam material), it desensitizes the rocking feeling ofthe rigid base 908. This is advantageous for providing a smoother andeasier to control rocking feeling.

FIGS. 9L-9P show a board with a flat center surface base 910 that has anelliptical curve 911 along the perimeter as the bottom surfacetransitions to the edge (i.e., a cross-sectional profile taken at anypoint around the board perimeter exhibits an elliptical curve along thebottom of the board with a constant semi-major axis of length L). Thebase 910 may be constructed of either rigid or semi-rigid material andis rigid enough to facilitate a rocking motion. FIG. 9L shows a top viewof a standing platform 909 with an elliptical edge rigid or semi-rigidrocking base and base edges 926. FIG. 9M is a side cross-section viewalong line M of the standing platform 909 of FIG. 9L showing base 910,edge curve 911, and base edges 926. As seen in FIG. 9N, a bottom view ofthe standing platform edge curve 911 of base 910 of FIG. 9L, the lengthL of the curve 911 is constant all along the board perimeter. Thisprovides a consistent sloped tilting feel in all directions. The flatcenter section 910 provides a stable base surface, so the user onlytilts the board when the user intends it. FIG. 9O is a frontcross-section view along line O of the standing platform 909 of FIG. 9Lshowing base 910, edge curve 911, and base edges 926. FIG. 9P is a frontcross-section view showing further details of the region within the areaP of the standing platform 909 of FIG. 9O and shows a close-up of theelliptical edge curve 911 of length L that forms a rocking region andmay effectively be extended if base 910 is compressible. The edges ofthe base 926 curl up over the edges of the platform 909. This is one wayto attach the base 910 to the platform 909. The uninflated platform isplaced inside the base and then inflated so that it is constrained bythe base edges 926. The base edges 926 are made to be flexible so theybend along with the platform edge when the user steps on them. The baseedges 926 can be made flexible by thinner geometry or by being made outof a different material (either through double shot molding or assembly)that is less stiff than the base 910.

FIGS. 9Q-9T show a board that has a constant height (i.e., HW is equalto HL) elliptical curve base 912, creating a rocking region all alongthe bottom surface of the board. The base 912 may be constructed ofeither rigid or semi-rigid material and is rigid enough to facilitate arocking motion. This means the eccentricity of the ellipse is variableand changes along the edge of the board because the lengthwise (majoraxis) surface curve is flatter than the widthwise (minor axis) surfacecurve. FIG. 9Q is a top view of a standing platform 913 with a variableellipse profile rigid rocking base. FIG. 9R is a side cross-section viewalong line R of the standing platform 913 of FIG. 9Q with ellipticaledge curve base 912 and a widthwise sloped tilting height HW. FIG. 9S isa front cross-section view along line S of the standing platform 913 ofFIG. 9Q with elliptical edge curve base 912 and a lengthwise slopedtilting height HL that is the same height as HW in FIG. 9R. FIG. 9T is afront cross-section view showing further details of the region withinthe area T of the standing platform 913 of FIG. 9S and shows a close-upof the elliptical edge curve base 912 that includes the rocking region.The difference D is shown in FIGS. 9R and 9T between the shorter span ofbase 912 and the span of standing platform 913. Alternatively, notshown, the difference may be greater or a smaller than difference D.When rocking, the elliptical edge curve base 912 transitions to thecollapsing and confirming top surface 913 to advantageously allow for asmooth transition of the rocking motion between the curvature of edgecurve base 912 and the top surface 913.

FIG. 9U shows a side view of a rocking standing platform that has astanding surface 914, a curved compliant or non-compliant rocking bottom915, and a toroidal compliant or non-compliant base 916. FIG. 9V shows afront cross-section view showing further details along line V of thestanding platform of FIG. 9U with standing surface 914, rocking bottom915, and toroidal base 916 that shows the curve of the compliant ornon-compliant rocking bottom 915. The rocking bottom 915 can be made outof many materials such as plastic, composite including fiberglass andcarbon fiber. The plastic can be solid or it can be a lightweight coredout design. The composite can be laminated with different fibers andorientations and also with honeycomb or foam cores to achieve thedesired firmness, thickness, and weight. The rocking bottom 915 can bepermanently affixed to the standing surface 914 using a method such asadhesive or heat bonding, or the rocking bottom 915 can be attached andunattached, using fasteners, a snap fit, microsuction tape, or Velcro®.FIG. 9V also shows the compliant or non-compliant base 916 is a ring(toroidal) in this embodiment. The base 916, in compliant baseembodiments, can be a material that provides resistance or damping suchas foam, an air filled bladder, or a liquid filled bladder. Some ofthese embodiments such as the air filled and fluid filled bladders canbe adjusted to tune the response and adjust the amount of resistance ordamping. Increasing the pressure of the air or fluid filled complaintbase slows and limits the movement of the tilting. The ring can also bemade of coil springs, leaf springs, or designed with geometry thatresults in a spring like resistance. The purpose of the compliant baseis to provide resistance to make it harder to tilt the board so it ismore stable, or to dampen the motion of the board, so it moves from sideto side slower. The base 916 can also be rigid (non-compliant) if theuser does not wish to tilt. FIG. 9Y is an exploded upper isometric viewof the standing platform shown in FIG. 9U showing the standing surface914 removed from the compliant or non-compliant rocking bottom 915 whichis lifted off of the toroidal compliant or non-compliant base 916.

Another way to alter the level of movement is to utilize an adjustabletop surface to modulate or alter the responsiveness of the rockingmotion of standing platforms 901, 907, 909, 913, and 914. By adjustingthe softness or resilience of the top surface, a user may alterresponsiveness of the mat, regardless of the properties of the bottomsurface. These top surfaces may be inflated or they may possessadjustable springs similar to that shown in FIG. 24A-24E, or they may becomposed of other firmness adjustable materials.

FIG. 9W shows a solid closed (non-toroidal) compliant or non-compliantbase 917 can be used. This version of the base has a closed flat bottom,and raised edges that contact the compliant or non-compliant rockingbottom 915 and separate it from the ground. The flat bottom isadvantageous to protect the floor, such as hard wood, from rubbing,damage, and wear from the friction of the rocking base 915 of thestanding surface 914.

FIG. 9X shows a solid closed (non-toroidal) compliant or non-compliantcurved base 928 can be used. This version of the base has a curvedbottom that contacts the compliant or non-compliant rocking bottom 915.The curved bottom, when compliant, is useful for protecting the floorfrom wear from the friction of the rocking base 915 of the standingsurface 914. When the base 928 is complaint, it provides some dampeningto the rocking while still permitting the user a full tilt and rock.When the base 928 is compliant, the center of the base deforms under auser's weight and creates a more stable flat area. When enough weight isshifted to the side of the board, the whole system still permits theuser to tilt and rock.

FIGS. 9Z-9AD show a platform that has a curved bottom surface as ittransitions to the edge that is created using the drop stitch inflatabletechnology alone, and no rigid base is required. FIG. 9Z is an upperisometric view of a drop stitch inflatable platform with a curved bottomedge 929. It is formed of a drop stitch top surface 918, a drop stitchbottom surface 921, a side seam tape 919, and the internal drop stitchfibers 922. The flexible fabric material of the top surface 918, bottomsurface 921, and side seam tape 919 are non-elastic and generally do notstretch and therefore help to limit and control the geometry of theresulting device. The side seam tape 919 overlaps the edges of the topsurface 918 and the bottom surface 921 to leave a center gap area 925between these two surface edges where there is a middle non-overlappingregion of side seam tape 919, with the gap area 925 narrowing withtrimmed side 924 of seam tape 919. Advantageously, towards the two endsof the major axis of the elliptical perimeter, the drop stitch topsurface 918 is trimmed smaller than the bottom surface 921 and the sideseam tape 919 is cut narrower at trimmed side 924. As shown in FIG. 9AA,this tapering of the seam 919 width is done by trimming off some of thebottom portion of the side seam 919 at trimmed side 924 in order toleave the top surface 918 generally flat while curving up the bottomsurface 921 at curved bottom portion 920 that affixes along the trimmedside 924 of the seam 919. This is also shown in FIG. 9AB, where thetapering of the seam 919 at trimmed side 924 of FIG. 9AA curves thebottom surface 921 of FIG. 9AC making it visible in the side view atcurved bottom portion 920. FIG. 9AC is a front cross-section view alongline AC of the inflatable platform of FIG. 9AB showing a center gap area925 between a top surface 918 and a bottom surface 921, a side seam tape919, curved bottom portions 920, and internal drop stitch fibers 922.FIG. 9AD is a front cross-section detailed view of the region within thearea AD of the inflatable platform of FIG. 9AC showing the center gaparea 925 between the top surface 918 and the bottom surface 921, theside seam tape 919 with a trimmed side 924, the curved bottom portion920, and internal drop stitch fibers 922 including untaught fibers 923.As shown in FIGS. 9AC and 9AD, together in concert, the differing topand bottom surface areas and tapered seam width at the ends cause thebottom surface 921 to curve upward at the two curved bottom portions 920that curve upward with a smaller radius than the larger radius curvatureof the top surface 918 edge. This advantageously leaves a larger flatsurface area on the top 918 than the bottom 921. Where the side seamtape 919 is tapered to narrow it at trimmed side 924, so as to pinch thebottom and top surfaces closer together at the ends, the drop stitchfibers 923 are not taught, but relaxed, as detailed in FIG. 9AD. Theresulting curved bottom shape provides a rocking region and alsoenhances the ability to rock the platform. FIG. 9AC shows only the endsof the board curving up, however, the board can also be made where theedges curve up around the entire perimeter. This improves the rockingabilities of the board in all directions. A specific embodiment that isespecially advantageous is a board that is relatively short (between 16inches and 39 inches in length), and is oblong shape (i.e., a first axisthat is substantially longer than and perpendicular to a second axis)such that the width of the board is less than its length. When a boardof this general shape has curved edges around the entire perimeter ofthe board, it permits the user to rock the board up on its edge at anyposition along the perimeter by using only their feet while standing onthe board. The length is such that with a comfortable stance, the user'sfeet are near the ends of the board so they are able to rockside-to-side. The width is less than the length so that a typical sizedfoot of a user may be placed close enough, at, or overlapping both thefront and rear edges of the board so the user can rock the board frontand back and side-to-side only using their feet while standing on theboard.

FIG. 10A shows a side view of a user standing with their left foot 1003planted, as shown, and balanced on their left leg 1007, and holding uptheir right leg 1006, behind the back of a standing platform 1001. FIG.10B shows a side view of the user pushing the standing platform 1001 byextending their right leg 1006. The standing platform 1001 has asubstantially vertically oriented edge (e.g., one that includes bottomedges 1004 and 1005), which is not seen in typical standing platforms.The edge is also thick enough (falls within the disclosed advantageousranges) that it is easy to slide with one's foot. FIGS. 10C and 10D areupper isometric views showing the sliding motion from an isometric view.HG. 10E shows a side view of a user positioning their right foot 1002 inthe gap in between the floor and the bottom edge 1004 of the standingplatform, 1001. The platform has curved edges, so it is possible towedge one's foot underneath it. HG. 10F shows a side view of the userlifting the back bottom edge 1004 of the board 1001 by raising the rightleg 1006 and pivoting platform 1001 along the opposite bottom edge 1005.This is useful because it allows users to flip the board up and positionit vertically against the wall or along the side of a desk withouthaving to bend over to move and place the board with their hands. FIGS.10G and 10H show the lifting motion from an upper isometric view.

FIG. 11 (comprising FIGS. 11A-11P) illustrates an alternate embodimentto permit flipping up a standing platform 1101 by way of the uniquelycompliant characteristics of the standing platform 1101. FIG. 11A is aside view and FIG. 11B is a front view showing the user placing theirleft leg 1108 on the end of the top surface 1110 of the standingplatform 1101. FIG. 11C is a side view and FIG. 11D is a front viewshowing the user pressing down on the top surface 1110 of the standingplatform 1101 with their left leg 1108. The end of the board 1101deforms slightly and pivots, hinges, or rocks about bottom edge 1104 andas a result, the opposite end opposing bottom edge 1105 of the boardlifts into the air. FIG. 11E is a side view and FIG. 11F is a rear upperisometric view showing the user sliding their right foot 1103 underneaththe lifted end of the board 1101 at bottom edge 1106 so their foot 1103can press against the bottom surface 1111 to lift the platform 1101.FIG. 11G is a side view and FIG. 11H is a rear upper isometric view of auser flipping a standing platform 1101 up using their right foot 1103 toraise the bottom edge 1106 of the board 1101. FIGS. 11G and 11H showthat once the right foot 1103 is under the board 1101 at bottom edge1106, the user places their left foot 1102 back on the floor and is ableto lift the board 1101 by lifting the right leg 1109 causing the deviceto pivot about edge 1107 and lift at edge 1106.

FIGS. 11I-11P show a user lifting a standing platform to a verticalorientation using only their feet. This is made possible due to theboard's sufficient rigidity, light weight, and rockable edges. Incombination, these features enable a user to more easily manipulate themat with either their feet or their hands. This results in greater easeof movement of the mat from underfoot when transitioning from a standingposition to moving the mat to a storage location when the user is readyto sit during work. Ease of movement of the mat increases the user'sincentive to alternate more frequently between sitting and standingduring the workday. Ergonomic advisors generally recommend more frequenttransitions (every 30 minutes as one example) between a sitting and astanding position. A difficult-to-move or manipulate mat (as is commonin the current art) interferes with this advantageous purpose anddecreases the number of times a user will be willing to make thetransition from sitting to standing and back again. The sufficientrigidity, light weight, and rockable edges of the disclosed device allowfor a greater number of transitions during the workday, which in turn,is healthy and beneficial to the user.

FIG. 11I is a side view and FIG. 11J is a front view showing the firststep which is where the user rocks the right bottom edge 1105 of theboard 1101 up off the ground by pressing on the top surface 1110 nearthe left bottom edge 1104 of the board 1101 with their left foot 1102.FIG. 11K is a side view and FIG. 11L is a rear upper isometric viewshowing the second step where the user slides their right foot 1103under the bottom surface 1111 of the board 1101 while the left foot 1102continues to press down on the top surface 1110 near the left bottomedge 1104 of the board 1101 which holds the right bottom edge 1105 ofthe board 1101 up off the ground. FIG. 11M is a side view and FIG. 11Nis a front view showing the user raising the platform 1101 to a steepangle by continuing to rock the left bottom edge 1104 with the left foot1102 while simultaneously lifting up on the bottom surface 1111 of theboard 1101 with the right foot 1103. FIG. 11O is a side view and FIG.11P is a front view showing the platform 1101 in a nearly verticalorientation. It is shown that the platform 1101 is held between theuser's legs 1108 and 1109. Another possibility is for the user to grabthe raised bottom edge 1105 of the board 1101 with their hand when it isin a near vertical position. This procedure permits a user to be able tomove the platform 1101 easily when they, for example, have troublebending over. The platform's 1101 unique combinations of physicalproperties make it possible to lift it in this manner.

FIG. 12A is a bottom view that shows the bottom of a standing platform1201 that has a plurality of dimples on its bottom surface 1202. FIG.12B is a lower isometric view of a user standing on the dimpled standingplatform 1201 of FIG. 12A. FIG. 12C is a side view of the user standingon the standing platform of FIG. 12B. FIG. 12D is a front cross-sectionview along the line D of the user standing 1203 on the standing platform1201 of FIG. 12C showing bottom surface 1202. FIG. 12E is a close upfront cross-section view of the region within the area E of the bottomsurface 1202 of the standing platform 1201 of FIG. 12D and shows dimples1204. The purpose of these dimples 1204 is to reduce the contact betweenthe floor and the bottom platform surface 1202 to make it easier toslide out of the way.

FIG. 13A is a front view and FIG. 13B is a lower isometric view showinga standing platform 1301 that is supported by corner supports 1302attached to the platform's bottom surface 1303. The corner supports 1302are very thin pads (e.g., less than an eighth of an inch thick) that aremade from a slippery material with low coefficient of friction. Thecorner supports 1302 are shown placed at the perimeter of the lowersurface of the platform 1301 but may be placed at a relatively smalldistance from the perimeter. It is desirable for the platforms 1301 toslide easily so users may push them aside when they are not in use, andalso to move easily to reduce the chance of causing tripping whenaccidentally pushed. FIG. 13C is a front view that shows a standingplatform 1301 with corner supports 1302 on a floor surface 1304 and itshows that the weight of the platform 1301 is fully supported by thepads, so it slides easily. It is also desirable for standing platforms1301 to be extremely stable and resist sliding when users stand on them.FIG. 13D is a front view that shows that when a user 1305 stands on astanding platform 1301 that is supported by corner supports 1302, thecenter of the platform 1303, deforms down until it touches the floor1304. The standing platform 1301 is made from a material that has a muchhigher coefficient of friction than the corner supports 1302 so oncesome weight is on the standing platform 1301 it resists sliding muchmore than when it is unloaded.

FIG. 14 (comprising FIGS. 14A-14F) shows an alternate embodiment to FIG.13 (comprising FIGS. 13A-13D) that also achieves low friction whenunloaded and high friction when loaded. FIG. 14A is a front view andFIG. 14B is a lower isometric view of a standing platform with aplurality of low friction nubs. This embodiment uses a plurality of lowfriction nubs 1405 on the bottom surface 1402 of the standing platform1401 to achieve the same effect as FIG. 13. FIG. 14C is a front view ofthe standing platform of FIG. 14A on a floor 1403 and shows that thereis an air gap between the bottom surface 1402 of the platform 1401 andthe floor 1403 because it is fully supported by the low friction nubs1405. FIGS. 14D-14F show that when a user 1404 stands on the platform1401 the platform bottom surface 1402 deforms and contacts the floor1403. FIG. 14D is a side view of a user 1404 standing on the standingplatform 1401 of FIG. 14C with a bottom surface 1402 that hasdistributed low friction sliding nubs 1405 of FIG. 14F and is resting onthe floor 1403. FIG. 14E is a front cross-section view along line E ofthe user 1404 standing on the standing platform 1401 of FIG. 14D withbottom surface 1402 resting on the floor 1403. FIG. 14F shows a close upfront cross-section view of the region within the area F of the bottomsurface 1402 of the standing platform 1401 of FIG. 14E with the user1404 of FIG. 14E standing on the platform 1401 and shows the platformbottom surface 1402 deforming around the low friction nubs 1405 so thatit contacts the floor 1403. The platform bottom surface 1402 has ahigher friction coefficient than the low friction nubs 1405, so whenload is applied to the platform 1401 and bottom surface 1402 comes intocontact with the ground 1403, the standing platform 1401 resists slidingdue to the increased coefficient of friction.

FIG. 15 (comprising FIGS. 15A-15K) is another embodiment that achieveslow friction when unloaded and high friction when loaded, usingdifferent materials than the previous embodiments. FIG. 15A is a frontview of plastic structured standing platform with a cutout 1506 to makeit easier for a user to pick the board up off the floor with a hand orhand in combination with a foot. This platform has a compliant top cover1501 made from foam, rubber, inflatable, or other like material, asupport structure 1502 made from a more rigid material such as plastic,and nubs 1503 on the bottom of the support structure 1502, made from ahigh friction material. Although the support structure 1502 is made froma substantially rigid material, the geometry of the structure allows itsome bending flexibility. It is arched so that it rests on the two ends1507, and the center of the structure and the immediately adjacent areais off the floor and separated by an air gap 1508. FIG. 15B is a lowerisometric view that shows an example of a plastic structure 1502underneath the platform. FIG. 15C is a front view that shows theplatform resting on the floor 1504 with no load. This view shows the airgap 1508 between the floor 1504 and the nubs 1503 on the bottom of thesupport structure 1502.

FIGS. 15D-15G show the platform with a user 1505 standing on it. FIG.15D is a side view showing a user 1505 standing on a plastic structuredstanding platform resting on the floor 1504, a compliant top cover 1501,and an end 1507. The load from the user 1505 causes the supportstructure 1502 of FIG. 15E to flex until the nubs 1503 of FIG. 15E touchthe floor 1504. This achieves low friction when the platform isunloaded, and a stable surface that does not slide when loaded. FIG. 15Eis a front cross-section view along line E of the user standing on thestanding platform of FIG. 15D with top cover 1501 and nubs 1503 on thebottom of the support structure 1502 that has two ends 1507 and isresting on the floor 1504. FIG. 15F is a front cross-section detailedview of the region within the area F of the edge of the standingplatform of FIG. 15E that is resting on the floor 1504 and shows thedesign of the compliant top cover 1501. The top cover 1501 follows alongthe surface of the support structure 1502 with a constant thicknessuntil it reaches the edges near the ends 1507. Then the top cover 1501extends out further than the support structure 1502 and has a tighteredge radius to make it thicker. This provides a buildup of compliantmaterial on the edge of the platform, which provides a conforming edgeas disclosed in section 4.3—Collapsing and conforming edge. The supportstructure 1502 rests on the floor 1504. FIG. 15G is a frontcross-section detailed view of the region within the area G of thecenter of the standing platform of FIG. 15E. The top cover 1501 followsalong the surface of the support structure 1502 with a constantthickness in this center portion which is away from the edges near theends 1507 of FIG. 15F. The support structure 1502 flexes under loaduntil the nubs 1503 touch the floor 1504.

One means to achieve mats within the disclosed advantageous ranges ofthe key metrics is to employ a honeycombed or similarly ribbed or coredout structure, FIG. 15B for example, of rigid and lightweight materialthat includes cushioned portions where a user's footfall occurs. Thus itis cushioned underfoot but still lightweight and substantially firm,where the edges are configured to still be collapsible and conformableunder foot. Also, one mat may have a softer upper surface with a morerigid central portion of the mat in its middle. The more rigid materialdoes not extend to the edges of the mat so that the edges achieve betterconformability to the foot, while still maintaining greater rigidity inthe center. An additional plastic (meaning malleable properties as wellas materials) surface provides support and some conformability underfoot. Layers may be employed wherein a first portion of the surface ismade of a different firmness or durometer of material than a secondand/or later portion toward the edges where the plastic may be softer ormore malleable than the first and/or prior portion or layer. The layersmay be composed of a “double shot” or “multi shot” fabrication processfor a resilient surface with a softer layer on top of a more firm orrigid layer.

FIG. 15H is a front view that shows a variation of the previousembodiment where the bottom edges of the support structure 1502 are cutaway to create a curved edge 1509. There is still a compliant top cover1501 to provide a soft surface for the user's feet. The cut away curve1509 is shown to have a length of L. Various length curves and curves ofdifferent profiles can be used to change the rocking characteristics.FIG. 15I is a side view showing that the curved edge 1509 exists alongthe entire perimeter of the board. The curved edge 1509 may vary inlength and shape to change the rocking characteristics at differentpoints along the perimeter. FIG. 15J is a bottom view showing the ribpattern that comprises the support structure 1502. This rib patternensures that the base structure 1502 is substantially rigid whilestaying lightweight. FIG. 15K is a lower isometric view showing the baseof the support structure 1502 and the curved up edges 1509.

FIG. 16 (comprising FIGS. 16A-16M) shows a standing platform that hasridges 1607 on the bottom surface to achieve lower friction whenunloaded and higher friction when loaded. The platform has a flat topsurface 1601 that may be rigid or semi-rigid and ridges 1607 on thebottom surface 1602 where it contacts the floor 1604. The ridges may bein various patterns, but all require that airspace 1605 be providedbetween the ridge formations regardless of their path or shape. FIG. 16Ais a side view of a user 1603 standing on a standing platform with aflat top surface 1601 and a ridged bottom surface 1602 on a floor 1604.FIG. 16B is a lower isometric view of the standing platform of FIG. 16Awith a flat top surface 1601 and a ridged bottom surface 1602. FIG. 16Cis a front view of the standing platform of FIG. 16A with a flat topsurface 1601 and a ridged bottom surface on a floor 1604. FIG. 16D is across-section detail view along line D of the standing platform of FIG.16C and shows a double/multi shot top construction or layers with afirst shot or layer 1610 of a first firmness or durometer that evens outthe top ridges 1607 to produce a smooth surface to accept second shot orlayer 1616 of a second firmness or durometer to create flat top surface1601. FIG. 16D also shows how there is only a point contact between thefloor 1604 and each bottom ridge 1607 along a bottom surface 1602.Longitudinal air tubes 1608 are separated by internal partitions 1609and form the bottom ridges 1607 where the bottom surface 1602 is incontact with the floor 1604. Alternatively, top second layer 1616 andbottom first layer 1610 may be unified into a single one-shot topconstruction to produce a flat top surface 1601. Alternatively, the toplayer 1616 and/or layer 1610 may be constructed of any rubber-likematerial that is flexible but less compressible. When considered inthree dimensions, the point contact between bottom ridge 1607 and thefloor 1604 is extended into a line contact. These areas of contactsurrounded by airspace 1605 allow the device to slide more easily (lowerstatic friction) when it is unloaded as the area of contact is reducedas compared to when loaded and ridges 1607 deform slightly and produce agreater, wider line contact (higher static friction). For example, auser 1603 of FIG. 16A stepping off of the platform as line contact areais reduced unloads the device and relieves surface pressure.Additionally, the external edges between the two surfaces 1601 and 1602are generally vertical in orientation in order to provide aperpendicular surface to receive the energy of a side impact, so thatthe lower friction surface permits the platform to move away from theimpact more easily when the mat or platform is unloaded (e.g., not underexternal pressure such as that the standing user 1603 of FIG. 16Aprovides).

FIGS. 16E-16I show an embodiment of a standing platform 1606 with ridges1607 that have longitudinal air tubes 1608. FIG. 16E is a bottom view ofan inflatable tube standing platform 1606 with ridges 1607. FIG. 16F isa lower isometric view of the inflatable tube standing platform 1606 ofFIG. 16E with ridges 1607. FIG. 16G is a front view of the inflatabletube standing platform 1606 of FIG. 16E. FIG. 16H is a sidecross-sectional view along line H of the standing platform 1606 of FIG.16G showing a number of longitudinal air tubes 1608 that are separatedby internal partitions 1609. The resulting shape of this constructionhas ridges 1607 on both the top and bottom surfaces, because of the airpressure pressing out against both surfaces. FIG. 16I is a frontcross-sectional view along line I of the standing platform 1606 of FIG.16H that is perpendicular to the cross-section of FIG. 16H and shows oneembodiment of internal partition 1609 with perforations 1611 to allowthe air to flow freely between at least some adjacent air tubes 1608 ofFIG. 16H that have top and bottom ridges 1607. Although not shown inthese specific drawings, all gas filled mats (for other drawings as wellas in this disclosure) may possess one or more air valves and theability to adjust the inflation air pressure of these devices in one ormore regions.

FIGS. 16J-16M show an embodiment of a standing platform 1613 with ridges1612 that have latitudinal air tubes 1615. FIG. 16J is a bottom view ofan inflatable transverse tube standing platform 1613 with ridges 1612.FIG. 16K is a lower isometric view of the inflatable transverse tubestanding platform 1613 with ridges 1612 of FIG. 16J. FIG. 16L is a sideview of the inflatable transverse tube standing platform 1613 of FIG.16J. FIG. 16M is a front cross-sectional view along line M of thestanding platform 1613 of FIG. 16L showing a number of latitudinal airtubes 1615 that are separated by internal partitions 1614. The resultingshape of this construction has ridges 1612 on both the top and bottomsurfaces, because of the air pressure pressing out against bothsurfaces. In some embodiments there are perforations to allow the air toflow freely between at least some adjacent latitudinal air tubes 1615.Some embodiments include a double shot or layer top construction with afirst shot or layer of a first firmness or durometer that evens out thetop ridges 1612 to produce a smooth surface to accept second shot orlayer of a second firmness or durometer to create flat top surface.

FIGS. 17A-17D show a standing platform 1701 that has a plurality ofvertical cylindrical air chambers 1702, which allow for a tunable feelto the surface. The separate air chambers 1702 form small bulges on thetop and bottom surfaces of the platform 1701. FIG. 17A is an upperisometric view of an inflatable platform 1701 that has verticalcylindrical air chambers 1702. FIG. 17B is a top view of an inflatableplatform 1701 of FIG. 17A that has vertical cylindrical air chambers1702. FIG. 17C is a front cross-section view along line C of theplatform 1701 of FIG. 17B with vertical cylindrical air chambers 1702and partition walls 1703. FIG. 17D is a front cross-section detailedview of the region within the area D of the platform 1701 of FIG. 17Cwith vertical cylindrical air chambers 1702 and partition walls 1703.FIGS. 17C and 17D show air chambers 1702 separated by partition walls1703. The air chambers 1702 may be pressurized independently of eachother so the user may dial in a surface that has variable firmness.Alternatively, holes may be placed in at least some of the partitionwalls 1703 of chambers 1702 to permit adjacent chambers 1702 to bepressurized uniformly. Chambers 1702 may include a needle type valve orother adjustment mechanism on any of its walls that does not abutanother chamber (e.g., the bottom center of a chamber 1702 or, forperimeter chambers 1702, an exterior side wall) to allow a user to tunethe surface feel of the chamber and any chambers 1702 connected viaholes. Alternatively, an air chamber 1702 pressure may be fixed atmanufacture when an adjustment mechanism is omitted. There may becertain areas where the chambers 1702 have a higher pressure thatprovides a firmer place to stand. Other areas may be made where thechambers 1702 are set to a lower pressure so they deflect more for agiven load. FIG. 17D is a more detailed cross-section view of area D inFIG. 17C. Platform 1701 may include a rigid or semi-rigid top surfaceabove chambers 1702 for a more uniform feeling of the surface.

FIGS. 17E-17H show a standing platform 1701 that has a plurality ofvertical hexagonal air chambers 1704, which allow for a tunable feel tothe surface. The separate air chambers 1704 form small bulges on the topand bottom surfaces of the platform 1701. FIG. 17E is an upper isometricview of an inflatable platform 1701 that has vertical hexagonal airchambers 1704 with partition walls 1703. FIG. 17F is a top view of aninflatable platform 1701 that has vertical hexagonal air chambers 1704with partition walls 1703. FIG. 17G is a front cross-section view alongline G the platform 1701 of FIG. 17F with vertical hexagonal airchambers 1704 and partition walls 1703 with optional holes 1705. FIG.17H is a front cross-section detailed view of the region within the areaH of the platform 1701 of FIG. 17G with vertical hexagonal air chambers1704 and partition walls 1703 with optional holes 1705. FIGS. 17G and17H show the air chambers 1704 separated by partition walls 1703. Theair chambers 1704 may be pressurized independently of each other so theuser may dial in a surface that has variable firmness. Alternatively,holes 1705 may be place in at least some of the partition walls 1703 ofchambers 1704 to permit adjacent chambers 1704 to be pressurizeduniformly. Chambers 1704 may include a needle type valve or otheradjustment mechanism on any of its walls that does not abut anotherchamber (e.g., the bottom center of a chamber 1704 or, for perimeterchambers 1704, an exterior side wall) to allow a user to tune thesurface feel of the chamber and any chambers 1704 connected via holes1705. Alternatively, an air chamber 1704 pressure may be fixed atmanufacture when an adjustment mechanism is omitted. There may becertain areas where the chambers 1704 have a higher pressure thatprovides a firmer place to stand. Other areas may be made where thechambers 1704 are set to a lower pressure so they deflect more for agiven load. FIG. 17H is a more detailed cross-section view of area H inFIG. 17G. Platform 1701 may include a rigid or semi-rigid top surfaceabove chambers 1704 for a more uniform feeling of the surface.

FIG. 18 (comprising FIGS. 18A-18F) shows a ball filled standingplatform, which serves two purposes: it slides easily (low friction)when unloaded and sticks (high friction) when loaded, and it allows foran adjustable pressure across the surface. FIG. 18A is a bottom view ofa ball filled standing platform with bumps 1802 and a side wall 1801.FIG. 18B is a lower isometric view of the ball filled standing platformof FIG. 18A with bumps 1802 and a side wall 1801. FIG. 18C is a frontview of the ball filled standing platform of FIG. 18A with bumps 1802and a side wall 1801 on the floor 1803. FIG. 18D is a side cross-sectionview showing along line D of the standing platform of FIG. 18C and showsthat the platform has a foam or other malleable or compressive materialtop 1804 and a side wall 1801 which encloses a cavity which holds anumber of inflatable balls 1806 which are separated by partition walls1805. Alternatively, not shown, the balls may be in foam filledcavities, or other cushioning material, to hold them in place in alightweight manner. There may also be added a thinner surface layer, notshown, over the foam 1804. The balls 1806 may be individuallypressurized and filled to different pressures to achieve the desired matsurface feel. This permits different zones to be configured with firmerand less springy areas next to areas that are less firm and moreresilient, such as a firm center portion and a less firm peripheryand/or side regions. The balls 1806 stretch the bottom surface therebycreating bumps 1802. These bumps 1802 create the low friction propertyof the platform when it is unloaded. FIG. 18E is a front view of a ballfilled standing platform with bumps 1802 and a side wall 1801. Theplatform is on the floor 1803 with a foot 1807 applying force to the topof the platform. FIG. 18F is a side cross-section view along line F ofthe standing platform of FIG. 18E with a side wall 1801 and shows thatwhen a user's foot 1807 applies a load on top 1804, some balls 1806,which are separated by partition walls 1805, are compressed and deformed1808, resulting in a greater internal pressure. This deformationsquishes (flattens) the bottom surface bumps 1802, which helps the matstick to the floor 1803 with a greater static coefficient of friction.In an alternate embodiment, the balls 1806 may be constructed of amaterial that does not require inflation. In such an embodiment, theballs may be of different densities to achieve the desired mat surfacefeel. The cavities may be slightly pressurized (e.g., 1 psi versus thehigher, variably pressurized balls) to provide a greater bending andflexural rigidity to the platform.

FIGS. 19A-19C show an extra stable standing platform system comprising astanding platform 1901 and support clips 1902. The support clips 1902limit rocking and tipping of the platform 1901 that result from forcesapplied by user 1903. FIG. 19A is a front view of a user 1903 standingon a standing mat 1901 that has support clips 1902 attached to it. FIG.19B is an upper isometric view of the user standing on the standing mat1901 of FIG. 19A that has support clips 1902 attached to it. FIG. 19C isan upper isometric view of the standing mat 1901 of FIG. 19A that haslow profile support clips 1904 attached to it. These shorter clips 1904permit the user to step on the edges of the platform where the clips1904 are attached and deform and compress the edges some amount beforethe user's feet contact the non-deforming and non-compressible lowprofile clips 1904.

FIGS. 20A-20F show an alternative to the support clips 1902 of FIG. 19with an optional ramp attachment 2001 and 2004 that may be added to thestanding platform 2003 that has a generally vertically oriented edge.Rocking and tipping of the platform 2003 through forces applied by user2002 is limited by ramp attachment 2001. The standing platformsdisclosed herein do not pose a significant tripping hazard on their ownbecause they are lightweight and have low friction and therefore moveeasily upon unintentional contact with a foot. However, in someenvironments having a tapered edge may be a mandated requirement. FIG.20A is a front view of a user 2002 standing on a standing mat 2003 witha ramp attachment 2001. In FIG. 20A, standing mat 2003 is behind rampattachment 2001 and can be seen in FIG. 20B which is a sidecross-section view along line B of the user 2002 standing on thestanding mat 2003 of FIG. 20A with the ramp edge 2001 attached to it.FIG. 20C is an upper isometric view of a user 2002 standing on astanding mat 2003 that has a ramp edge 2001 attached to it. The rampattachment 2001 attaches to the standing platform 2003 and surrounds it,as shown in FIGS. 20B and 20C. FIG. 20D shows an exploded upperisometric view of the ramp attachment 2001 removed from the platform2003. Ramp attachment 2001 may include a concave inside curved edge thatconforms to the shape of convex curved edge of standing platform 2003when standing platform 2003 is inflatable and thus may be inflated onceramp attachment 2001 is in place and thus permits inflation to lock andhold the ramp attachment 2001 in place and deflation to loosen, unlock,and remove ramp attachment 2001. FIG. 20E is a front view of a user 2002standing on a standing mat 2003 that has a partial height ramp edge 2004attached to it. FIG. 20F is a side cross-section view along line F ofthe user 2002 standing on the standing mat 2003 of FIG. 20E that has apartial height ramp edge 2004 attached to it. FIGS. 20E and 20F show analternate design ramp attachment 2004 where the standing platform 2003extends above the top of the ramp attachment 2004. This allows the user2002 to still be able to step on the edges of the mat and deform themwhile still having the ramp attachment 2004. Either of the rampattachments 2001 or 2004 can also be made of compliant materials such asfoam or be inflatable so that they deform along with the standingplatform 2003 when stepped upon by the user 2002.

FIG. 21A shows an upper isometric view of a spring filled platform 2107and FIG. 21B is a front view. The platform 2107 is shown having a curvedfront edge 2106 and a flat rear edge 2105. It can be configured to haveboth edges curved or flat. FIG. 21C is a side cross-section view alongthe line C of FIG. 21B showing that the platform 2107 has rows ofsprings 2102 held in bases 2104 inside of chambers of the cover 2101.The bases 2104 hold the springs 2102 in rows, and top caps 2103 areinstalled on the springs to create a smooth surface. The top caps 2103may permit removal by a user so that the individual springs 2102 may beswapped with alternate springs, not shown, having differing stiffnessesto provide mat adjustability. FIG. 21D is a top cross-section view alongthe line D of FIG. 21B showing the rows of springs 2102 held in thebases 2104. The inflatable cover 2101 contains the springs and preloadsthem partially. The cover 2101 can be sealed and inflated, or it can bedeflated and the springs 2102 alone support the user. FIG. 21D shows thefront edge 2106 of the board 2107 does not have a row of springs 2102because it tapers down and there is not space; however, it is capable ofbeing inflated to create a curved edge that is compliant. The rear edge2105 is shown as being flat as it matches the straight row of springs2102. Curved spring bases 2104 can also be employed to put rows ofsprings 2012 along curved edges. The cover 2101 does not need to havesmooth edges. One possible configuration would for it to tightly fitagainst the edges of the spring bases 2104 rather than having a smoothshape that the bases 2104 fit in. FIG. 21E is an exploded top angledview showing the separate bases 2104 and all of the springs 2102 and topcaps 2103.

FIG. 22 (comprising FIGS. 22A-22P) shows a system of interlocking foamblocks that allow the user to create a custom standing platformaccording to their preferences. FIG. 22A shows a front view of a foamblock 2201 that operates to interlock with other identically shapedblocks. FIG. 22B is a cross-section along the line B of FIG. 22A showingthat the foam block 2201 has side pins 2202 and side holes 2204 as wellas pins on the bottom surface 2203 and holes on the top surface 2205.These pins and holes permit assembly of a platform by interlockingmultiple blocks 2201. FIG. 22C is a top view, FIG. 22D is an upperisometric view, and FIG. 22E is a lower isometric view of singleinterlocking foam block 2201 that has holes on the top surface 2205,pins on the bottom surface 2203, side pins 2202, and not shown sideholes 2204 of FIG. 22B. FIG. 22F is a side view that shows nine blocks2201 combined to create one platform. FIG. 22G is a cross-section viewalong the line G of FIG. 22F showing the connected blocks stacked on topof each other. FIG. 22H is an exploded top angled view of the combinedsingle platform showing how the interlocking blocks 2201 can be combinedto create the platform of FIG. 22F. FIG. 22I is an upper isometric viewof the nine blocks 2201 combined to create the platform of FIG. 22F.Different density and/or compression secant modulus blocks may be usedand combined to create a platform with the firmness adjusted to meet theneeds and/or desires of a particular user, such as by having zones ofdiffering firmness characteristics. Different interlocking features mayalso be employed instead of the pins and holes, such as rails int-slots, magnets, microsuction tape, and Velcro® type fasteners. Thefoam pieces 2201 may also alternate orientation between layers. Forexample, the first layer may have the pieces 2201 in the lengthwisedirection, and the second layer has the pieces oriented 90 degrees apartso they run in the widthwise direction. In one embodiment, theinterlocking lattice scale changes with each layer, such that the upperinterlocks are smaller and closer together than each subsequent lowerlevel. An outer wrapper that is vacuum wrapped around the stack toprovide greater bending and flexural rigidity may encompass the wholestack. A lattice of plastic discs, sized to permit the interlockingmechanism between layers to remain, may also be placed between layers toafford a larger conic dispersal of point loads on the top surface toaffect a more linear stress to strain curve.

FIG. 22J is an upper isometric view that shows an assembly of differentsize interlocking foam blocks. It is formed of long blocks 2201 andshorter cross blocks 2206. The different blocks can be made fromdifferent density foams and similar property materials. This allows theuser to construct their ideal standing platform by mixing and matchingthe densities along the length of the board and throughout the layers.FIG. 22K shows the side of an assembly of different size interlockingfoam blocks. This shows that there are cross blocks 2206 on the toplayer, and long blocks 2201 making up the lower two layers. FIG. 22L isa front cross-section view along the line L of FIG. 22K showing thecross blocks 2206 on the top layer, and long blocks 2201 along thebottom two layers. FIG. 22M is an upper isometric view showing anassembly of interlocking foam blocks with the addition of square blocks2207. The lower two layers are still made up of the long blocks 2201 andcross blocks 2206 surround the square blocks 2207 on the top layer.

FIG. 22N is an upper isometric view that shows a covered assembly ofinterlocking foam blocks. A wrap 2208 covers all of the assembled blocksto hold them together so the assembly can be moved without any piecesfalling off. The wrap 2208 can be an elastic fabric, heat shrinkmaterial, or other materials that can enclose the blocks. The wrap canbe permeable or it can be airtight. There can be holes to allow freeairflow, or it can be restricted to create a different response. FIG.22O is an exploded top angled view showing the separate pieces of anassembly comprising of long blocks 2201 and cross blocks 2206. Thisshows how the top layer has cross blocks 2206 oriented 90 degrees apartfrom the long blocks 2201 which make up the lower two layers. FIG. 22Pis an exploded top angled view showing the separate pieces of anassembly comprising of long blocks 2201 cross blocks 2206 and squareblocks 2207. This shows how the top layer has cross blocks 2206 andsquare blocks 2207 while the bottom two layers are made up of longblocks 2201. The order of these pieces can be mixed and matched in anyway to achieve the desired feel.

FIG. 23A shows a user's legs 2302 and feet 2303 standing on a linearfirmness foam standing platform 2301. FIG. 23B is an upper isometricview showing the user's legs 2302 and feet 2303 standing on a linearfirmness foam standing platform 2301. FIG. 23C is a side cross-sectionview along the line C of FIG. 23A showing the inside of the linearfirmness foam standing platform. It has multiple layers of material: thetop layer 2304 middle layer 2305 and bottom layer 2306. In between thetop 2304 and middle 2305 layers of material are small discs 2307 and inbetween the middle 2305 and bottom 2306 layers of material are largediscs 2308. In alternative embodiments, not shown, the small discs 2307and/or large discs 2308 may be substituted with other polygonal shapedobjects such as hexagons. This stack of material and discs spreads outthe load from the user's foot 2303 and distributes it over a greaterarea towards the bottom of the platform. For materials with nonlinearfirmness, this results in a more linear stress to strain curve of theirfirmness. The material that makes the layers can be many types thatposses a wide variety of material properties. Some examples include foamof various densities, air or fluid filled bladders, composites includingfiberglass and carbon fiber, and even metals such as steel, titanium andaluminum. The layers can be of varying thicknesses. For example, a softmaterial like foam may be a thicker layer while a more rigid materialcan be thin so it is still flexible. Some users may prefer a harder ontop and a softer layer farther down while others may prefer theopposite.

FIG. 23D is an exploded top angled view showing how there are multiplesmall discs 2307 and large discs 2308 to cover the entire surface. FIG.23E is a cross-section view of a sheet linear firmness foam platformcontaining thicker and more rigid sheet 2313 between layers 2310 and2311 and thinner and less rigid sheet 2312 between layers 2309 and 2310.FIG. 23F is a partial view of the sheet linear firmness foam platformshowing how the sheets cause the load/pressure on an area of layer 2309to spread out to a larger area of layer 2310 and then an even largerarea of layer 2311 closer to the ground.

FIG. 24 (comprising FIGS. 24A-24E) shows a spring-loaded standingplatform that offers an adjustable firmness surface. FIG. 24A is a frontview of a spring-loaded standing platform. FIG. 24B is a sidecross-section view along the line B of FIG. 24A showing that it has aresilient layer 2402, a semi rigid support base 2403 that has bores forholding a plurality of springs 2406 and adjustment set screws 2404 thatare used to push against the spring compression washers 2405 to adjustthe spring preload. The semi rigid support base 2403 has rounded bottomedges 2401 which permit the entire platform to rock on its edges such asdisclosed in section 6.5—Rocking ability. FIG. 24B shows the boardunloaded with the preload set to the minimum value, so the springs 2406are in their extended or unloaded state. The springs are limited inextension by upper washers 2410 which are connected to the support base2403 by wires 2411. The wires 2411 limit the upward extension of thesprings 2406 and do not permit them to force the resilient layer 2402upward while still allowing the springs to be compressed. The outer mostsprings 2409 may have different spring rates than the inner springs 2406and they may be adjusted differently to provide a different surfaceresponse near the perimeter of the platform.

FIG. 24C is a side cross-section view that shows the load from a foot2408, exerted upon the upper surface of the platform 2401. The cover2401 and resilient layer 2402 conform to the foot, and a number ofsprings 2407 underneath the foot 2408 compress to support the load. Thewires supporting the compressed springs 2412 and 2413 go slack when thesprings 2407 are compressed. 2412 is a more relaxed wire and 2413 is aless relaxed wire due to the different amount of compression in thesprings. The other springs 2406 that are away from the foot 2408 remainuncompressed and the wires 2411 are therefore still taut.

FIG. 24D is a side cross-section view that shows the board with anamount of preload in the middle of the adjustment range. The adjustmentset screws 2404 are threaded further into support base 2403. This forcesthe spring compression washer 2405 up which compresses the springs 2406.The top of the spring 2406 is constrained by the upper washer 2410 andwires 2411. The wires 2411 limit the upward extension of the springs2406 and do not permit them to force the resilient layer 2402 upwardwhile still allowing the springs to be compressed or preloaded.

FIG. 24E is a side cross-section view that shows a load from a foot 2408stepping/pressing on the board of FIG. 24D that has a medium amount ofpreload set. The springs away from the load 2406 remain at theirpreloaded length and tension, while the springs under the load 2407 arecompressed further to support the foot 2408. This adjustment may be usedto change the feel of the surface and also to accommodate heavier orlighter users.

FIG. 25A is an upper isometric view that shows a foam standing pad 2501that has a variable compression secant modulus which is achieved with anadjustable tension perimeter strap 2502. The perimeter strap 2502 runsthrough two clamp supports 2503 on opposite perimeter edges of the pad2501. FIG. 25B is a detailed view showing the strap 2502 running throughthe clamp support 2503 and adjustment buckle 2504. The adjustment buckle2504 allows the user to tighten the perimeter strap 2502. The adjustmentbuckle 2504 is shown to be extending from one of the clamp supports2503, but there are other ways for it to be configured. One way is wherethe buckle 2504 goes into a cutout in the board 2501 so the clampsupports 2503 remain flush along their entire lengths. This isadvantageous in that there is no protrusion extending from the board tointerfere with rocking or stepping on the edge. Another configurationpositions the buckle 2504 to offset from the center of the board so itdoes not interfere with rocking or stepping on the center of the edge.The clamp supports 2503 can also be designed to assist rocking by havinga curved bottom edge. The clamp support 2503 can also be covered withfoam or co-molded with a softer material to create a compliant rockingedge. Tightening the strap compresses the foam pad material 2501 alongthe horizontal directions, which makes it firmer in the verticaldirection. FIG. 25C is a side view and FIG. 25D is a top cross-sectionview along the line D of FIG. 25C that shows the pad 2501 in a relaxedand uncompressed state. L1 is the relaxed length of the pad, W1 is therelaxed width, and H1 is the relaxed height. FIG. 25E is a side view andFIG. 25F is a top cross-section view along the line F of FIG. 25E thatshows the pad 2501 when the perimeter strap 2502 is tightened. When thestrap 2502 is tightened, the pad 2501 is compressed so the length andwidth decrease to L2 and W2 and the height may increase slightly to H2.The cross sections shown in FIG. 25D and 25F reveal that the board 2501may have internal springs 2506 to ensure alignment and to prevent theboard 2501 from deforming out of plane. The springs 2506 are held in thecylinders 2505 which are attached to one clamp support 2503 and thepistons 2507 which are attached to the other clamp support 2503 compressthe springs 2506. This arrangement ensures the two clamp supports stayaligned, and the springs help return the foam board 2501 to its originalshape when the strap 2502 of FIG. 25A is loosened with adjustment buckle2504.

FIG. 26A is an upper isometric view that shows variation of foam,rubber, or the like, pad that has adjustable compression secant modulusthat permits differing zones of firmness across the minor axis. It hasmultiple slices of foam 2601 (or other like material), which stacktogether to form a rectangular shape. There are two end clamps 2602 oneach end of the assembly. Wires, bungees, elongated bolts, or some othertensioners 2603 run longitudinally through the assembly and areterminated at each end clamp 2602. In an alternative embodiment, themajor and minor axes are swapped from the embodiment shown in FIG. 26(comprised of FIGS. 26A-26F) to produce an adjustable platform where thetensioners 2603 run along the minor axis instead of the major axis toproduce a mat that permits individually adjustable zones across themajor axis instead of the minor axis. FIG. 26B is a side view showingand end clamp 2602 with three termination points 2604 for the tensioners2603. FIG. 26C is a top view and FIG. 26E is a front cross-section viewalong the line E of FIG. 26C that shows the pad in a relaxed state witha length of L1, a width of W1, and a height of H1. FIG. 26E also showsone of the relaxed tensioners 2603 passing through the length of thepad.

FIG. 26D is a top view and FIG. 26F is a front cross-section view alongthe line F of FIG. 26D that shows the pad in a tensioned state whereends 2602 are pulled together. FIG. 26D also shows one of the tensionedtensioners 2603 passing through the length of the pad. When tensioned,the length decreases to L2 and the width and height may increaseslightly to W2 and H2. Buckling of the foam 2601 under high tension fromtensioners 2603 may be avoided by selecting tensioners 2603 made out ofa sufficiently rigid material (e.g., a threaded rod) or alternatively byenclosing the entire mat (other than exposing end clamps 2602) or justthe top and/or bottom surface with a sufficiently rigid membrane such asmade from high-density polyethylene (HDPE), to frame the mat in itsproper shape and form so as to avoid buckling.

FIG. 27 (comprised of FIGS. 27A-27D) shows a standing pad that may beincorporated as a component of a standing platform with adjustablelinear compression modulus over many of the disclosed ranges of strainand R² values and over a range of strain from 0% to 50% and an R² valueof 0.90. FIG. 27A is an upper isometric view of an adjustable firmnesssemi-rigid pad. The adjustment mechanism (tensioners 2702) varies thefirmness and permits differing zones of firmness across the minor axis.The pad subsurface 2701 may be broken up into sections, not shown,corresponding to the differing zones and tensioners 2702 to permit agreater variability of firmness between adjacent zones. The standing padis constructed with a semi-rigid material such as carbon fiber, metal,fiberglass, or plastic that is shaped into wave springs along both themajor and minor axes and may be encased in an elastomeric foam or rubberto construct a standing platform. The encasing may include a fill ofsmall foam, rubber, or plastic resilient or non-resilient pellets orvarious sizes and shapes that are contained within a shaped encasementof foam or rubber which may be sheathed within a fabric such as a PVCsheath or other disclosed materials. Alternating peaks and dips in thepad subsurface 2701 create a geometry that is elastic and responsiveeven though the material itself is semi-rigid. There are holes or slotsin the wavy structure that permit the elastic or inelastic tensioners2702 to pass through the length of the pad. The tensioners 2702 may becomposed of wires, inelastic or elastic rods, bungees, or elastomericrubber and may include springs on their ends and may include anattachment mechanism (e.g., threads, pins, fasteners, etc.) on at leasttheir ends to permit an adjustment mechanism. When tightened, thetensioners 2702 squeeze the wavy pattern together (compress the wavesprings) which increases its compression and thereby its marginalfirmness.

FIG. 27B shows a side view of the pad subsurface 2701 with tensioners2702. FIG. 27C shows a front cross-section view along the line C of FIG.27B showing an adjustable firmness semi-rigid pad subsurface 2701 withtensioners 2702. FIG. 27D shows a detailed view of the area D of FIG.27C that shows an adjustable firmness semi-rigid pad subsurface 2701with tensioners 2702. In an alternative embodiment, the major and minoraxes are swapped from the embodiment shown in FIG. 27 (comprised ofFIGS. 27A-27D) to produce an adjustable pad where the tensioners 2702run along the minor axis instead of the major axis to produce a pad thatpermits individually adjustable zones across the major axis instead ofthe minor axis.

FIG. 28A shows a drop stitch inflatable platform 2801 that has a valve2802. FIG. 28B shows a partial cross-section view which reveals dropstitch fibers 2804 connecting a top and bottom surface of the inflatableplatform 2801. Standing platform 2801 has a limited board surface areaas compared to the size of valve 2802, and any object on the top orbottom surface of the board may interfere with use by limiting orinhibiting where a user may stand. Bulge 2803 is due to the lack offibers 2804 below the valve 2802.

FIG. 28C is a top view that shows a standing platform 2801 which uses asmall needle air valve 2806 (seen in FIGS. 28D-F). FIG. 28D is a frontcross-section view along the line D of FIG. 28C, and FIG. 28E is adetailed view of the region within the area E of FIG. 28D. The locationof the needle valve 2806 is more appropriate than the location of valve2802 for the standing platform because the valve 2806 is small enough tobe placed on the side of the platform, while still permitting enoughairflow to fill the low volume inflatable. The side valve is made of amalleable, conformable or flexible material that can be compressed ordistorted to minimize damage if a standing user's downward pressure wereto impinge upon it in some way. Though not limited to these materialsalone, some examples of valve materials are rubber, flexible andmalleable plastics, elastomers and the like. Any materials that minimizedamage with use, and any material that achieves this result arecontemplated. The valve 2806 can be of a short length when entering thefilling chamber(s) of the mat, to further minimize impingement by auser's activity on the mat. Another benefit of the needle valve 2806 isthat it minimizes interference with the drop stitch fibers 2804 thatcauses bulge 2803. Despite the advantages of a needle valve 2806 it maybe necessary to use a more standard valve. Valve 2802 can take any oneof a variety of forms that permit the placement of valve 2802 as shown.One problem with valve placement on the top surface 2808 of standingplatforms is that when it is stepped on the mat deflects, and the valveis able to touch the bottom surface 2805 of the pad, or a user feels thevalve underfoot and perceives it as annoying or uncomfortable. FIG. 28Fshows a close up front cross-section view of a standing platform 2801with a protecting encasement 2807 around the needle air valve 2806.

FIG. 28G shows a top view of a foot 2809 stepping on an air valve whichis installed on the top surface 2808 of a drop stitch inflatablestanding platform 2801. FIG. 28H shows a cross-section (corresponding toa view along line I in FIG. 28G) of a drop stitch inflatable 2801 thathas a valve 2802 mounted on the top surface 2808 and shows the limitedclearance between the bottom of the valve 2802, and the bottom surfaceof the mat 2805. The drop stitch fibers 2804 are removed at the valve2802, which causes a bulge 2803 on the bottom surface 2805. FIG. 28Ishows a cross-section (corresponding to a view along line I of the matof FIG. 28G) of a foot 2809 stepping on a valve 2802, which causes thetop surface 2808 of the inflatable 2801 to depress, and the bottom ofthe valve 2802 to come in contact with the bottom surface 2805 of theinflatable 2801. Over time, this contact may cause wear and leaks in thematerial. It also has a harsh feel, because the user's weight istransferred through the plastic valve 2802 and not supported by thecomplaint air inflatable. The drop stitch fibers 2804 are removed at thevalve 2802, which causes a bulge 2803 on the bottom surface 2805.

FIG. 28J shows an improved configuration which reduces the previouslyindicated challenges (corresponding to a view along line I of the mat ofFIG. 28G) that has an elastomeric bumper 2810 surrounding the air valve2802. The elastomeric bumper 2810 may also be placed at the bottom ofthe value 2802 to prevent it from cutting into or causing undo stress onthe bottom surface 2805 material. FIG. 28K shows that when a foot 2809steps on the valve 2802, in the configuration of FIG. 28J, the bumper2810 contacts the bottom surface 2805 of the inflatable, instead of thebottom of the valve 2802. This spreads the load out over a larger area,which reduces damage to the inflatable's bottom surface 2805 material,and also maintains some similarity to the feel of stepping elsewhere onthe inflatable 2801.

FIG. 29 (comprising FIGS. 29A-29D) shows various embodiments ofmulti-density standing platforms. FIG. 29A shows a standing platformwith an outer layer 2901 and one or more inner cores of one or moredensities. FIG. 29B is a front cross-section view along line B of FIG.29A showing a platform that has an outer layer 2901 and an inner core2902. These layers and/or cores may be different density foams, gels, orsolids. By composing various combinations the feel of the platform canbe changed. For example, if a softer material is used for the outerlayer 2901 the surface has a very soft and conforming feeling, where ifthe outer layer 2901 is firmer, it is more supportive while the centercore 2902 still provides overall cushioning. FIG. 29C is a frontcross-section view (corresponding to a view along line B of FIG. 29A)showing an alternative platform with outer layer 2901, two thin innerlayers 2903 and 2905, and one thicker center core 2904. FIG. 29D is afront cross-section view (corresponding to a view along line B of FIG.29A) showing an alternative platform with a thin outer layer 2906 and athick inner core 2907. The outer layer 2906 may be a more rigid materialthan foam such as wood, spring metal, plastic, carbon fiber, orfiberglass, so it provides a more stable surface than the foam itselfand yet remains flexible because the cross-section of the material isthin enough to permit it to flex for the given weights of the users. Thecross-section dimensions of the platform outer layer 2906 can varygreatly depending on the material used. Given a certain material, theouter layer 2906 can be designed to have a flexural rigidity andcompression modulus that falls within our desirable range. All thelayers may be inflatable, or they may be a mixture of inflatable andnon-inflatable. The layers can be pressurized to different pressures toachieve the desired characteristics. The outer layer 2906 may beperforated or have holes placed strategically to optimize the rebounddynamics.

FIGS. 30A-30H show a standing platform 3001 that has a curved surfacethat raises the ends 3003 above the floor 3002. This shape provides avariety of ways to interact with the board to improve the user'sstanding experience. The platform may have some portions with one ormore inflated, gas filled chambers, or it may be of one or more layersor other shaped portions that utilize various foams, fillers, ormaterials of plastic, wood, bamboo, metals, carbon fiber, fiberglass, oraramid fibers and the like, or other woven and non-woven materials, etc.FIGS. 30A and 30B show how a user may stand with their legs 3004 and3005 and their feet 3006 and 3007 in the center if they want todistribute their weight more evenly. One advantageous embodiment is touse string mat inflatable technology. This allows the creation of curvedsurface inflatables and they may be inflated to a high pressure so theboard has some rigidity and is able to hold this shape and provideresistance to bending. As disclosed, there are advantageous non-inflateddevices that may be utilized to approximate the same or similarcharacteristics, properties, shapes, and utilities. FIG. 30G is a frontview of a user standing with both feet 3006 and 3007 in the middle ofthe curved surface standing platform 3001 on the floor 3002. FIG. 30H isan angled view of the user with both feet 3006 and 3007 standing in themiddle of the curved surface standing platform 3001 of FIG. 30G.

FIGS. 30C-30H show how a user may exercise their leg 3005 by deformingthe end 3003 of the platform 3001. FIGS. 30C and 30E show the user withtheir left foot 3007 and leg 3005 shifted to the left end 3003 of theplatform 3001. FIGS. 30D and 30F show the user depressing the end 3003of the board 3001 which provides resistance (pushback force) against theunderside of the user's foot 3007, and it provides exercise and buildsstrength. It also provides a type of movement that reduces body fatigueand stiffness. Attachment points may be incorporated into the standingplatform and accessories may be attached. One example is attachingelastic exercise bands to the end of the board, so the board providesresistance in addition to the bands.

Alternatively, not shown, the platform 3001 shown in FIG. 30 can also beraised off the ground. If the raised board 3001 rigidity falls within anappropriate range (depending on the user's weight, a bending rigidity inthe range 15 122 lb×in⁻¹) it can be flexed to provide a leg exercise.FIGS. 30C and 30D show a user depressing the end 3003 of a board 3001 tothe ground 3302 with their foot 3007. If the board 3001 was raised offthe ground, there would be more available range of motion for thedeflection. Another embodiment of FIG. 30 (not shown) is to have aplatform 3001 with a very soft top which allows the foot to sink intoit. This ensures that the feet are flat relative to the ground, evenwhen the platform itself is curving up.

FIG. 31A is a front view that shows a user standing with a centeredstance on a two layer sandwiched curved surface platform that has a top3101 (e.g., composed of one or more of inflatable, foam, rubber, etc.)and a semi-rigid base layer 3102 (e.g., composed of fiberglass or carbonfiber) with the user standing with their feet 3109 and 3110 aboutshoulder-width apart and near the center of the top 3101 and away fromthe ends of the board 3106 and 3107. Filling a string mat inflatable toa high pressure may create a rigid enough surface by itself; however, itmay result in a standing surface that is too firm for a user. Thelaminate embodiment shown in FIGS. 31A-31E uses the semi-rigid baselayer 3102 to provide the needed support, so the top 3101, wheninflatable, may be deflated to the pressure which provides the desiredfeel. FIG. 31B is a front view of a user standing on the two layersandwiched curved surface standing platform of FIG. 31A. FIG. 31C is anangled view of a user standing on the two layer sandwiched curvedsurface standing platform of FIG. 31B. FIGS. 31B and 31C show that thesemi-rigid base layer 3102 may still be flexed so that it maintains allof the exercise and other functionality disclosed. FIGS. 31B and 31Calso show the user balancing with most of their weight on their plantedleft foot 3110 and left leg 3105 flattening the left end of the board3107, causing it to depress to the ground 3103, and little weight ontheir raised right foot 3109 and right leg 3104 on the right end of theboard 3106. This has the benefit of stretching different leg muscles andbuilding the user's balance over time.

FIGS. 31D and 31E show an alternative embodiment with a triple layer,standing platform laminate. This one has the semi-rigid layer 3102 inthe middle and an inflatable layer on top 3101. The bottom layer 3108may be a second inflatable layer, or it may also be another materialdepending on the needs of the user. One example is to have a rubber, orother similar material, base layer 3108, which protects the floormaterial from the semi-rigid layer 3102 and which also providesanti-slip traction. Other bottom surfaces within these specificationsmay also be utilized. An alternate material may be smooth if the userwants the platform to advantageously be able to slide. Or the bottomsurface may utilize some combination of regions of differing smoothness.FIG. 31E is an angled view of a user standing on the flattened threelayer sandwiched curved surface standing platform of FIG. 31D. FIGS. 31Dand 31E also show a user with their feet 3109 and 3110 apart flatteningboth ends of the board 3106 and 3107 completely, causing them to depressto the ground 3103.

FIG. 32A is a front view and FIG. 32B is an angled view showing that onemay also use a curved surface standing platform 3201 inverted, or upsidedown for different exercises and movements and to provide a differentresponse and feel for the user. When the user steps on an invertedcurved surface standing platform 3201, they may deform the board and belowered to the floor 3202. The user may achieve different motions bystanding on the platform in different spots. The board 3201 also remainsin contact with the floor 3202 at the ends of the board 3203 and airgaps 3204 are formed between the remaining arced portion of the boardand the floor 3202.

FIGS. 32C-32I show a standing platform 3207 with an elliptical likeshape with a curved surface where the curvature is along the minor axisand where the major axis has no curvature. FIG. 32C is a side view thatshows the standing platform 3207 resting in a neutral position with thebottom surface center portion touching 3205 the floor 3202. FIG. 32D isa side view and FIG. 32E is an angled view which shows a user's legs3206 standing on the platform 3207 in a neutral and balanced positionwith no rocking relative to the floor 3202 with the bottom surfacecenter portion touching 3205 the floor 3202. FIG. 32F is a side view andFIG. 32G is an angled view which shows the user's legs 3206 rockingforward along the minor axis to rock the front edge 3208 to touch 3205down to the floor 3202 and the rear edge 3209 away from the floor 3202.FIG. 32H is a side view and FIG. 32I is an angled view which shows theuser's legs 3206 rocking backward along the minor axis to rock the rearedge 3209 to touch 3205 down to the floor 3202 and the front edge 3208away from the floor 3202.

FIG. 33A is a front view and 33B is an upper isometric view which show aplatform 3301 that has an upwardly facing top surface 3306 and has abottom surface 3307 that is configured to rest on the floor 3308. Theillustrated top surface 3306 is generally planar when the platform isunloaded and the bottom surface 3307 rests on the floor 3308. FIGS. 33Aand 33B show a user 3302 standing on a platform 3301 holding elasticbands 3303 that are attached to the platform 3301. The user 3302 isgripping the cord handles 3304. FIG. 33C is a front view and 33D is anupper isometric view which show user 3302 pulling on the elastic bandhandles 3304. This motion causes the elastic bands 3303 to stretch, andit also causes the ends of the board 3305 to pull up. Depending on wherethe user places their feet, the ends of the board 3305 pull up more orless which gives a different feel to the exercise. The elastic bandsprovide a mechanism for the user 3302 to perform resistance exercises.In addition to the bands 3303 stretching, the platform 3301 compressesduring a pull, which moves the entire user's body 3302 up and down. Theplatform rests on a substantially horizontal surface floor 3308. FIG.33E is a front view which shows a user 3302 standing off-center on astanding platform 3301. The user is holding onto handles 3304 thatconnect to an elastic strap 3303.

FIG. 33F is a lower isometric view that shows the bottom of the standingplatform 3307 which shows that the elastic strap 3303 runs continuouslyunder the bottom of the standing platform 3301 and is held in place withstrap guides 3309. Running the strap 3303 under the bottom of the board3307 is a simple way to attach the strap 3303 to the board 3301 and italso makes it so the strap 3303 evenly loads the bottom of the board3307 when the strap 3303 is pulled. FIG. 33G is a front view which showsthe user 3302 standing off-center on a standing platform 3301 andpulling on the straps. The off-center position of the user 3302 resultsin the right side of the board 3311 deflecting up more than the leftside of the board 3310. This allows the user 3302 to adjust the flex byshifting from side to side and changing where their feet are located. Ifthe user wants a heavier pull on one end, they can stand closer to theend of the board, and if they want a lighter pull, they can stand morein the center of the board to allow more flex. FIG. 33H is a lowerisometric view which shows the bottom of the board when the user 3302 ispulling on the strap handles 3304. More strap guides 3309 can be usedand their positions can differ to change how defined the path of thestrap 3303 is. For example, as shown, the strap 3303 can be pulled tothe front of the board and pulled in that direction. If the strap guides3309 are placed further out, that reduces the ability to pull the strapsin different directions. Multiple strap guides 3309 can be placed, sosome or all of them can be used to adjust how constrained the strap 3303is. There are many other ways to attach the straps to the board inaddition to D-ring attachments and guidance straps 3309. Additional waysinclude using microsuction tape or to use hook and loop fasteners orVelcro®. One side of the material can be applied around the entirebottom edge of the platform, and the other side can be on the ends ofthe straps. This allows the user to place the straps anywhere around theperimeter of the board including the front and the sides.

FIG. 33I is a front view and FIG. 33j is a side view of a user 3302 on astanding platform 3301 while holding onto the strap handles 3304 of theexercise bands 3303. The strap handles 3304 of the exercise bands 3303are not connected to the standing platform 3301, but the exercise bands3303 utilize a wedge 3312 and the user's weight to keep them in place.A1 and A2 are the angles between a line that runs along the length ofthe bottom of the user's foot where it contacts the top surface of thestanding platform 3306 and the vertical line that is tangent to the backof the user's calf. FIG. 33I and FIG. 33J show the user 3302 holding theexercise bands 3303 in their relaxed position. When the exercise bands3303 are in the relaxed position the angle A1 is approximately 90degrees. FIG. 33K is a front view and FIG. 33L is a side view of a user3302 on a standing platform 3301 while pulling on the strap handles 3304of the exercise bands 3303. In FIG. 33K and FIG. 33L the exercise bands3303 are in a tensioned position. The tension in the exercise bands 3303pulls on the front region of the standing platform 3313 causing it tolift up. With the front region of the standing platform 3313 lifted up,the angle A2 becomes less then 90 degrees due to the rotation of theuser's foot. With the exercise bands in the tensioned position as inFIG. 33K and FIG. 33L the user's calf is also stretched because of therotation of the user's foot from A1 to A2.

Alternatively, not shown, a raised board exercise can be applied to FIG.33, where the user 3302 pulls on the ends of the board 3301 with elasticbands 3303. If the board 3301 rigidity falls within an appropriate range(depending on the user's weight, a bending rigidity in the range 15-122lb×in⁻¹) it can be flexed to provide a leg exercise. When the board 3301is raised off the ground, the user 3302 can step on the ends of theboard deflecting them to the ground, and then they can control theresistance and range of motion of the pull cords 3303 by varying theamount of pressure applied with their feet.

FIG. 34 (comprising FIGS. 34A-34F) shows each platform generally has twoopposite faces, one of which is generally placed on the floor 3408 andthe other of which is generally stood upon with user's feet 3401. Thefloor 3408 is representative of any of a variety of possible groundsurfaces as are typically found in residential or commercialenvironments.

FIGS. 34A-34F illustrate an embodiment of a mat that utilizes angle ofslope to offset some of the negative effects of standing for longerperiods while facing in one direction, usually while working at a desk.FIG. 34A is an upper isometric view of a sloped mat 3402 with the user'sfeet 3401 placed on the sloped mat which is on the floor 3408. FIG. 34Bis a side view of the sloped mat 3402 of FIG. 34A with the back edge3403 shown higher than the front. FIG. 34C is a side view of a flat mat3404. FIG. 34D is a side cross-section view of the flat mat 3404 of FIG.34C which illustrates a flat mat 3404 on a floor 3408, a foot 3401, footheel 3407, and foot ball 3406. When standing on a compliant mat surfacesuch as of mat 3404, there is a higher pressure at the heel 3407 than atthe forefoot or ball 3406 of the foot 3401. The heel 3407 sinks deeperinto the mat 3404, than the heel 3407 of the foot 3401, and results in astance that can, over time, cause additional discomfort to a user. Theball or forefoot depth line 3405 shows that the heel 3407 depresses themat below the ball 3406. This misalignment propagates though the bodyand has detrimental effects on posture and results in discomfort andstrain. The discomfort may be partially offset by placing a more firm ordense material in the area of where a heel is likely to be placed by astanding person. The more resilient or firmer area under the heel servesto resist the additional pressure and so help better equalize thestance. However, the entire surface may be composed of the samematerial, along with a uniform slope, giving the user a more uniform andconsistent feel underfoot, which is advantageous, and may be lesscostly, by using fewer different types of surface materials. It has alsobeen found to be overall more comfortable to have the same resilienceunder foot no matter where the user positions their feet when orientedtoward their work surface.

FIG. 34E shows a side view of the sloped mat 3402 of FIG. 34A. Thisshows a sloped mat that has one taller side edge 3403 that allows for afoot to come to rest in a balanced or neutral orientation or position.FIG. 34F is a side cross-section view which shows the sloped mat 3402 ofFIG. 34A with a foot 3401 standing on it in a neutral position, wherethe rear edge 3403 of the mat (in other words, the edge that is closestto the rear heel 3407 of the user's foot 3401) is raised. More weight issupported at the heel 3407 than the ball of the foot 3406 so the heel3407 deforms the mat 3402 further than the ball 3406 does. With acorrectly angled surface, the heel 3407 and the ball 3406 end up levelwith each other, as shown with the ball depth line 3405. In other words,the resulting downward angle (from rear to front, or from heel to toe)compensates for the higher pressure at the heel 3407 of the foot 3401.The foot 3401 is in a neutral position such that the front ball 3406 andheel 3407 are roughly equally elevated above the plane of the floor asshown by parallel to floor line 3405.

FIG. 35A is a side cross-section view and FIG. 35B is an upper isometricview which show a user's legs 3503 standing on a double layer platformthat has a top layer 3501 and a bottom layer 3502. FIGS. 35A and 35Bshow the user standing with their feet 3504 in a flat and balancedposition and supporting the user's heels at a height level with thefront of their feet. FIG. 35C is a side cross-section view and 35D is anupper isometric view which show the user's legs 3503 tilting forward onthe platform, tilting the top layer 3501 and raising the user's heelsabove the front of their feet. The bottom layer 3502 is a relativelysofter material that deforms readily while the top layer 3501 is,relative to layer 3502, more rigid to provide a flat platform to standon. The user may tilt the slope forward by shifting their weightforward, either by moving their feet 3504 close to the edge, or byleaning forward. FIG. 35E is a side cross-section view and 35F is anupper isometric view which show a user's legs 3503 leaning back, whichcauses the bottom layer 3502 to compress, thereby tilting the top layer3501 and lowering the user's heels below the front of their feet. Thebottom layer 3502 also deforms in a similar manner when the user leansside to side.

FIGS. 36A-36C show a standing platform 3601 with an adjustable tiltingbase 3602. FIG. 36A is a side view of the standing platform 3601 withthe adjustable tilting base 3602 set to a flat position. FIG. 36B is aside view of the standing platform 3601 with the adjustable tilting base3602 set to an angle of 4 degrees. FIG. 36C is a side view of thestanding platform 3601 adjusted to an angle of 8 degrees. The base has afront hinge 3603 and a support plate 3604 that holds the platform. Theplatform 3601 can be any type of standing platform including solid foammaterials, gas inflated boards, spring-loaded platform, etc. The tiltangle can be set to any desired angle (slope).

The correct angle depends on the material properties such as firmness,durometer rating, density, and air pressure where applicable, as well asother factors. The correct angle of slope is also dependent on uservariables, such as the user's foot size, length and shape, and theuser's weight. Where a gas filled mat is utilized, the slope angle maybe varied by incorporating an adjustable sloped base with an upper gasfilled portion directly underfoot, which may be configured to beadjustably sloped in multiple angles with one or more layers in themanner just described. This configuration permits the user to benefitfrom the quick bounce response such as permitted by air mat embodiments,while still permitting the disclosed benefits of adjustable slope angle.

In an alternative embodiment, the adjustable slope angle portion mayreside above the gas filled mat portion. This configuration permits anindirect benefit of the bouncy response of the air mat with the feel ofa traditional anti-fatigue material underfoot. While not shown, see 1601as an example of a surface that can be adjustably sloped, while residingover various gas-filled disclosed embodiments. The slope of a gas filledmat may also be adjusted by altering the gas mat itself, whether byvarying the length of internal support connections (e.g., fibers 2804)so that the inflated surface is sloped at a particular angle, orsituating an additional bladder (e.g., layer 3502) above or below theprimary air bladder (e.g., layer 3501) which permits adjustment of theslope by altering the one or more secondary bladders (e.g., layer 3502).

The firmness of the mat is one variable that determines the beneficialangle of the standing mat in addition to human factors such as weightand foot shape. The compression secant modulus of the mat is generallyrepresentative of how much the surface of the pad deflects under a givenload. The pressure distribution of a human foot varies depending on theperson, but typically, while standing, the highest pressure is found atthe heel. This results in the heel depressing into the mat farther thanthe forefoot. Additionally, density of the mat material may vary.Density of the mat material is a measure of how heavy the material isfor a given volume. Some types of mat materials have firmnessproportional to their densities. Other types of materials do not havethis proportional relationship. Durometer is a measure of a material'shardness and may be used to compare materials. Materials with higherdurometer are harder and are firmer when standing on them. Lowerdurometer materials are softer and deflect more when standing on them.Deflection or depression is the amount, as measured in distance, the padcompresses when a load is applied to it.

All of the disclosed factors affect what the beneficial slope of thesurface of the mat should be to achieve a neutral foot with respect tothe underlying floor as represented in FIG. 34F at 3405. Maximum benefitis achieved when the heel of the user remains at or above the level ofthe forefoot when standing on the mat. Softer or less firm materialsdeflect more under the same load than firmer materials. Both the heeland ball depress deeper into a soft material, but the heel stilldepresses proportionally more than the ball. This means that a softmaterial has a greater difference in deflection than a firm material.For example, if on a firm mat the ball depresses 3 mm, and the heeldepresses 6 mm, the angle required to make up for that 3 mm drop is lessthan a soft mat where the ball depresses 6 mm and the heel depresses 12mm.

Some typical pad materials have nonlinear compression modulus so theslope of the tangent of their stress to strain curve (i.e., thederivative of the stress to strain curve) increases as they arecompressed (i.e., strained). The pad needs to be set at an angle suchthat the pad height drop along the length of the foot makes up for thedifference in deflection between the heel and the ball of the foot toachieve a neutral foot as shown in FIG. 34F. Also as the angleincreases, more weight is shifted to the front of the foot, which causesthe heel to deflect less into the mat and help balance the feet.Finally, a user may be more comfortable having the heel slightlyelevated above the forefoot after all factors are considered. This isbecause the user has a reduced chance of leg, foot and back discomfortif they more closely maintain a stance to which their body has grownaccustomed, probably over years.

Users are characterized by a history of how they wear shoes and whatangle their feet have been adapted to over time. Some women are used towearing relatively high heels on a regular basis, while men generallywear substantially flat shoes with a slight heel elevation. Whenstanding on a mat, these habits and physical attributes to which a userhas become accustomed, affect the level of slope that is optimum forthat user. It has been found that the angle of slope is generally lessthat 12 degrees, 12 degrees being a very high angle and not likely to beutilized except for a very small segment of the population. Asignificant portion of users, whether barefoot or shod, benefit from aslope angle generally between 2 to 5 degrees. This range benefits manyusers and is the more likely angle for embodiments that arenon-adjustable.

Even angles greater than 12 degrees of slope may be possible, but theseare special cases where the user may be rehabilitating from an injuryand/or may require a greater than normal slope angle to workcomfortably. Additionally, as shown in FIGS. 36A-36C, adjustability ofthe slope angle may be achieved so that when the exigency requiring themore extreme slope of FIG. 36C is over, the mat angle may be adjusted toa more common or typical slope angle FIG. 36A or FIG. 36B for a user'ssize, weight, and materials used for the mat.

FIG. 37 (comprising FIGS. 37A-37D) shows a platform 3701 with a variablerear hump 3703 and standard (not humped) front edge 3702. FIG. 37A is afront view, FIG. 37C is an upper isometric view, and FIG. 37D is a topview of a standing platform 3701 with a variable rear hump 3703. FIG.37B is a side cross-section view along the line B of FIG. 37A whichshows more detail on one possible shape of the standing platform 3701and rear hump 3703. This rear hump 3703 has a curved surface to providedifferent positions for the user to place their feet. If they want adeep stretch, they can put their heels on the center of the hump formaximum height, or if they want a lighter stretch, they can spread theirfeet and stand on the lower section of the hump 3703. This platform 3701can also be rotated 180 degrees so the hump 3703 is in the front andfront edge 3702 is at the back. That way a user can stretch their leg inthe opposite way by putting the ball of their foot on the hump 3703 andthe heel on the platform 3701. The hump 3703 can be an integral part ofthe platform 3701, or it can also be an attachment that can be affixedand removed from the board, and also placed on different locations onthe platform's top surface.

FIG. 38A is a front view and FIG. 38C is an upper isometric view whichshow a platform 3801 with a front dome 3802. This is a different shapeddome that provides a number of different ways to place a user's feet andstretch their legs. FIG. 38B is a side cross-section view along the lineB in FIG. 38A showing that the dome 3802 extends above the top surfaceof the platform 3801 such that a user can raise their foot by placing iton the dome 3802 and they can stretch their legs by angling their footon the dome 3802. The dome 3802 has a curved surface so the user canplace their feet on the dome from various angles. The dome 3802 is longenough so either one or both feet can be placed on it at once. FIG. 38Dis a top view of the standing platform of FIG. 38A showing there is alarge flat area of the platform 3801 for the user to stand and the dome3802 takes up a smaller area at the front of the platform. The dome 3802can be an integral part of the platform 3801, or it can also be anattachment that can be affixed and removed from the board, and alsoplaced on different locations on the platform's top surface.

FIG. 39 (comprising FIGS. 39A-39D) shows a standing platform 3901 with araised bump 3902 in the center of the board. FIG. 39A is a front viewand FIG. 39C is an upper isometric view which give differentperspectives of the standing platform 3901, as well as the shape andposition of the center bump 3902. FIG. 39B is a side cross-section viewalong the line B of FIG. 39A showing the bump 3902 protruding above thetop surface of the platform 3901. This bump 3902 can be used forstretches and additional locations for the user to place their feet.FIG. 39D is a top view of the standing platform 3901 of FIG. 39A showingthe bump 3902 oriented in the center of the platform 3901. It can alsobe offset from the center and located anywhere along the platform 3901.

FIG. 40A is a side view of a rear hump standing platform which has aninflatable base 4001 and an inflatable rear hump 4002. FIG. 40B showsthe side cross-section of the platform along the line B of FIG. 40A, andhow the rear hump 4002 elevates above the base 4001, it also shows thedrop stitch internal filaments 4006 that maintain the shape of theinflatable standing platform. FIG. 40C is an upper isometric view thatshows the rear hump 4002 positioned partially around the rear edge ofthe base 4001. Front curved edge 4003 provides a variety of positionsfor the user 4004 of FIG. 40D to put their feet 4005 of FIG. 40D andother body parts. FIG. 40D is an upper isometric view that shows how auser 4004 may stand with their feet 4005 on the platform 4001 with anormal stance. FIG. 40E is a top view showing an exemplary shape of theplatform 4001. This shape may vary depending on what kind of positions auser 4004 of FIG. 40D wants to obtain, and what platform area isdesired.

FIG. 41A is a side view showing a user 4104 with their feet 4105 hangingoff the front edge 4103 of the platform 4101. FIG. 41B is an upperisometric view that shows how with a normal stance, the user's feet 4105can align with the perimeter curve in the front curved edge 4103. FIG.41C is a side view that shows a user 4104 with their feet 4105positioned together and hanging off the front edge 4103 of the platform4101. FIG. 41D is an upper isometric view that shows that the user'sfeet 4105 are still aligned with the front edge 4103 even when they arebrought together due to the perimeter curvature of the front curved edge4103. FIG. 41E is a side view that shows the user 4104 standing on therear hump 4102. The hump 4102 supports the heels of the feet 4105 andthe balls and toes of the feet rest on the platform base 4101. FIG. 41Fis an upper isometric view that shows how with a normal stance, theuser's feet 4105 can align with the perimeter curve along the rear hump4102. FIG. 41G is a side view that shows the user 4104 with their feet4105 partially on the floor 4106 and with their heels on the front edge4103 of the platform 4101. When the user 4104 stands in the middle ofthe platform 4101, it provides a relatively firm and supportive surface.When they stand on the edge, such as in FIG. 41G, the platform providesa much softer surface that permits the user 4104 to bounce up and downon the edge 4103. FIG. 41H is an upper isometric view that shows how theuser's feet 4105 can bounce up and down on the edge 4103.

FIGS. 42A-42J show a rim, ring, or perimeter hump platform 4201 with arigid insert 4206. The inflatable platform 4201 has an edge hump 4205that provides an elevated edge around the entire perimeter, whichprovides ways to position a user's feet 4203 in any direction. A rigidplatform 4206 is disposed in the inflatable platform 4201 to cover thesurface inside of the elevated edge 4205. FIG. 42A is a front view of auser's legs 4202 standing on the perimeter hump platform 4201 with theirfeet 4203 on the flat rigid insert 4206. FIG. 42B is a sidecross-section view along the line B of FIG. 42A showing the user's legs4202 and feet 4203 standing on the platform 4206 which provides a flatsupport base, while still providing cushioning by the inflatableplatform 4201 below on top of floor 4204. FIG. 42C is an upper isometricview showing the rigid insert 4206 inset into the inflatable platform,4201. FIG. 42D is an exploded upper isometric view showing the rigidinsert 4206 removed from the inflatable platform 4201.

FIG. 42E is a front view of legs 4202 standing on an inverted ring humpplatform 4201 in a configuration using a front-to-back roller 4208. FIG.42F is a side cross-section view along line F of the legs 4202 standingon the platform 4201 of FIG. 42E. FIG. 42F shows the platform 4201inverted so that platform bottom 4207 which contacts the floor in FIG.42B is now the top. The platform 4201 of FIG. 42F is shown with acylindrically shaped front-to-back roller 4208 placed underneath andresting on floor 4204. When the platform is inverted, the front-to-backroller 4208 runs along the rigid board 4206 and the edge hump 4205contains movement of the front-to-back roller 4208 so it does not allowthe user to fall. In this embodiment, the front-to-back roller 4208 isshown to be a cylinder. It is oriented so the user can rock back andforth, but it can also be oriented so they can rock side-to-side. Othershaped objects may be used, including a sphere, which provides movementin any direction. A soft disc that deforms to allow the user to tilt mayalso be used instead of rolling cylindrically shaped object. FIG. 42G isa front view of legs 4202 standing on an inverted ring hump platform4201 when it is tilted with an adjustable spacer. FIG. 42H is a sidecross-section view along line H of the legs 4202 standing on theplatform 4201 of FIG. 42G with an adjustable spacer 4209. FIG. 42H showsa fixed adjustable spacer 4209 placed underneath the inverted platform4201. This adjustable spacer 4209 has a flat base so it does not move,and it is placed in a location to prop up the platform 4201. Theadjustable spacer 4209 is positioned to cause the platform 4201 to betilted forward, but the position can be changed to permit the platform4201 to be tilted backwards or side-to-side. FIG. 421 is a front view oflegs 4202 standing on an inverted ring hump platform 4201 in aconfiguration using a side-to-side roller 4210. FIG. 42J is a sidecross-section view along line J of the legs 4202 standing on theplatform 4201 of FIG. 421. The side-to-side roller 4210 is shown to be acylinder that can roll side to side which requires the user with legs4202 to balance.

FIG. 43A is an upper isometric view that shows rim hump 4302 of platform4301 with holes 4304 in the rigid board 4303 to provide an attachmentpoint for accessories. FIG. 43B is an exploded upper isometric viewshowing how a user 4309 can attach pads 4305 and elastic bands 4306 tothe rigid board 4303. FIG. 43C is an upper isometric view that shows theplatform assembled with the accessories. The pads 4305 can support auser's feet 4310 and arches in specific ways. The elastic bands 4306provide resistance exercises. In addition to the bands stretching, theboard 4303 flexes during a pull. The variable force applied by a user4309 with elastic bands 4306 causes a user's entire body to move up anddown slightly as a corresponding equalizing force results in their feet4310 causing them to depress variably into pads 4305. FIG. 43D is anupper isometric view that shows board 4303 with D shape profile pads4305 attached to provide support to a user's foot arches. FIG. 43E is anupper isometric view that shows pads 4307 which are thicker on the ends.These pads help align a user's feet 4310 into a neutral position toimprove a user's entire body posture. Many other pad shapes may beutilized to advantageously support a wide range of different feet.Custom foot pads may be made for people with foot problems.

FIG. 43F is an upper isometric view that shows pads 4308 that are domeshaped. These pads allow a user to place their feet in new positions.Other shapes may also be used and the pads may be interchanged fordifferent configurations. The pads may be custom formed to conform tothe shape of a particular user's feet so that the user's feet do notslide easily off the pads.

FIG. 44A is an upper isometric view that shows a standing platform 4401with two corrective foot pads 4402 placed on the top surface. Thesecorrective foot pads 4402 can be installed for users that need supportto align the joints in their feet. A wide variety of shapes and profilescan be used including custom molded pads for individual users. Also someshapes allow users to stand on different parts of the pads to getdifferent results. The pad material should be semi rigid to rigid toprovide adequate support without being uncomfortable.

FIG. 44B is an exploded upper isometric view that shows the correctivefoot pads 4402 removed from the standing platform 4401. FIG. 44C showsthe foot pads 4402 are raised off the surface of the standing platform4401. The platform, including its pads, has a maximum height Hmax and amat thickness or median height Hmed. FIG. 44D shows two different sizefoot pads 4402 and 4403 placed on the surface of the standing platform4401. The pads can be customized for the user's body. In this case, ataller foot pad 4403 is used to compensate for a person with differentlength legs. FIG. 44E shows that the pads 4402 are moveable and in thisFIGure they are positioned for a wider stance. FIG. 44F shows the footpads 4402 positioned for a narrow stance. FIG. 44G shows the foot pads4402 moved to the rear of the standing platform 4401. FIG. 44H shows thefoot pads 4402 moved to the front of the platform 4401.

FIGS. 44I-44M illustrate various foot pads with different uses andfeatures. FIG. 44I is an upper isometric view that shows a toroidal footpad 4403. FIG. 44J is an upper isometric view that shows a horseshoeshaped foot pad 4404. These foot pads give a user the option to placetheir feet on different contours. They can rest their heel, arch, or anypart of their foot on any part of the foot pads. The user also has theoption to massage their feet while on a standing platform by using afoot pad with massage protrusions like foot pad 4405 shown in FIG. 44Kthat is an upper isometric view. The user can also get a massage with avibrating (shown at 4408) foot pad 4406 shown in FIG. 44L that is a topangled view. FIG. 44M is a top angled view that depicts a foot pad 4407that can generate heat 4409. A user can use the heated foot pad 4407 toapply heat to their foot.

FIG. 45 (comprising FIGS. 45A-45C) shows a standing platform 4501 with arigid plate 4502 partially covering the top surface. FIG. 45A is a topview and FIG. 45B is an upper isometric view showing a user's feet 4503standing on the platform 4501. The user's feet 4503 are partiallystanding on the rigid plate 4502 and partially on the compliant platform4501. One reason to use a rigid plate 4502 is to provide additionalsupport and a stable base while still allowing movement for the toes.Another reason to use a rigid plate 4502 is for a user wearing shoeswith a minimal heel area such as high heels. The plate 4502 is stableand prevents piercing damage to the platform 4501. FIG. 45C is anexploded upper isometric view showing the plate 4502 removed from theplatform 4501. The plate may be different sizes and shapes, and it mayalso be moved on the board so support may be provided for the front ofthe foot if desired.

FIG. 46A is a side view which shows a bottom dome standing platform. Thedome 4602 is attached to the bottom of the platform 4601. The dome 4602may be integrated into platform 4601 at manufacture or it may benon-integrated and separable. The dome 4602 may be inflatable ornon-inflatable. Attachment of the dome may be by capillary action,microsuction tape, Velcro®, magnet, or two-sided tape. This dome 4602has a flat bottom surface that positions the platform in a horizontalposition when the user is balanced on the platform and allows users totilt in any direction relative to the floor 4606, this promotes motionand requires some balance. The relative ease or difficulty required tokeep the platform 4601 balanced depends upon the dome 4602 hardness. Ifthe dome 4602 is hard, it rolls freely, and any weight shift causes itto tilt. If the dome 4602 is softer, it has some compression and allowsfor greater weight shift before it substantially moves. The dome 4602,when inflatable, can have adjustable hardness by changing the airpressure. The dome 4602, when inflatable, can be a separate air bladderfrom the main platform 4601, when it is also inflatable. FIG. 46B showsa cross-section view of the standing platform 4601 of FIG. 46A attachedto dome 4602 along the line B showing an inflatable embodiment with dropstitch internal filaments 4603. FIG. 46C is a lower isometric view ofthe standing platform of FIG. 46A showing dome 4602 attached underplatform 4601. FIG. 46D is a side view showing a user's legs 4604 andfeet 4605 balancing on the dome platform 4601. FIG. 46E is a side viewwhich shows a user's legs 4604 and feet 4605 with the platform 4601tilted forward. As shown, the front of the platform 4601 is touching thefloor 4606. The user can stay in this position to stretch their legs4604. The user may also balance in a position in-between the balancedposition shown in FIG. 46D and the fully tilted position shown in FIG.46E.

FIGS. 46F-46H show top, front, and upper isometric views of a dampingfoam toroidal ring 4607 that can be used with a bottom dome standingplatform 4601. The toroidal ring 4607 may be configured at manufactureto select an advantageous height, diameter, and compression modulus.Such selection causes the amount, feeling, and stability of movement ofstanding platform 4601 to vary. When in position below the standingplatform 4601, the diameter of toroidal ring 4607 may extend as far asor even slightly farther than the edge of the standing platform 4601 andthe height of toroidal ring 4607 may extend as high or even slightlyhigher as height of dome 4602. FIG. 461 shows a user's legs 4604 andfeet 4605 standing on a bottom dome standing platform 4601 which is onthe ground 4606 with a damping foam ring 4607 supporting the base of theplatform 4601. FIG. 46J shows a user tilting the platform 4601 forwards,which compressed the front of the damping foam ring 4607. The foam ring4607 provides resistance to tilting, and it slows down any motion, whichmakes it easier to stand and balance on the platform 4601. FIG. 46K is across-section view showing the platform 4601 in the neutral position andthe foam ring 4607 is uncompressed. The ring 4607 can also be evenlypreloaded in this neutral state to provide more initial stability. FIG.46L is a cross-section view showing the platform 4601 tilted forward.This shows the front of the platform 4601 compressing the front of thefoam ring 4607.

FIG. 47A is a front view and FIG. 47C is a lower isometric view whichshow a faceted dome platform 4701. FIG. 47B is a side cross-section viewalong the line B of FIG. 47A that shows the platform 4701 attached tothe dome 4702. The facet operates to decrease the balance required for auser to stand with feet 4704 on a rigid domed platform 4701. The dome4702 is not a continuous curved surface, but instead is split into anumber of flat faces or facets. These faces are balance points thatprovide a margin for error in user weight shift before it causes theplatform 4701 to move. The user can move from balance point to balancepoint, to position themselves in different ways to permit new stretchesfor their legs 4703. FIG. 47E demonstrates how the user with legs 4703can angle their feet 4704 and shift the platform 4701 and dome 4702 tocontact the ground 4705. This creates a rigid angled surface for theuser.

FIG. 48A is an upper isometric view and FIG. 48B is a front view whichshow a standing platform with enlarged ends 4801. The standing platformhas a flat center section 4802 that allows a user to benefit from afirmer, more stable surface. The standing platform transitions, attransition area 4804, from a thinner and harder portion, at the centersection 4802, into a thicker and softer portion, at the ends 4801. Thebottom 4803 of the standing platform remains flat to maintain a stablestanding surface, but can have a contoured shape to create a morevolatile standing surface. The transition area 4804 is smooth andgradual so that the user is less likely to trip while transitioningtheir feet to the thicker ends 4801. The thicker ends 4801 provide asofter more forgiving surface because they allow for more deflection.The larger radius curve 4805, positioned between bottom edge 4806 andend 4801, allows the user to easily rock the standing platform. As theradius increases, the bottom edge 4806 is positioned more inward towardthe center section 4802, providing greater leverage for the user's pivotaction about bottom edge 4806, effected by their downward force at ends4801. When a load is applied to the end 4801, it generates sufficientleverage to allow the standing platform to tilt or rock easily. Edge4807 acts as a stop to control the degree of rocking permitted by thestanding platform 4801. A user can choose a variation of standingplatform 4801 with an edge 4807 that is positioned closer to 4806, as toreduce the radius of curvature of curve 4805, for a standing platformthat rocks over a smaller rocking region. The user may also choose anedge 4807 that is lower to the ground and further from edge 4806, as toincrease the radius of curvature of curve 4805, for a standing platformthat rocks over a larger rocking region.

FIG. 49A is an upper isometric view that shows that platforms may begrounded so the user 4906 is not electrically isolated from the earth.The platform 4901 has a conductive top 4904 that connects to the cable4902, which has a plug 4903 to connect to the ground in the wall.Instead of just a conductive top 4904, the board 4901 can be coveredwith an electrically conductive skin. This skin can have a zippered,buttoned, or Velcro® opening for inserting the board 4901 and enclosingit inside the skin. The cable 4902 is wired to the conductive skin sothe entire board is grounded. FIG. 49B is an upper isometric view thatshows that the entire top surface does not need to be conductive. Inthis case individual strands of conductive material 4904 are woven intothe top surface, and this conductive material connects to the cable4902. FIG. 49C is an upper isometric view that shows an alternateembodiment where there are only conductive strands 4904 going across thetop of platform 4901. Strands 4904 are positioned to touch a user's feet4907 in any position feet 4907 are placed. Clamp 4905 at the end of thecable 4902 may be attached to a user's desk or to a post that goes intothe ground.

FIG. 49D is a top angled view and FIG. 49E is an exploded upperisometric view to illustrate how a grounding bar 4908 can be used with astanding platform to prevent the user 4906 from being electricallyisolated from the earth. The grounding bar 4908 is electricallyconductive and allows the user to discharge excess static electricityfrom their body. The standing platform 4909 does not need to beconductive since the grounding bar is conductive. The grounding bar 4908has a cable 4902 connected to it, which has a plug 4903 that can beeasily plugged into the ground terminal in any wall outlet. The user cansimply place their feet 4907 on the grounding bar 4908 to take advantageof its electrically grounding properties. To keep the grounding bar 4908light weight it can be made with a conductive outer layer 4910 and havea light weight rigid inside layer 4911. Additionally, a cover designedto encapsulate the standing platform 4909 may be used to allow the userto electrically ground themselves. The cover is electrically conductiveand can connect to the grounding outlet of a wall by using a plug like4902 and an adapter like 4903. The cover may have a zipper, set ofbuttons, or have a Velcro® lining to allow it to be easily opened so theuser can encapsulate the standing platform 4909, and then be zipped upor closed around the standing platform. The cover may also have a layerof pressure sensors integrated into it to allow the user to track theirfootprint on the mat. The pressure sensors can also be used to cause analert to be produced for the user when they are being too stationary.The pressure sensors may also be used to cause an alert to be producedfor the user of their over pronation or supination.

FIG. 50A is a front view of a user 5001 standing on a standing platform5004 with their feet 5003 approximately shoulder 5002 width apart asshown by guidelines 5005 and measure L1 and their legs 5007 at a narrowangle A1 shown by the guidelines 5006. FIG. 50B is a front view of auser 5001 standing on a standing platform 5004 with their feet 5003positioned in a wide stance such that the feet 5003 are wider thanshoulder 5002 width by two foot widths apart as shown by guidelines 5005and greater measure L2 and their legs 5007 at a wide angle A2 shown byguidelines 5006.

FIG. 51A is a top view of a standing platform 5101 with a surface 5105that contains a circular central region 5102 of 2-inch diameter and asurrounding edge 5106 between a perimeter 5104 and an edge band outsideline 5103 indicating where the surface 5105 height begins tosubstantially diminish. FIG. 51B is a top view showing further detailsof the region within the area B of the standing platform 5101 of FIG.51A with the surrounding edge 5106 between perimeter 5104 and edge bandoutside line 5103 indicating where the surface 5105 height begins tosubstantially diminish. FIG. 51C is a front view of the standingplatform 5101 of FIG. 51A with surrounding edge 5106 between perimeter5104 and edge band outside line 5103 indicating where the surface 5105height begins to substantially diminish. FIG. 51D is a front viewshowing further details of the region within the area D of the standingplatform 5101 of FIG. 51C with surrounding edge 5106 between perimeter5104 and edge band outside line 5103 indicating where surface 5105height begins to substantially diminish.

FIG. 51E is a top view of the standing platform 5101 of FIG. 51A withsurface 5105 that contains circular central region 5102 of 2-inchdiameter and surrounding edge 5106 between perimeter 5104 and edge bandoutside line 5103 indicating where the surface 5105 height begins tosubstantially diminish. Also shown in FIG. 51E is an edge band 5107between edge band outside line 5103 and an edge band inside line 5108.FIG. 51F is a top view showing further details within the area F of thestanding platform 5101 of FIG. 51E with the surrounding edge 5106between perimeter 5104 and edge band outside line 5103 indicating wherethe surface 5105 height begins to substantially diminish and edge band5107 between edge band outside line 5103 and edge band inside line 5108.FIG. 51G is a top view of standing platform 5101 of FIG. 51A withsurface 5105 that contains circular central region 5102 of 2-inchdiameter inside of a center area 5116 and surrounding edge 5106 betweenperimeter 5104 and edge band outside line 5103 indicating where thesurface 5105 height begins to substantially diminish. Also shown in FIG.51G is a near edge area 5109 between the edge band outside line 5103 andan exemplary third line 5110, delineating where the compression modulusis 90% of the center compression modulus at the outside of center area5116, placed three inches inside of edge band outside line 5103. FIG.51H is a top view showing further details of the region within the areaH of the standing platform 5101 of FIG. 51G with the surrounding edge5106 between perimeter 5104 and edge band outside line 5103 indicatingwhere the surface 5105 height begins to substantially diminish and nearedge area 5109 between the edge band outside line 5103 and exemplarythird line 5110 placed three inches inside of edge band outside line5103 and marking the perimeter of center area 5116.

FIG. 51I shows the feet 5115 of a 99th percentile male user standing ona circular standing platform 5111. The user has a comfortable andnatural stance, such that the distance W between the inside of the tipsof the feet, or inside the large toes, is equal to the width of theuser's shoulders (20.6″). This distance is shown as distance W. The feet5115 are angled outwards which is a normal standing stance. The amountthat the feet 5115 are pointed out is 25 degrees per side, because ithas been shown that this is the most stable toe out angle and thereforeit is a typical natural way to stand (source: The influence of footposition on standing balance by R. L. Kirby, N. A. Price, and D. A.MacLeod, Journal of Biomechanics, Vol. 20, No. 4, 1987, and available athttp://www.ncbi.nlm.nih.gov/pubmed/3597457). The FIGure is labeled toshow the near edge region 5109 and the surrounding edge 5106. Whendetermining the maximum necessary size for a circular standing platform,the chosen criteria is a mat that allows for the defined comfortablestance of a 99th percentile user that results in the forefoot 5112resting within the near edge region 5109, and the heel 5113 of the footresting outside of the near edge region 5109 and on the surface 5105.The center 5114 of the foot resides somewhere around the insideperimeter of the near edge region 5110. The resulting maximum necessarysize diameter, D, is 28.75 inches.

FIG. 52A shows a platform 5201 that is clamped at one end 5204 by afixture 5202 and the opposite end 5203 is extended freely as acantilever. This image depicts a practically infinitely rigid platformbecause it is perfectly straight and the extended end 5203 does notdeflect downward. FIG. 52B shows a platform 5201 that is clamped at oneend 5204 by a fixture 5202 and the opposite end 5203 is extended freelyas a cantilever. This platform has a finite rigidity and as a result,the extended end 5203 deflects downwards a distance “d”. FIG. 52C showsa supported platform 5201 that is supported at one end 5204 by a fixedsupport 5205 and supported at the opposite end 5203 by a roller support5206 so that it is not over constrained. The distance from the center ofthe bottom surface 5208 of the platform 5201 to the ground 5207 is “y1”when the platform is unloaded. FIG. 52D shows a supported platform 5201that has a load of F applied to it over the central region. This causesthe platform 5201 to bend so that the center of the bottom surface 5208of the platform gets closer to the ground 5207 and the distance betweenthe two is measured as “y2”. Additionally, this causes the platform 5201to compress at the fixed support 5205 and roller support 5206 so thatthe center of the bottom surface 5208 of the platform gets closer to theground 5207 by a portion attributable to this compression and thedistance of this compression is measured as “y3”. The difference betweeny1 and the quantity y2 plus y3 is the amount of center bendingdeflection caused by the load F.

FIG. 52E is a cross-section view of a platform 5201. It has a matthickness or height of “H1”. An unloaded impactor 5209 produces nodeflection of the top surface. FIG. 52F is a cross-section view ofplatform 5201. It has a mat thickness or height of “H1”. A loadedimpactor 5209 causes the top surface to deflect and results in adeflected height “H2”. The ratio of H1 to H2 is the resulting strain.FIG. 52G is an isometric view of the platform 5201 with a loadedimpactor 5209 causing the top surface to deflect, creating a depressedarea.

FIG. 53A is a front view of a drop test impactor 5308 positioned above astanding platform 5301 on the ground 4307 with the wooden ovals 5302attached to base 5303 and raised to initial drop height, Hd, above thetop surface 5309 of standing platform 5301. The drop test impactor shaft5306 is guided by bearings 5305 and loaded with weight 5304 on top ofbase 5303. FIG. 53B is a side view of a drop test impactor 5308positioned above a standing platform 5301 on the ground 5307 with thewooden ovals 5302 attached to base 5303 and raised to initial dropheight, Hd, above the top surface 5309 of standing platform 5301. Thedrop test impactor shaft 5306 is guided by bearings 5305 and loaded withweight 5304.

FIG. 53C is a front view of a drop test impactor 5308 that has beendropped and wooden ovals 5302 attached to base 5303 are impacting astanding platform 5301 on the ground 5307. The drop test impactor shaft5306 is guided by bearings 5305 and loaded with weight 5304. FIG. 53D isa side view of a drop test impactor 5308 that has been dropped andwooden ovals 5302 attached to base 5303 are impacting a standingplatform 5301 on the ground 5307. The drop test impactor shaft 5306 isguided by bearings 5305 and loaded with weight 5304. FIG. 53E is a frontview of a drop test impactor 5308 that has rebounded and wooden ovals5302 attached to base 5303 have risen to a maximum height of Hr, abovethe top surface 5309 of standing platform 5301, after impacting astanding platform 5301 on the ground 5307. The drop test impactor shaft5306 is guided by bearings 5305 and loaded with weight 5304. FIG. 53F isa side view of a drop test impactor 5308 that has rebounded and woodenovals 5302 attached to base 5303 have risen to a maximum height of Hr,above the top surface 5309 of standing platform 5301, after impacting astanding platform 5301 on the ground 5307. The drop test impactor shaft5306 is guided by bearings 5305 and loaded with weight 5304.

FIG. 54A is a graph showing the stress versus strain response of aviscoelastic material where the solid line depicts the compression andthe dashed line depicts the release and the difference between the twocurves is the energy loss due to hysteresis. FIG. 55A is a graph showingcatenary curves for the

${{equation}\mspace{14mu} y} = {a\;{\cosh\left( \frac{x}{a} \right)}{with}\mspace{14mu}{different}\mspace{20mu}{``a"}\mspace{14mu}{{values}.}}$

FIG. 56A is a top view which shows a standing platform 5601 that hasmassage protrusions 5603 on its front edge 5602. FIG. 56B is a side viewshowing the protrusions 5603 extending out from the standing platformsurface 5601. These protrusions 5603 may be a variety of sizes, heights,and located with various spacing. The protrusions 5603 may also belocated on other edges or even on the top surface of the standingplatform 5601. There may also be multiple rows or groupings ofprotrusions 5603. FIG. 56C is an upper isometric view and FIG. 56D is aside view which show a user 5605 standing on the front edge 5602 withthe massage bumps 5603 pressing into the bottom of the user's feet 5604.FIG. 56E is a top view and FIG. 56F is a side view which show an exampleof a platform 5601 that has smaller and more densely packed protrusions5606 on the front edge 5602.

FIGS. 57A-57D show an array of slats 5701 that can be placed on top of astanding platform 5702 to add a different texture or feeling underfoot.The array of slats 5701 exhibits a greater rigidity along the dimensionof each slat length than along the perpendicular dimension along eachslat width between its long edges. The array of slats 5701 can also beused to exercise or stretch a user's feet 5703. FIG. 57A is an upperisometric view which shows how a user 5704 can orient their feet 5703for a more stable front-to-back surface while still being able to pivotthe long edges of the slats 5701 toward the inside and outside of theirfeet to exercise or stretch their feet. FIG. 57B is an upper isometricview that illustrates how the user can orient their feet 5703perpendicular to the length of the slats 5701 in order to easily pivotthe slats about the long edges of the slats toward the front and back oftheir feet while still having a more stable side-to-side surface. FIG.57C is an upper isometric view that shows how the slats 5705 can beoriented perpendicular to the slats 5701 of FIG. 57A in order to takeadvantage of the ability for the slats to pivot while orienting theirfeet in a different direction. The individual slats, 5701 and 5705, canbe made out of a rigid or semi-rigid material. Different combinations ofrigid, semi-rigid, hard or soft slats can be combined to create thearray of slats, 5701 and 5705. FIG. 57D is an exploded upper isometricview of the standing platform 5702 of FIG. 57A which shows the separateslats 5701 are held in place with string 5706. The string 5706 can alsobe thread, wire, or rope. The slats, 5701 and 5705, may also be adheredto the standing platform 5702 or they may be held together by a rigid orsemi-rigid base similar to base 5805 of FIG. 58D.

FIGS. 58A-58D demonstrate the use of an array of square protrusions 5806attached to a base 5805. The array of squares 5801 is another embodimentthat adds texture to a standing platform and can massage the user's feet5804. FIG. 58A is an upper isometric view that illustrates how the user5807 can take advantage of the benefits of the array of squares 5801 byplacing the array of squares 5801 on a standing platform 5802 andstanding on them. FIG. 58B is a cross-section view which shows howstanding on the array of squares 5801 causes them to shift, deform, orarticulate. This in turn helps the user 5807 stretch or exercise theirfeet 5804 by encouraging the user to re-adjust their foot 5804 position.FIG. 58C is an exploded upper isometric view that shows how the array ofsquares 5801 is placed on the standing platform 5802. FIG. 58D is anupper isometric view that shows the square protrusions 5806 and base5805 are formed into one piece, array of squares 5801. The squareprotrusions 5806 can vary and be rigid or semi-rigid and can be made outof different durometer materials to create distinct individual areassuch as individual area 5803 in the array of squares 5801 that arefirmer or softer than other distinct individual areas. The base 5805 canbe made out of rigid or semi-rigid materials to allow the base to flexor deform appropriate to the flexural rigidity and compression modulusof the standing platform 5802. The squares are not the only shapeavailable, as any polygonal shape may be utilized. For example, they canbe octagonal or triangular and the like. Additionally, the pattern andlocation of the protrusions, (one embodiment being the array of squares5801), may be altered such that certain portions corresponding to thearray of squares 5801 may be smooth and other portions or areas possessprotrusions. Multiple versions or patterns corresponding to the array ofsquares 5801 may be made available to tailor for different types ofuser's feet 5804, their shape and size. Thus, portions of the surfacemay have protrusions, and other portions may be smooth. Additionally, auser's weight may affect the rigidity selected for the protrusions onthe portions corresponding to the array of squares 5801.

FIGS. 59A-59D show the use of individual heel platforms 5901 that can beused to create a more stable standing surface for users with shoes orheels 5902. The individual heel platforms 5901 can be used with anystanding platform 5903. FIG. 59A is an upper isometric view and FIG. 59Dis an exploded upper isometric view which show the individual heelplatforms 5901 resting on the standing platform 5903. FIGS. 59B and 59Care upper isometric views which show that the cupped individual heelplatforms 5904 can be moved around according to the user's preference.The individual heel platforms 5901 are shown in a circular shape but,they may also be shaped square, triangular, or any convex (typicallyregular) polygon. Additionally, the size of the platforms 5901 may varyin order to accommodate user preferences or habits of movement on themat. Some users may require larger platforms 5901 while some may be ableto comfortably use smaller surface area platforms 5901. FIG. 59E is alarge upper isometric view that shows cupped individual heel platforms5904 in detail. FIG. 59F is a cross-section view of the cuppedindividual heel platforms 5904. The stiletto of the heel 5902 restsinside the cupped individual heel platform 5904, but does not attach toit. The cupped individual heel platform 5904 allows the user to move theplatform with the stiletto of their shoe. This allows the user toquickly move the individual heel platforms to their desired positionwithout having to bend over or look at the individual heel platforms.

FIG. 60A is an upper isometric view and FIG. 60B is a top view whichillustrate a standing platform with edges that have various levels ofcurvature. The larger radius curve 6001 can be used as a larger rockingedge. The large radius curve 6002 allows the smaller radius curve 6003and curve 6004 to provide a more volatile rocking edge that provides asmaller amplitude of rocking before reaching the limiting force at whichno further rocking amplitude is provided and the edge collapsescompletely. Curve 6003 and curve 6004 also have a different feelingunderfoot compared to the larger curve 6001 and curve 6002. The standingplatforms in FIG. 60 can have more levels of curvature, be ridged, orsemi-rigid. FIG. 60C is a top view that illustrates a different way ofhaving a standing platform with edges that have various levels ofcurvature. The standing platform in FIG. 60C has two large concavecurves 6006 which allow the standing platform to pivot about the smallerradius curves 6005. The medium radius curve 6007 provides another optionfor rocking, and feels something in between the feel of larger radiuscurves (e.g., curve 6001) and the smaller radius curves (e.g., curve6004).

FIG. 60D shows a platform that has a curved front edge 6008 and a curvedrear edge 6009 which is concentric with the front edge 6008. The fourcorners 6010 are shown to have relatively small and equal radiuses,although they can vary in size. The sides 6011 are shown to be straightand intersecting the center point of the curved edges 6008 and 6009, butthe sides 6011 may also be curved and can be offset from the centerpoint of the curved edges.

FIG. 60E shows an oblong diamond shape platform. The width between thefront and rear corners 6012 is less than the length between the sidecorners 6013. The straight sides 6014 are shown to be equal andsymmetrical, but they do not have to be.

FIG. 60F shows a narrow rectangular platform. The four corners 6017 areshown to have equal radiuses but they can vary in size. The lengthbetween the sides 6016 falls within the specified range to allow anatural standing stance, while the width between the front and backedges 6015 is sized to be approximately foot length. Different widthboards can be offered for people with different size feet. The narrowwidth allows for substantial interaction with the edges because there isno central flat area to stand away from the edges. This allows the userto interact with both the front and rear edges 6015 at the same time(see also the related center section 402 in FIGS. 4D-4F).

FIGS. 60G-60K show various polygonal shaped standing platforms. FIG. 60Gis a top view of a triangular platform with straight sides 6019 androunded corners 6018. FIG. 60H a top view of a square standing platformwith equal sides 6020 and rounded edges 6021. FIG. 60I a top view of apentagonal standing platform with equal sides 6023 and rounded corners6022. FIG. 60J a top view of a hexagonal standing platform with equalsides 6026 and rounded corners 6025. FIG. 60K is a top view of anoctagonal standing platform with equal sides 6028 and rounded corners6027. FIGS. 601 and 60J show one foot 6024 closer to one side in thenear edge area and the other foot 6024 closer to the center of theboard.

FIG. 61 (comprising FIGS. 61A-61D) demonstrates a system that allows auser to control the contour or flex of their standing platform. FIG. 61Ais an exploded upper isometric view which shows two D shaped blocks 6102placed on the floor 6104 that support a standing platform 6101. The Dshaped blocks 6102 can also be attached to the standing platform 6101 orthey can be attached to a support structure, such as a rail or frame,which can be attached or not attached to the standing platform 6101. TheD shaped blocks 6102 can attach to the support structure in differentlocations so their spacing can be adjusted to change the contour of thestanding platform 6101. When a user applies a load 6103 by standing onthe standing platform 6101 its shape or contour changes depending on thedistance between the two blocks 6102 and the locations of the user'sload 6103. The contour can be either concave as shown in FIG. 61B andFIG. 61C or convex as shown in FIG. 61D. FIG. 61B is a front view whichshows the D shaped blocks 6102 oriented to create a concave surface.FIG. 61C is a front view showing how the user can generate a moreconcave surface. FIG. 61D is a front view showing how the user canorient the D shaped blocks 6102 to create a convex surface. The contourcan also twist by placing the D shaped blocks 6102 at an angle to eachother instead of parallel to each other. The contour of the standingplatform can be used to correct the user's pronation or supination. Thecontour can also be used to stretch the user's calves and ankles.

Alternatively, not shown, the bumps 6102 in FIG. 61 can also be used toraise the board 6101 off the ground 6104 to allow for additionalexercises. If the raised board 6101 rigidity falls within an appropriaterange (depending on the user's weight, a bending rigidity in the range15-122 lb×in⁻¹) it can be flexed to provide a leg exercise. The heightthat the board is raised off the ground increases the range of motion ofthe flex. Also the board 6101 can be pre-flexed up so that it requiresan even greater motion to flatten the end of the board against theground.

FIG. 62A is a top view showing a standing platform 6201 that has curvedend attachments 6202 connected to the ends of the platform 6201 toincrease and ease of the rockability of the board. The attachments 6202are shown to have a profile that follows along with the shape ofplatform 6201. Other profiles can also be used, such as a more rounded,larger radius curve, or even shapes that have corners. Such attachmentsimprove the disclosed design's already enhanced ability to allow a userto initiate a rocking motion from a standing position. FIG. 62B is afront view showing that the end attachments 6202 have curved bottomsurfaces 6204 that provide a larger rocking region which make it easierfor the user to tilt the board. The attachments 6202 are connected tothe board 6201 with T-slot connections 6203. FIG. 62C is an upperisometric view of a standing platform 6201 that is connected with T-slotconnections 6203 to curved end attachments 6202. FIG. 62D is a frontview of just the end attachment 6202. The curved bottom surface 6204 canbe made to have various curvatures and heights to change the rockingresponse of the board. FIG. 62E is a top cross-section view along theline E of the end attachment 6202 of FIG. 62D showing the T-slotconnections 6203. Flange 6205 retains the T-connectors 6206 of FIG. 62Fthat are attached to the platform 6201. FIG. 62F is an exploded upperisometric view showing the end attachments 6202 removed. The platform6201 has T-connectors 6206 in the corners that interlock with the T-slotconnections 6203 on the end attachments 6202. These can be fittedtogether when the board 6201 is deflated, and then when it is inflated,the T-connectors 6206 are tensioned and the attachments 6202 are firmlyattached.

FIG. 62G is a top view of a board 6201 with angled end attachments 6207.There are many different types of attachments that can connect to theboard 6201 and enhance the functionality, and this shows another exampleof one. FIG. 62H is a front view showing the shape of the angledattachments 6207. The angled attachments 6207 have a curved bottom 6208for rocking, a flat surface 6209 for resting, and an angled surface6210, which allows the user increased leverage to initiate and sustain arocking action. FIG. 62I is a right side view of a standing platform6201 with angled attachments 6207 that have a curved bottom 6208. FIG.62J is a partial front section view along the line J of the standingplatform 6201 of FIG. 62I showing how one angled attachment 6207connects to the platform 6201. The platform 6201 has a strap 6213attached to it that holds a ring 6212. A pin 6211 slides through thering 6212 and is retained by a groove in the end attachment 6207. Thiscan be installed easily when the board 6201 is deflated, and then, whenit is inflated, the strap 6213 is tensioned, and the pin 6211 securelyholds the angled attachment 6207 onto the board 6201. FIG. 62K is anexploded upper isometric view showing the angled attachments 6207removed from the platform 6201. The rings 6212 are visible on the endsof the platform 6201. And the pin 6211 is shown removed from the system.

FIG. 63A is an upper isometric view that shows a standing platform 6301with plastic end attachments 6302 that contain captive buttonprotrusions 6303. The plastic ends 6302 are attached to the platform6301 with T-connectors 6305 (as shown in FIG. 63B) and T-slotconnections 6304. FIG. 63B is an exploded upper isometric view showingthe components of the assembly. There is a plurality of button-likeprotrusions 6303 that are held in place within the end attachments 6302and the platform 6301. The platform 6301 has four T-connectors 6305 thatinterface with the T-slot connections 6304 on the end attachments 6302.Also a soft base 6306 attaches to the bottom of the platform 6301 andattachments 6302. This base 6306 provides a soft contact for floorsurfaces, and it fills in the gap between the floor and the platform6301 due to it being lifted off the ground by the end attachments 6302.The base 6306 can be a uniform material, or it can be a compositematerial composed of varying stiffness and hardness. FIG. 63C is adetailed view of the region within the area C of FIG. 63B showing theT-connector 6305 attachment point of the standing platform 6301. FIG.63D is a detailed view of the region within the area D of FIG. 63Bshowing the T-slot connection 6304 point on the end attachment 6302. Theconnection has a slot 6308 where the T-connector 6305 (shown in FIG.63C) slides in, and flanges 6307 that retain the T-connectors 6305. Toinstall the end attachments 6302 they are slipped onto the platform 6301when it is deflated, and the T-connectors 6305 slide into the T-slotconnections 6304 and then into slot 6308. Then the platform 6301 isinflated and that tensions the T-connectors 6305 against the flanges6307 and holds them in place. FIG. 63E is a side view of the systemshowing the soft base 6306 under the platform 6301 with attached plasticends 6302 with button protrusions 6303 and T-slot connections 6304. FIG.63F is a front cross-section view along the line F of FIG. 63E showingone side of the platform 6301. There is a plurality of holes in the topof the plastic end 6302 where the button protrusions 6303 fit through.The base of the button protrusions 6303 is supported by the platform6301. The button protrusions 6303 are held captive in the holes by theirflanges.

FIG. 63G is a side view of the system showing the soft base 6306 underthe platform 6301 with attached plastic ends 6302 with T-slotconnections 6304 with a foot 6309 stepping on and depressing the buttonprotrusions 6303 of FIG. 63F. FIG. 63H is a front cross-section viewalong the line H of FIG. 63G showing one side of the platform 6301. Theuser's foot 6309 presses against the button protrusions 6303 causingthem to deflect the platform 6301 so they can depress. Several benefitsresult. Because the button protrusions 6303 are able to depress downwardpartially or in whole from beneath the top end or surface of theattachment plastic ends 6302, the user is able to receive stimulationunderfoot that is not overly noticeable or distracting. Such aconfiguration provides a less pronounced pressure to the feet andprovides the user configurable control over the level of stimulation.For example, a highly over-pronating hypermobile or “flat footed” usermay prefer softer button protrusions 6303 that descend further beneaththe top plate or surface of plastic ends 6302, while a high arch footeduser may desire firmer and more elevated button protrusions 6303 tostimulate their feet. Additionally, the quantity and pattern of thebutton protrusions 6303 are configurable for each user by adding orsubtracting button protrusions 6303 that may protrude through the topplate of plastic ends 6302. This is a significant improvement overcurrent designs. The button protrusions 6303 can be a hard material suchas metal or plastic, or they can also be soft and cushioned like rubberor other softer elastomer materials. The shape of the button protrusions6303 can include flat cylinders, rounded cylinders, pointed cones, andother polygonal shapes that provide interesting or beneficialstimulation for feet. When using hard button protrusions 6303 they areable to deflect due to the deforming platform 6301. Button protrusions6303 with different size flanges can be used to change the feel. Forexample, using button protrusions 6303 with a larger diameter flangetakes more force to deform the platform 6301 so they feel stiffer. Theheight of the button protrusions 6303 can also be varied to change theintensity of the feel underfoot. Also button protrusions 6303 withdifferent heights can be installed simultaneously for differentinteractions with the foot 6303. One use is to have the buttonprotrusions 6303 follow the profile of a user's foot, while at othertimes the opposite configuration may be desired.

There are additional ways to add depressible button protrusions to astanding platform. One example is for the button protrusions to beconstrained within a flexible skin. The skin can be a fabric or filmlike material that wraps around the platform. The skin can open up witha zipper to fit over the board, or it can be an elastic material thatstretches over the board. When the board is inflated, the skin has atight fit. The skin has hole openings and possibly grommets to reinforcethose holes. The button protrusions are held captive in the holes, andextend up above the top of the skin. They can be depressed just like theembodiment shown with the attachments plastic ends 6302.

FIG. 64A is a front view which shows an assembled Schrader core valve.The Schrader core valve has a top body 6401, a bottom body 6402, and acap 6403. FIG. 64B is a side cross-section view along the line B of FIG.64A showing the inside of the assembled Schrader type core valve. Thetop body 6401 has an affixed Schrader insert 6406, which is threaded toaccept a Schrader valve core 6405. The Schrader valve core 6405 is acommon type of valve found on car tires, bicycle tires, and many otherair inflation applications. The cap 6403 has an affixed threaded insert6404 which threads onto the external threads of the Schrader insert 6406to cover the valve and provide a smooth top. These valves are used forstanding platforms, so it is important for the cap 6403 to have a smoothprofile so it does not hurt to step on. The top body 6401 threads intothe bottom body 6402 and is sealed with an internal gasket 6407. FIG.64C is an upper isometric view showing the top of the assembly. The topof the cap 6403 has recesses 6408 to provide grip for fingers only inthe direction of removal. This limits the amount of tightening torquethe user can apply, while increasing the amount of removal torque. Thisprevents over tightening and ensures the user can get the cap back offwhile maintaining a mostly flat and smooth surface. FIG. 64D is a lowerisometric view showing the bottom of the assembly. There are openings6409 that allow air to flow through while blocking objects from enteringand damaging the valve. The bottom body 6402 has two wing ribs 6410which provides grip when screwing the two bodies together. FIG. 64E isan exploded upper isometric view showing the parts that make up theSchrader type core valve assembly.

FIG. 64F is a front view of a Schrader core valve clamped onto a sheet6411 of material that makes up the top surface of a standing platform.The sheet 6411 is clamped between the top body 6401 and the bottom body6402 of the valve. FIG. 64G is a side cross-section view along the lineG of FIG. 64F showing the top body 6401 threaded into the bottom body6402 with the sheet 6411 clamped between them. This embodiment has anadditional O-ring 6413 to provide additional sealing between the top ofthe sheet 6411 and the top body 6401. FIG. 64H is a detailed sidecross-section view of the region within the area H of FIG. 64G showingthe top body 6401 clamping the sheet 6411 against the bottom body 6402.The top O-ring 6413 seals against the sheet 6411 and is held in theO-ring groove 6412. FIG. 64I is an exploded lower isometric view showingthe O-ring 6413 removed from the O-ring groove 6412 of the top body 6401and the sheet 6411 fitting between the O-ring 6413 and the bottom body6402.

FIG. 65A is a side view of a typical air inflation hand pump. A typicalair inflation hand pump has a pump body 6501, a shaft 6502, a handle6503, a hose 6504, and a threaded end 6505. FIG. 65B is a frontcross-section view along the line B of FIG. 65A showing a typical airinflation hand pump. This shows that the shaft 6502 has an internal bore6506 and the piston 6507 compresses air in the pump body 6501. Checkvalve 6508 at the base of the pump lets air in, but does not let it outduring pumping. This is one example of a single action pump design.There are many different pump designs including dual action pumps, whichmove air when the pump is moved both up and down instead pumping only inone of those directions. Any pump design is suitable provided thedisplacement is large enough to fill the platforms in a timely mannerand that it can produce a pressure of at least 5 psi. FIG. 65C is anupper isometric view of the pump. FIG. 65D is a front view demonstratingan example of a quarter turn adapter that interfaces between a quarterturn valve and the pump hose threaded end 6505. The quarter turn adapterhas a body 6509, a vertical slot 6510, a horizontal slot 6511, a gasket6512, grips 6513, and a threaded fitting 6514. The threaded fitting 6514screws into the pump hose 6504 threaded end 6505. Quarter turn valveshave a locking cross bar, which slides into the vertical slot 6510 andthen grips 6513 permit the adapter to rotate 90 degrees to lock thecross bar into the horizontal slot 6511. The gasket 6512 provides anairtight seal against the quarter turn valve during inflation. FIG. 65Eis an example of a typical air needle 6515 which is used to fill certaintypes of air valves which can be used on the standing platform.

FIG. 66 (comprising FIGS. 66A-66L) demonstrates a rigid or semi-rigidedge of either hollow edge 6601 or framed edge 6605 with ribs 6602 tokeep it strong and lightweight. FIG. 66A is an upper isometric view of arigid or semi-rigid framed edge 6605 with reinforcing ribs 6602. Therigid or semi-rigid hollow edge 6601 can be bonded with an inflatabledrop stitch fabric by bonding to a top layer 6603 and a bottom layer6604 of the drop stitch fabric to create an inflatable standing platformas shown in FIGS. 66C-66D. FIG. 66B is an upper isometric view and FIG.66C is a front view of a rigid or semi-rigid hollow edge 6601 attachedto a top layer 6603 and bottom layer 6604 to create an inflatablestanding platform. FIG. 66D is a detailed view of the area D of FIG. 66Cshowing a more detailed view of the hollow edge 6601, top layer 6603,and bottom layer 6604. FIG. 66F is a detailed cross-section view whichshows a rigid or semi-rigid hollow edge 6601 that is closed with roundedcorners, the rounded corners keep the drop stitch material 6608 frombeing damaged by sharp corners that could shear or tear the top layer6603 when a user loads it, such as by standing upon it. The rigid orsemi-rigid edge, either edge 6601, 6605, 6606, and 6609, may also beattached to a top layer 6603, bottom layer 6604, and side rail 6607 thatcovers the entire perimeter of the standing platform as shown, usingedge 6609, in FIG. 66K. FIG. 66K is a detailed cross-section view whichalso demonstrates a rigid or semi rigid edge 6609 that has the top andbottom edges of 6609 lined up so that no bump is formed after inflationalong the perimeter of the top layer 6603. The rigid or semi-rigidhollow edge 6601 makes the inflatable standing platform easier to tiltor rock.

FIG. 66E is a detailed cross-section view which shows how the standingplatform can be made to form a bump around the perimeter of the toplayer 6603 by using a framed edge 6605. The perimeter bump serves as asofter surface for the user to place their feet and can also alert theuser when their feet are near the edge of the standing platform. Asshown in FIG. 66E, the reason the perimeter bump is formed is becausethe top edge and the bottom edge of 6605 do not line up with each other,unlike as shown with hollowed edge 6601 in FIG. 66F. As shown in FIGS.66G-66J, the rigid or semi-rigid edge can be two separate end pieces6606 instead of one whole hollow edge 6601. FIG. 66H is an upperisometric view of two separate end pieced 6606. FIG. 66G is an upperisometric view, FIG. 66I is a front view, and FIG. 66J is a detailedview within the area J of FIG. 66I which show two separate end pieces6606 attached to a top layer 6603, a bottom layer 6604, and two siderails 6607. The side rails 6607 overlap the top layer 6603, and thebottom layer 6604, as shown in FIG. 66L. FIG. 66L is a detailed sectionview which shows how the side rails 6607 are attached to the top layer6603 and bottom layer 6604. The side rails 6607 also overlap a portionof the two separate rigid or semi rigid end pieces 6606, the top layer6603, and the bottom layer 6604 as shown in FIG. 66J. The rigid orsemi-rigid edge 6601, 6605, 6606, and 6609 can be soft or hard and mayalso be double shot with multiple durometer layers of material tocontrol the rigidity of different regions.

FIG. 67 (comprising FIGS. 67A-67F) demonstrates a wireless powertransfer system 6705 that can be used to power objects on a rigid orsemi-rigid standing platform 6706. FIG. 67A is an upper isometric viewand FIG. 67C is an exploded upper isometric view of wireless powertransfer system 6705 resting on top of the standing platform 6706. FIG.67D is an upper isometric view of the standing platform 6706 resting onthe wireless power transfer system 6705. The wireless power transfersystem 6705 may use magnetic induction coupling or magnetic resonancecoupling power transfer technology to power devices that can be usedwith the standing platform 6706. The transmitter coils 6703 in thewireless power transfer system 6705 generate an alternating magneticfield when an alternating electric current passes through them. Whenreceiver coils, which are installed in the devices that will be powered,are close to the transmitter coils 6703, magnetic flux passes throughthem creating an electric current, proportional to Faraday's law, topower the device. When power needs to be transferred to larger distancesa material with a high permeability can be used in between thetransmitter and receiver. Increasing the strength of the magnetic field,increasing the mutual inductance, or changing other electromagneticproperties of the system can also increase the distance that power canbe transferred. If the transmitter and the receiver can be made toresonate at the same frequency, then power can be transferred wirelesslyat higher efficiencies for larger distances as was shown by MarinSoljacic and his team (U.S. Pat. No. 7,825,543 B2). The wireless powertransfer system 6705 can be placed on top of the standing platform 6706,on the bottom of the standing platform 6706, or be integrated into thestanding platform 6706. The large array of coils 6703 ensures that anydevice that is being powered by the wireless power transfer system 6705will always be efficiently powered while on the standing platform 6706.The wireless power transfer system 6705 can have a magnetically attachedplug 6701. The coils 6703 of the power transfer system 6705 aresandwiched between two layers, 6702 and 6704. Each layer can be soft,hard, rigid, semi-rigid, or non-rigid. FIG. 67B is an exploded upperisometric view showing the various parts of the wireless power transfersystem 6705 which include the magnetic plug 6701, the top layer 6702,the large array of coils 6703, and the bottom layer 6704. FIG. 67E is anupper isometric view and FIG. 67F is a front cross-section view whichshow an alternate embodiment, where the standing platform 6708 has acavity within it. The internal wireless power transfer system 6707 fitsinto the platform 6708 with cavity and is enclosed. The platform 6708with cavity can be any type of material mentioned including foam, aninflatable, or plastic.

FIG. 68A is a detailed partial front view, only showing the end of astanding platform 6801 when it is flat on the ground. FIGS. 68B-68G showthe end of a platform 6801 as the platform is tilted up under a load atincreasing angles. FIG. 68B, FIG. 68C, FIG. 68D, FIG. 68E, FIG. 68F, andFIG. 68G are detailed partial front views with the end of a standingplatform 6801 tilting under load to angles 1, 2.5, 5, 10, 20, and 30degrees, respectively. Under load, the bottom surface 6803 of theplatform 6801 lifts off the ground, while a small contact patch area6802 deforms flat under load and remains in contact with the ground. Thecontact patch center 6804 is marked with a point on the contact patcharea 6802 of each FIGure. FIG. 68H is a detailed front view whichoverlays the position for FIGS. 68B-68G of the contact patch center 6804over a standing platform 6801 at rest. These contact patch centers 6804form a line that defines the equivalent curve 6806. The actual radius ofthe curved edge 6805 is shown to be 25 mm, providing a rocking region.However, when a user rocks on the edge, the platform 6801 behaves likeit has a curved edge equal to the equivalent edge 6806, which is shownto be 45 mm, providing a larger effective rocking region. This is due tothe collapsing edge. This behavior continues beyond the 30 degrees shownin FIG. 68G to 45 degrees or even further as the user continues to tiltfurther. If the edge is rigid, the effective radius of curvature remains25 mm throughout the rocking motion, providing a fixed rocking region.Setting the platform 6801 to have different stiffness values changes theratio of the equivalent radius to the actual radius, providing a changeto the effective rocking region.

FIG. 69A is an upper isometric view and FIG. 69B is a front view showingstanding platform cover 6901 that has a zipper 6902 and zipper teeth6904 to allow it to open and close. The cover 6901 can open so that itcan be installed over an inflatable standing platform. The standingplatform cover 6901 can be made out of an elastic or non-elasticmaterial, have hard panels with elastic sides, or be some variation ofelastic, non-elastic, hard, soft, rigid, semi-rigid, or non-rigidmaterial. FIG. 69C is a lower isometric view of a standing platformcover 6901 where the bottom surface of the cover is comprised of a meshof elastic bands 6903 rather than fabric. The elastic bands 6903 allowthe cover 6901 to stretch so it can be installed on a pre-inflatedplatform. The elastic bands 6903 also allow the cover to stretch so thatit conforms with the standing platform even as it is deformed. FIG. 69Dis an upper isometric view showing the standing platform cover 6901 withzipper 6902 and zipper teeth 6904 unzipped and opened. If the standingplatform cover 6901 is made of non-elastic material an inflatablestanding platform can have the cover 6901 installed by deflating thestanding platform, placing the standing platform inside the cover, theninflating the standing platform and zipping up the cover 6901. Thestanding platform cover 6901 can employ other types of closing andopening mechanisms such as Velcro™, mircosuction tape, magnets,overlapping fabric, and buttons. The cover fabric can be made to be avariety of colors so the user can customize their standing platform byswapping covers. The standing platform cover 6901 can also be groundedby being attached to a ground terminal while being made of conductivematerial.

FIG. 70 (comprising FIGS. 70A-70C) shows a platform 7001 that has aconcave edge around its perimeter. FIG. 70A shows a platform 7001 withan elliptical concave profile 7002 on one end of the board, and acircular concave profile 7003 on the other end. A variety of profileshapes can be used, and they can have a constant profile around theboard, or they can transition between different profile shapes (e.g.,elliptical or circular shape). This type of edge creates a near edgeregion that has a compression modulus lower than the center of the boardusing geometry alone. This allows a board that is made of a singlematerial to achieve a soft conforming edge while having a stiffer centerarea. FIG. 70B shows how the concave ends 7002 and 7003 flex and deformeasier than the solid center section. FIG. 70C shows the platform 7001in use, where a user is tilting the board 7001 on the elliptical concaveend 7002. The end 7002 flexes between the user's right foot 7005 and theground 7004 so that the board 7001 can tilt up. The user's left foot7006 is positioned on the center area of the platform 7001 and is liftedup by the tilting board. The circular concave end 7003 is undeformed andfreely lifted.

Various embodiments of the standing platform disclosed herein may bedistributed in conjunction with accessories as described below andelsewhere herein. For example, one or more embodiments of the standingplatform may be distributed in packaging including a standing platformand one or more of the following disclosed accessories: compliant ornon-compliant rocking bottom 915, toroidal compliant or non-compliantbase 916, corner supports 1302, clips 1902, ramp attachment 2001,elastic bands 3303, adjustable tilting base 3602, rigid insert 4206,front-to-back roller 4208, fixed adjustable spacer 4209, side-to-sideroller 4210, pads 4305, elastic bands 4306, corrective foot pads 4402,rigid plate 4502, damping foam toroidal ring 4607. The combination of astanding platform and one or more of the foregoing accessories may takethe form of a kit that is distributed through various channels ofdistribution. The kit may also include an instruction sheet, which maybe separate from or form a portion of a user manual, with instructionsprinted thereon to direct a user how to use the mat and how to employthe enclosed accessories in connection with the enclosed standing mat.For example, the instruction sheet may have printed thereon instructionsto employ an enclosed pump to inflate the standing mat to withincharacteristics (as disclosed elsewhere herein) that are specified onthe instruction sheet.

While the devices have been disclosed in connection with advantageousembodiments, it is not intended to limit the scope of the devices to theparticular forms set forth, but on the contrary, it is intended to coversuch alternatives, modifications, and equivalents as may be within thespirit and scope of the devices as defined by the appended claims.

Miscellaneous Specifications

A mat for standing comprising: an upper surface that accepts a standinguser when the mat is placed on a floor surface; a length measured acrossa greatest span of the upper surface that is substantially longer thanand perpendicular to any width measured across the upper surface, thelength being no longer than 39 inches and no shorter than 16 inches; alower surface positioned substantially opposite to the upper surface andconnected to the upper surface by at least an edge of the mat, anexternal portion of the lower surface contacting the floor surface, themat characterized by a linear compression modulus, measured at the uppersurface, over an entire range of available strain, the linearcompression modulus having a given coefficient of determination value ofat least 0.92; and the mat characterized by a line, parallel to thegreatest span, that permits a first foot position and a second footposition having the same relative position to the line and substantiallyperpendicular to the line, wherein the first position is entirely withinthe perimeter of the mat and the second position is such that at leastone of a heel or a ball of the foot are at least one of nearer, at, orextending beyond the edge and a c enter of the foot remains completelywithin the perimeter of the mat, the mat characterized by a lowercompression modulus near the edge, such that the position of the foot inthe second position, is in a less stable location than the firstposition, the mat thereby facilitating the user to more easily rocktheir foot into at least one of the heel or the ball which encouragesand permits more user movement.

The mat having a plurality of widths, from one end of the length to theother end to include a range of widths that permit both a ball and aheel of a user's foot, when substantially perpendicular to the length,to be in a position where the ball and the heel are nearer, at, orextending beyond the edge, the mat characterized by a lower compressionmodulus nearer to the edge, such that the position of the foot, locatedin the range of widths, is in a less stable location than wider widthareas, the mat thereby facilitating the user to more easily rock theirfoot into the heel and into the ball which encourages and permits moreuser movement.

A kit comprising: a trampoline-like mat, comprising an upper surfacethat accepts a standing user when the mat is placed on a firm surface;and at least a first adjustment mechanism to permit adjustment of alinear compression modulus, measured at the upper surface, over anentire range of available strain, and the linear compression modulushaving a given coefficient of determination value of at least 0.92; andan instruction sheet having printed thereon instructions to employ theadjustment mechanism in a manner to cause the linear compression modulusto vary.

The kit of the prior paragraph [0885] wherein the mat is inflatable, thekit further comprising a pump for inflating the mat in accordance withinstructions on the instruction sheet.

A mat with a curved edge, that spans between an upper and a bottomsurface that is substantially oriented perpendicularly to the first andsecond axes, wherein a majority of the edge has an average radius ofcurvature of at least 0.5 inches and at most 2.5 inches;

An inflatable board that is pressurized between X and Y psi for a givenuser weight, higher weight means higher pressure.

The mat of wherein at least a portion of curvature of the edge isnon-linear.

The mat where the edge is curved along its continuum.

The mat wherein the linear compression modulus comprises: a linearcenter compression modulus within a range of 50-100 lb×in⁻²; a linearedge compression modulus within a range of 43-88 lb×in⁻²; and the linearedge compression modulus being 75% to 95% of the linear centercompression modulus.

The mat wherein the mat is curved along an oval shape.

The mat further comprising at least a first adjustment mechanism topermit adjustment of a coefficient of restitution, compression modulus,bending rigidity, and flexural rigidity in order to affect reboundingcharacteristics of the mat.

The mat further comprising at least a first adjustment mechanism topermit adjustment of the bending rigidity and the flexural rigidity andto permit adjustment to achieve an edge of at least 1.5 inches inheight, and characterized by a generally curved perimeter of generallycurved edge following any curved path along said perimeter.

The mat wherein at least a portion of curvature of the edge isnon-linear.

The mat where the edge is curved along its continuum.

The mat where the edge is substantially tapered.

The mat further characterized by an unloaded friction force of less than3 pounds and a dry 70 lb loaded friction force greater than 25 poundsand a wet 70 lb loaded friction force of at least 80% of the dry 70 lbloaded friction force

A curved bottom mat that that has a much higher rigidity and an archedbottom surface to permit rocking.

A regular shaped polygon or circular mat no wider than 29 inches.

A narrow board sized with feet always straddling a near edge area orhanging off into space.

The invention claimed is:
 1. A mat for standing comprising: an uppersurface that accepts a standing user when the mat is placed on a floorsurface; a length, measured across a greatest span of the upper surface,that is perpendicular to a greatest width measured across the uppersurface, the length being no longer than 39 inches and no shorter than16 inches, the width being no longer than 25 inches; a lower surfacepositioned substantially opposite to the upper surface and connected tothe upper surface by at least an edge of the mat, an external portion ofthe lower surface contacting the floor surface; a linear compressionmodulus, measured at the upper surface, over an entire range ofavailable strain, the linear compression modulus having a givencoefficient of determination value of at least 0.98; and at least afirst adjustment mechanism that is operable to modify the linearcompression modulus to be within a range of 40 to 100 lb×in⁻²; the matcharacterized by a line, parallel to the greatest span, that permits auser with shoulders, hips, and knees oriented parallel to the line tohave a first foot position and a second foot position having the samerelative intersection and angle to the line, wherein the first footposition is entirely within a center area of the mat and the second footposition is such that a ball of the foot is in a near edge area and aheel of the foot is within the center area, the mat characterized by alower compression modulus in the near edge area than in the remainingarea, such that the position of the foot in the second position is in aless stable location than the first position, the mat therebyfacilitating the user to more easily rock their foot due to the lowercompression modulus in the near edge area which encourages more usermovement.
 2. The mat of claim 1 wherein at least a portion of asurrounding edge and the near edge area of the upper surface compressesto conform to the bottom of a standing user's foot when the edge iscompressed by downward force applied by the user such that one portionof the user's foot straddling the edge is able to approach the floorsurface while the other portion of the user's foot maintains contactwith the upper surface of the mat.
 3. The mat of claim 1 wherein acentral region of the upper surface has a linear compression modulusthat is a linear center compression modulus that is or is adjustable tobe within a range of 50 to 100 lb×in⁻².
 4. The mat of claim 1 wherein atleast a portion of the linear compression modulus measured at the uppersurface is a linear edge compression modulus that is or is adjustable tobe within a range of 43 to 88 lb×in⁻².
 5. The mat of claim 1 furthercharacterized by: a bending rigidity that is or is adjustable to bewithin a range of 15 to 122 lb×in⁻¹; and a flexural rigidity that is oris adjustable to be between 2,000 and 101,000 lb×in².
 6. The mat ofclaim 5 further characterized by a mass less than ten pounds to permitthe mat to be easily moved by the user's foot.
 7. The mat of claim 5further characterized by a mat density less than 0.013 lb×in⁻³ to permitthe mat to be easily moved by the user's foot.
 8. The mat of claim 5further characterized by a surface pressure less than 0.026 lb×in⁻² topermit the mat to be easily moved by the user's foot.
 9. The mat ofclaim 1 further characterized by a coefficient of restitution within arange of 0.70 to 0.80.
 10. The mat of claim 1 comprising an inflatableair bladder capable of being pressurized to at least a first pressurewithin a range of 2 to 5 lb×in⁻².
 11. The mat of claim 1 wherein the atleast a first adjustment mechanism permits an adjustment that can modifythe linear compression modulus within a range of 50 to 80 lb×in⁻². 12.The mat of claim 1 wherein the linear compression modulus has a givencoefficient of determination value of at least 0.99.
 13. A mat forstanding, comprising: an upper surface; a lower surface attached to theupper surface; at least one of the upper and lower surfaces beingsubstantially planar; a length measured across a greatest span of theupper surface that is perpendicular to a greatest width measured acrossthe upper surface, the length being no longer than 39 inches and noshorter than 16 inches, the width being no longer than 25 inches; agenerally vertically oriented edge, connecting the lower surface to theupper surface, that conforms under the weight of a standing user to thesurface of at least one of the standing user's feet pressing upon themat, wherein the mat is characterized by a mat thickness between 0.5 and4 inches and has or is adjustable to have a bending rigidity between 15and 122 lb×in⁻¹ and a flexural rigidity between 2,000 and 101,000 lb×in²such that the mat is self-supporting, the combination of the rigidity,the length, the width, the mat thickness, and the generally verticallyoriented edge permitting the standing user with both feet positioned onopposite ends of the mat to rock the mat off the floor on one end usingonly the standing user's feet, wherein the generally vertically orientededge comprises at least one rounded convex or concave portion such thatwhen force is exerted at one end, the opposing end elevates off of thefloor surface, wherein the mat is characterized by a range of lineardeflection spanning downward at least 0.5 inches for a range of forcesachievable by an adult sized user when standing and pushing the balls ofthe adult sized user's feet into the device as the adult sized user'sweight shifts from one leg to another where at least 80% of theresulting deflection of the mat remains within the range of lineardeflection, wherein the upper surface has a central region, the centralregion having a center compression modulus, and wherein the mat isfurther characterized by a linear edge compression modulus, wherein theedge compression modulus is significantly softer than the centercompression modulus and the mat provides rebounding characteristics fora user.
 14. The mat of claim 13, wherein at least one portion of the matis gas-filled.
 15. The mat of claim 13 wherein the lower surfacecomprises a substantially planar central portion.
 16. The mat of claim15 wherein the surface area of the substantially planar central portionis equal to at least 85% of the surface area of the lower surface. 17.The mat of claim 13 wherein the length is no longer than 34 inches andno shorter than 19 inches.
 18. A mat for standing, comprising: an uppersurface; a lower surface attached to the upper surface; a lengthmeasured across a greatest span of the upper surface that isperpendicular to a greatest width measured across the upper surface, thelength being no longer than 39 inches and no shorter than 16 inches, thewidth being no longer than 25 inches; a generally vertically orientededge, connecting the lower surface to the upper surface, that conformsunder the weight of a standing user to the surface of at least one ofthe standing user's feet pressing upon the mat; a mat thickness between0.5 and 4 inches, a bending rigidity that is or is adjustable to bebetween 15 and 122 lb×in⁻¹, and a flexural rigidity between 2,000 and101,000 lb×in² such that the mat is self-supporting, the combination ofthe rigidity, the length, the width, the mat thickness, and thegenerally vertically oriented edge permitting the standing user withboth feet positioned on opposite ends of the mat to rock the mat off thefloor on one end using only the standing user's feet; and at least afirst adjustment mechanism to permit adjustment of the bending rigidityand of the flexural rigidity and also to permit adjustment of a linearcenter compression modulus, measured at the upper surface, to be a valuewithin a range of 50 to 100 psi over a final 50% strain of availablestrain, and a given coefficient of determination value of at least 0.98at least one of the upper and lower surfaces being substantially planar,and the lower surface comprising a substantially planar central portion.19. The mat of claim 18 wherein the mat has a mass of less than tenpounds.
 20. A mat for standing, comprising: an upper surface thataccepts a standing user when the mat is placed on a firm surface; alength, measured across a greatest span of the upper surface, that isperpendicular to a greatest width measured across the upper surface, thelength being no longer than 39 inches and no shorter than 16 inches, thewidth being no longer than 25 inches, the length being sufficient topermit the user to place the user's feet near opposite ends of thelength; and at least a first adjustment mechanism to permit adjustmentof a linear compression modulus, measured in a center area of the uppersurface, to be within a range of 40 to 100 lb×in⁻² over a last 50%strain of available strain, and wherein the linear compression modulushas a given coefficient of determination value of at least 0.98.
 21. Themat of claim 20 further comprising a front edge and a rear edgesubstantially opposite to the front edge, a lower surface comprising aflat region, and a rocking region positioned near the perimeter of themat, the flat region disposed between the rocking region along the frontedge and the rocking region along the rear edge wherein the flat regionon the lower surface of the mat is no longer than 29.6 inches.
 22. Themat of claim 20 further comprising a front edge and a rear edgesubstantially opposite to the front edge, a lower surface comprising aflat region, and a rocking region positioned near the perimeter of themat, the flat region disposed between the rocking region along the frontedge and the rocking region along the rear edge wherein the flat regionon the lower surface of the mat has a greatest span that is no shorterthan 13.5 inches.
 23. A standing mat, comprising: a first surface, and asecond surface positioned opposite to the first surface, the first andsecond surfaces connected to each other by at least an edge of the mat,each surface accepting a standing user when the opposing surface isplaced on a floor surface; a length measured across a greatest span ofeither the first or the second surface that is perpendicular to agreatest width measured across either the first or the second surface,the length being no longer than 39 inches and no shorter than 16 inches,the width being no longer than 25 inches; a rocking region extendingaround at least a portion of a perimeter of the mat; and at least afirst adjustment mechanism to permit adjustment of a linear compressionmodulus, measured at an upper surface corresponding to the surfaceopposite to the surface placed on the floor surface, over a final 50%strain of available strain, the linear compression modulus having agiven coefficient of determination value of at 0.98, the mat beingcharacterized by at least one of the first surface or the second surfacebeing substantially planar, a bending rigidity that is or is adjustableto be within a range of 15 to 122 lb×in⁻¹, and a flexural rigidity thatis or is adjustable to be between 2,000 and 101,000 lb×in², the bendingrigidity and the flexural rigidity being sufficient that the rockingregion permits the user with both feet positioned on opposite ends ofthe mat to generate a pushback force that is felt against their firstfoot by significantly shifting their weight to their second foot toapply downward force to the rocking region and by rocking the board offthe floor on one end, using only their feet, the feeling of the pushbackforce encouraging the user to move more, and wherein the rocking regionis positioned along the perimeter of the mat, and wherein the edgeoperates to functionally extend the rocking region by at least partiallycollapsing and conforming to pressure applied by the feet.
 24. The matof claim 23 wherein the first adjustment mechanism permits adjustment toachieve an edge of at least 1.5 inches in height.
 25. The mat of claim24, wherein at least one portion of the mat is gas-filled.